---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,transcriber's ,note3 ,this version of the text cannot represent certain typographical effects4 ,italics are delimited with the #8' character as italic4 ,the many illustrations are indicated as ,illustration3 caption4 ,where the illustration appears in mid-paragraph1 this will appear within the paragraph1 at its approximate position4 ,occasionally1 numbered full page illustrations appeared out of order in the original4 ,the numbered figures #ebj1 #eba and #ebb appear in the text out of sequence1 though all references to them are correct4 ,the sequence has been retained here4 ,the single footnote has been moved to follow the paragraph in which it is referenced4 ,minor errors1 attributable to the printer1 have been corrected4 ,please see the transcriber's note at the end of this text for details regarding the handling of any textual issues encountered during its preparation4 ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ,,and ,,do ,illustration ,new ,ideas for ,work and ,play ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ,,and ,,do ,,by ,lina ,beard and ,adelia ,b4 ,beard ,new ,york ,charles ,scribner's ,sons #aijb ,,copyright1 #aijb1 ,,by ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons --- ,published1 ,october1 #aijb ,,trow ,,directory ,,printing ,,and ,,bookbinding ,,company ,,new ,,york ,,preface ,this new century1 bringing with it the strong1 healthy1 independent1 athletic ,american girl1 makes a demand for new opportunities for the exercise of both mind and body4 ,resourcefulness and a wish to do things for one's self are ,american traits strongly developed in the girls as well as in the boys2 and1 keeping step with their brothers1 our girls are walking steadily onward1 with new hopes and new ambitions in work and play1 and are reaping new rewards4 ,this book is the result of the authors' earnest desire to be of some assistance to their young friends by encouraging them in their wish to do things for themselves1 and by pointing out some directions in which they may gratify this ambition4 ,within its covers are suggestions for a wide variety of things1 useful1 instructive1 and entertaining1 which a girl may make and do1 with wholesome and genuine pleasure4 ,the ideas that are worked out are essentially those of the authors1 and are not1 as is often the case1 derived from other books4 ,the drawings1 too1 are all original1 as in 8,the ,american ,girl's ,handy ,book10 to which this is a companion volume4 ,in conclusion the authors wish to express their sincere thanks to the ,delineator and the ,woman's ,home ,companion1 whose prompt and generous courtesy1 in returning such original drawings and material as were used in their respective magazines1 has greatly facilitated the preparation of this work and added to its interest4 ,,flushing1 ,june #af1 #aijb4 ,,contents ---------- ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ------- ,,chapter ,i4 ,,page ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ,,with ,,hammer ,,and ,,saw #c ,the ,workshop1 #d2 ,tools1 #e2 ,the ,carpenter's ,bench1 #i2 ,a ,dressing-table1 #aa2 ,a ,wash-stand1 #ad2 ,a ,portable ,corner ,clothes-press1 #ae2 ,a ,five ,o'clock ,tea ,table1 #af2 ,a ,piazza ,flower-stand1 #ag2 ,a ,hooded ,chair ,made of a ,packing-box1 #ba4 ,,chapter ,,ii4 ,,possibilities ,,of ,,an ,,easter ,,egg #bf ,a ,frog that ,will ,swim1 #bf2 ,spinning ,egg1 #cj2 ,the ,kaleidoscope1 #ca2 ,easter ,hare1 #cb2 ,hares made of ,eggs1 #cc2 ,the ,brownie1 #cd2 ,fruits1 ,vegetables1 ,opera ,glasses1 and ,dishes1 #cf2 ,the ,radish1 #cg2 ,watermelon1 ,plum1 ,acorn1 #ch2 ,a ,dainty ,vase1 ,a ,unique ,little ,teapot1 #ci2 ,the ,sugar-bowl1 ,egg ,dippers1 #da4 ,,chapter ,,iii4 ,a ,,paper ,,easter #de ,an ,ostrich1 ,rabbit1 ,penguin1 and ,rooster1 #de2 ,changing an ,egg into a ,rooster1 #df2 ,the ,butterfly ,that ,will ,fly1 #ea2 ,the ,easter ,lily1 #eb4 ,,chapter ,,iv4 ,,vacation ,,work ,,with ,,nature',s ,,material #eg ,cone ,hanging-basket1 #eh2 ,sweet-grass ,mats1 #ei2 ,corn-husk ,basket1 #fj2 ,lavender ,sticks1 #fb2 ,braiding ,palm-grasses and ,corn-husks1 #fd4 ,,chapter ,v4 ,,collections #fi ,mounting the ,pictures1 #gj2 ,splitting the ,paper1 #gb2 ,hanging the ,picture1 #gc2 ,a ,portfolio1 #gd2 ,sunshine ,diary1 #ge2 ,a ,guest ,book1 #gh2 ,calendars1 #hj2 ,illustrating ,books1 #hb2 ,colored ,pictures and ,photographs1 #hc2 ,a ,photograph ,book1 #hd4 ,,chapter ,,vi4 ,,original ,,valentines #hi ,appropriate ,valentines1 #ij2 ,four-leaved ,clover1 #ij2 ,easel ,holding a ,picture1 #ia2 ,heart-shaped ,valentines1 #ic2 ,the ,fire-cracker1 #id2 ,pot of ,growing ,flowers1 #ie2 ,valentine for ,little ,friend1 #ih4 ,,chapter ,,vii4 ,,vegetable ,,animals ,,and ,,fruit ,,lanterns #aja ,potato ,turkey1 #ajb2 ,a ,shoat1 #ajc2 ,to ,make a ,turtle1 ,pumpkin ,lanterns1 #aje4 ,,chapter ,,viii4 ,,pasteboard ,,models ,,for ,a ,,home ,,drawing ,,class #ajg ,the ,pyramid1 #ajg2 ,pasteboard ,model of a ,church1 #ajh2 ,to ,make a ,house1 #aaa4 ,,chapter ,,ix4 ,,quick ,,ink ,,pictures #aah ,ink ,landscapes and ,marines1 #aai2 ,an ,ink ,butterfly1 ,an ,odd ,design1 ,the ,fantastic ,horses1 #abb2 ,a ,pair of ,birds1 ,ink ,plant ,sketches1 #abc4 ,,chapter ,x4 ,,moving ,,toys #abe ,the ,merry-go-round1 #abe2 ,the ,flag ,dance1 #acj2 ,button-mould ,tops1 #acb4 ,,chapter ,,xi4 ,,home-,,made ,,pyrotechnics #ace ,three-story ,red1 ,white and ,blue ,pin-wheel1 #ace2 ,fence ,pin-wheel1 #acg2 ,the ,sparkling ,calumet1 #adj2 ,roman ,candle1 #adb2 ,snap-fire1 #adb2 ,rushing ,comet1 #adc2 ,the ,pistol1 #add2 ,sky-rockets1 #ade4 ,,chapter ,,xii4 ,,monotypes #adh ,materials1 #adh2 ,how to ,paint1 #adi2 ,to ,paint ,heads1 #adi2 ,the ,printing1 #aej2 ,monotone ,monotypes1 #aea2 ,suitable ,papers1 #aea4 ,,chapter ,,xiii4 ,,priscilla ,,rugs #aec ,color ,schemes for ,rugs1 #aed2 ,the ,fire ,rug1 #aee2 ,the ,weight1 #aef2 ,how to ,cut and ,sew the ,rags1 #aeg2 ,cotton and ,wool ,rugs1 #aeh2 ,all-cotton ,rugs1 #aeh2 ,warps and ,fringe1 #aei2 ,dyeing the ,cloth1 #afj2 ,wool ,dyes1 #afj2 ,cotton ,dyes1 #afb4 ,,chapter ,,xiv4 ,a ,,peanut ,,noah',s ,,ark #afc ,how to ,make a ,pair of ,wings1 #afe2 ,to ,make a ,spider1 #aff2 ,to ,make ,rabbits and ,camels1 #afg2 ,to ,make a ,chick1 an ,elephant1 #afh2 an ,owl1 #afi2 ,storks1 ,lobsters1 #agj2 ,noah1 #aga2 ,to ,make the ,ark1 #agb4 ,,chapter ,,xv4 ,a ,,flower ,,feast #age ,to ,make the ,pineapple1 #age2 ,a ,fish1 #agf2 ,apples and ,fruit ,salad1 #agg2 ,the ,cups and ,saucers1 #agh2 ,snapping ,bonbons1 #agi2 ,baskets of ,green ,burs1 #ahj2 ,dandelion ,amusements1 #aha4 ,,chapter ,,xvi4 ,,basket-,,weaving #ahe ,materials for ,weaving1 #ahe2 ,to ,prepare the ,reeds1 #ahf2 ,weaving the ,basket1 #ahf2 ,covers and ,fastenings1 #aia2 ,to ,make a ,hinge1 #aib4 ,,chapter ,,xvii4 ,,an 8,,abe0 ,,lincoln ,,log-,,cabin #aid ,material1 #aif2 ,the ,door1 #bjj2 ,the ,chimney1 #bja2 ,to ,make a ,pond1 #bjd2 ,the ,walk1 #bje2 ,a ,well1 #bjf2 ,acorn ,bucket1 #bjg2 ,the ,trees1 #bjh2 ,the ,grass1 #bji2 ,the ,fence1 #baj2 ,a ,little ,turnstile1 #bab2 ,birch-bark ,canoe1 #bab2 ,wood-pile1 #bac2 ,a ,sawbuck1 #bac4 ,,chapter ,,xviii4 ,,queer ,,things ,,on ,,paper ,,and ,,blackboard ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,put ,,them ,,there #bae ,a ,funny ,little ,pig1 #bae2 ,a ,hen1 #bag2 ,a ,rose1 #bah2 ,a ,head1 #bbj2 ,the ,three ,blind ,mice1 ,a ,fish1 #bba2 ,turtles1 #bbb2 ,to make a ,duck1 #bbc2 ,the ,tulip1 #bbd2 ,common ,daisy1 #bbe4 ,,chapter ,,xix4 ,,home-,,made ,,musical ,,instruments #bbg ,how to ,make a ,harp1 #bbh2 ,a ,dulcimer1 #bbi2 ,music from ,finger-bowls1 #bcj2 ,a ,willow ,bugle-horn1 #bca2 ,bones1 #bcb2 ,crystal ,flute1 #bcb2 ,music from a ,comb1 #bcc2 ,grass-blade1 ,sea-shells1 ,musical ,fountain1 #bcd4 ,,chapter ,,xx4 ,,what ,,to ,,make ,,of ,,empty ,,spools #bcf ,to ,build the ,parthenon1 #bcf2 ,to ,make a ,set of ,furniture1 #bch2 ,the ,lamp1 #bci2 ,a ,wagon1 #bci2 ,a ,memorial ,arch1 #bdj2 ,to ,blow ,bubbles with a ,spool1 #bda2 ,cannon1 #bdc4 ,,chapter ,,xxi4 ,,christmas ,,decorations #bdd ,effective ,portire1 #bdf2 ,star and ,shepherd's ,crook1 #bdf2 ,a ,sconce1 #bdh2 ,tin-foil ,christmas-tree ,festoon1 #bdh2 ,tin-foil for ,fringe ,ruching1 #bdi2 ,fancy ,boxes1 #beb2 ,cornucopias1 ,christmas ,stockings1 ,bobbinet ,bags1 #bec2 ,holly-leaved ,festoons1 #bed2 ,pop-corn ,balls1 #bee2 ,strings of ,red ,cranberries1 ,peanuts1 #bef2 ,jewelry for the ,tree1 #beg2 ,gilded ,english ,walnut1 #beh4 ,,chapter ,,xxii4 ,,christmas ,,devices #bfj ,an ,all-day ,christmas ,pie1 #bfj2 ,the ,magic ,fireplace1 #bfc2 ,christmas ,tray1 #bfe2 ,a ,santa ,claus ,house1 #bff2 ,serving ,toast1 #bfg2 ,pice de ,rsistance1 #bfh2 ,jelly1 ,apples1 #bfi4 ,,chapter ,,xxiii4 ,,picture ,,writing ,,and ,,sign ,,language #bga ,symbols1 ,flower ,writing1 #bgc2 ,indian ,powwow1 #bgd2 ,a ,letter of ,colors1 #bgf4 ,,chapter ,,xxiv4 ,,statuary ,,tableaux #bha ,the ,stage1 #bha2 ,lights1 ,pedestals1 and ,costumes1 #bhb2 ,make-up1 #bhd2 ,the ,armless ,bust1 #bhe2 ,portrait ,medallion1 #bhf2 ,an ,egyptian ,statue1 #bhg2 ,pygmalion and ,galatea1 #bhh4 ,,chapter ,,xxv4 ,,witchery #bib ,feather ,tests1 #bic2 ,touchstone ,charm1 #bid2 ,naming the ,bedposts1 #bie2 ,witch ,writing1 #bie2 ,home or ,travel1 #big2 ,dreams1 #bih2 ,ghost ,ideas1 #bii2 ,fortune's ,wheel1 #cjj4 ,,chapter ,,xxvi4 ,,living ,,alphabet #cjc ,directions for ,drill1 #cjh2 ,the ,shields1 #cjh2 ,the ,letters1 #cji4 ,,chapter ,,xxvii4 ,,odd ,,gardens #caj ,a ,country ,garden in the ,city1 #caj2 ,the ,boxes1 #cac2 ,the ,flowers1 #cac2 ,a ,water ,garden1 #cad2 ,the ,soil1 #cae2 ,water ,plants1 #caf2 ,simpler ,water ,gardens1 #cag2 ,plants ,grown ,artificially in ,water1 #cag2 ,the ,green ,sponge1 #cah2 ,vegetables1 #cai2 ,friendship ,garden1 #cbj2 ,memory ,garden1 #cba ,,chapter ,,xxviii4 ,,active ,,games #cbb ,weavers and ,weft1 #cbb2 ,hoop ,dance1 #cbd2 ,the ,figures1 #cbf2 ,hoop ,tag1 #cbg2 ,the ,circus-hoop ,game1 #cbh2 ,hoop-race ,game1 #cbi2 ,jumping ,rope ,conquer ,game1 #ccj2 ,going to ,market1 #ccb2 ,passing ,by1 #ccb2 ,red1 ,white1 and ,blue1 #ccc4 ,,chapter ,,xxix4 ,,expensive ,,games ,,with ,,little ,,or ,,no ,,expense #ccd ,ping ,pong1 #ccd2 ,the ,rules1 #ccg2 ,scoring1 #cch2 ,terms ,used in ,ping ,pong1 #cci2 ,a ,make-believe ,sewing-machine1 #cdj2 ,a ,parlor ,croquet ,set1 #cda2 ,rules for ,croquet1 #cdc4 ,,chapter ,,xxx4 ,,basket ,,ball #cdf ,cost of an ,outfit1 #cdf2 ,baskets1 #cdh2 ,the ,ball1 #cdh2 ,set of ,players1 #cdi2 ,referee1 #cej2 ,umpire1 ,scorer1 #cea2 ,time-keeper1 ,linesmen1 #ceb2 ,centres1 ,forwards1 #ced2 ,guard1 #cee2 ,rules1 #cfj2 ,general ,fouls1 #cfb2 ,disqualifying ,fouls1 #cfc2 ,playing ,suit1 #cfd4 ,,chapter ,,xxxi4 ,,some ,,of ,,our ,,out-,,door ,,neighbors ,,and ,,where ,,to ,,look ,,for ,,them #cfe ,observation ,book1 #cff2 ,the ,squirrel1 #cfg2 ,the ,red ,squirrel1 ,the ,chipmunk1 #cfh2 ,the ,weasel1 #cfi2 ,salamander1 #cgj2 ,the ,cicadas1 #cga2 ,insect ,music1 #cgc2 ,the ,indian ,pipe1 ,the ,moccasin ,flower1 #cgd2 ,engraver ,beetle1 ,the ',coon1 #cge2 ,the ,flying ,squirrel1 ,luna ,moth1 #cgg2 ,woodchuck1 #chj2 ,the ,sea-shore1 #cha2 ,the ,jelly-fish1 ,sea-anemones1 #chb2 ,sea-urchins1 #chc2 ,starfish1 #chd4 ,,part ,i ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ,illustration3 ,fig4 #i4--,the ,girl at the ,bench4 ,,chapter ,i ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,make ,,with ,,hammer ,,and ,,saw ,this is an age when girls go to college and engage in athletic sports2 when they have their manual training1 as boys do and are learning to use their hands1 as never before1 in all sorts of skilful work4 ,the deftness of their fingers is utilized not alone in embroidery1 or what was once considered girl's work1 but in the manufacture of many useful1 artistic1 and beautiful objects once thought beyond their reach4 ,our girls no longer resort to the scissors to sharpen a lead-pencil or to their brother's chisel to pull out tacks2 they are beginning to know and appreciate the value of tools and are becoming proficient in their use4 ,if you are one of these modern girls1 girls of the twentieth century1 who like to use both brains and hands1 a little workshop stocked with a few good tools and material for carpentry work will give you many hours of pure enjoyment4 ,the tool-chest1 denied to girls of the past generation1 is yours for the asking2 the manual training in the public schools has given to many of you the advantage of learning the use of saw1 plane1 and hammer1 and your physical culture has produced the strength and energy for this active work4 ,the ,workshop ,just a room1 any room1 that will afford sufficient light for your work1 that is all you need for a beginning4 ,having the room you have a place for your first tool1 if it is necessary to collect them one at a time1 and it is much better to do that than to buy a cheap tool-chest4 ,when you have one tool make a place for it and keep it in its place4 ,a hammer1 a saw1 a hatchet1 a sharp knife1 a screw-driver1 a gimlet1 and a rule are the first tools you will need4 ,the writer once made a very good mantel-board1 cleated at the ends with rounded corners1 which has stood the heating and drying process of many winters over an open fire1 without warping1 and her tools were simply a hatchet1 a meat-saw1 and a pocket knife4 ,of course1 the work would have been much easier and more enjoyable had she possessed the proper tools1 but this example serves to show how few tools are absolutely necessary4 ,a plane1 a chisel1 and an auger-bit and brace will be needed later2 after that a gouge1 a try-square1 and a file4 ,these you may collect by degrees as your work grows more ambitious and you feel the need of them4 ,hooks1 nails1 tacks1 and screws can be bought as required4 ,have a hook for your saw and hang it up1 lay your plane on its side1 make a rack for your small tools something like ,fig4 #a1 and have a box for your shavings4 ,a shelf on which to keep your boxes of tacks and other small articles is indispensable2 each of these boxes should be labelled and kept in its place2 in fact1 to get the full enjoyment from your workshop you must keep it in order and the tools just where you may always expect to find them4 ,what the ,tools are for and ,how to ,use ,them ,the ,hammer4--,a carpenter's hammer is what you want1 not a tack hammer1 and it should be of medium weight4 ,you are to use it in driving nails1 in hammering things into place and in various ways not injurious to the hammer4 ,the manner in which you hold this tool will make all the difference in the way you drive a nail4 ,the hammer should be taken by the end of the handle and the head brought down squarely on the nail-head1 otherwise the nail will slant to one side or perhaps bend4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a4 ,the ,saw4--,the panel-saw is best suited to ordinary work1 one having about ten teeth to the inch4 ,finer saws make a smoother cut1 and you will probably find use for several1 but one is enough to begin with4 ,the saw is used for cutting large pieces of wood and for cutting across grain1 and special saws serve for special purposes1 such as sawing of curves and cutting out keyholes4 ,with pencil and rule draw the line you wish your saw to follow4 ,stand above your work so that you may see the pencil line2 hold the saw firmly in the right hand and with the left grasp the board1 allowing your thumb to rest on the saw1 above the teeth4 ,this is to help guide the saw and to prevent cutting your hand4 ,take light1 short strokes at first1 then longer ones1 using a little more force1 and keep your saw at right angles with the board4 ,if your material is large and heavy place it across two wooden horses1 if light or small it is best to use a mitre-box4 ,the ,hatchet4--,you will find a good medium-sized hatchet with a sharp edge very useful1 for cutting away or trimming1 but it must be used with care1 for to chop too vigorously will frequently split the wood4 ,see that your hatchet does not follow the grain of the wood unless the grain runs in the direction you wish your cut to take4 ,the ,knife4--,not a dainty pearl-handled pocket-knife but a strong1 well-made1 sharp-bladed jack-knife1 large enough for all kinds of whittling4 ,the knife is for fine cutting that cannot be done with the hatchet1 and when one learns to whittle out various small articles much has been accomplished4 ,the ,screw-driver4--,it has been said that the feminine mind cannot grasp the difference between a screw-driver1 a cork-screw1 and a gimlet1 and it remains with you to prove the contrary4 ,a poor screw-driver is one of the most exasperating of poor tools1 and a trial to one's patience and temper2 besides1 it is of little use attempting to 8make it do10 for it seldom will do4 ,the edge is usually shaped like ,fig4 #b1 and it slides and slips out of the groove of the screw until it has turned and worn down its edges and made the screw useless4 ,fig4 #c shows the proper shape for a screw-driver4 ,the use of the tool is1 of course1 to put in and take out screws1 and it is well to have two sizes1 one for large1 the other for small screws4 ,remember that in putting in a screw you turn it to the right1 and to the left in taking it out4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b ,fig4 #c4 ,the ,gimlet4--,a medium-sized gimlet will answer your purpose4 ,use it for boring small holes and for starting holes for screws and large nails4 ,the ,rule4--,a rule is indispensable for measuring and laying out your work4 ,a two-foot steel rule is the most useful1 as it can be used both for measuring and ruling straight lines4 ,a light folding rule is easier to handle in taking measurements1 but you can make the other answer both purposes4 ,in taking measurements be as accurate as possible1 and go over them several times to make sure they are correct4 ,in ruling a line use the bevelled edge of the rule1 hold it firmly in place with your left hand1 and with a soft pencil in your right draw a line close to the edge of the rule4 ,the wide1 rather flat carpenter's pencils are the best to use1 but any soft lead-pencil will answer4 ,the ,plane4--,there are several kinds of planes1 but the smoothing-plane will probably be all you will need1 as you will not be likely to attempt to handle unplaned wood and will need the smoothing-plane only for finishing and smoothing off4 ,in using the plane hold it back of the iron 7or blade7 with your right hand1 place your left on the stock 7or wood7 at the other end to help guide it1 and push it forward as far as you can conveniently reach1 bring it back1 tipping it away from you in so doing1 and take another stroke4 ,the farther the edge of the iron projects through the stock the deeper will be the cut and the thicker the shaving4 ,to regulate this1 tap on the stock at the forward end and loosen the iron1 then adjust it to suit your work and fix it in place by driving down the wedge1 which holds it1 with a few light taps4 ,the ,chisel4--,this tool has a bevelled edge and is used for paring off the wood4 ,unless you are quite careful there is danger of cutting your left hand in using the chisel1 and it is best not to try to hold the work1 but to fasten it in the vice2 your left hand placed on the tool will steady and control it4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d ,fig4 #e4 ,auger-bit and ,brace4--,for drilling large holes the auger-bit and brace are necessary4 ,the bit resembles a gimlet in its spiral edge1 but is not wedge-shaped1 and the hole it makes is of unvarying size4 ,you may have several bits for large or smaller holes4 ,the brace is a handle which fits on the top of the bit1 and makes it quite easy to manage4 ,the ,gouge4--,there are several kinds of gouges1 the difference being in the shape of the blade2 their curves vary from the shallow curve1 ,fig4 #d1 to the deeper one1 ,fig4 #e4 ,one with a moderate curve will prove the most useful4 ,as the name suggests1 the gouge is for gouging out the wood where it is necessary to make a groove1 but be careful not to press too hard on the tool at first1 as one is apt to make too deep a cut1 and do not put your left hand in front of the blade4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #f4 ,the ,try-square4--,the square is a metal strip which forms an exact right angle and is used to test one's work and keep it 8square02 it is also used for ruling square corners4 ,fig4 #f shows its use in squaring off the end of a board4 ,figs4 #g and #h show how the try-square will fit on an edge that is perfectly square and will not fit an imperfect one4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #g4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #h4 ,the ,file4--,this tool is not indispensable1 but is useful for smoothing off rounding edges and rough corners4 ,files for metal and those for wood differ1 and should not be used indiscriminately4 ,rub the file back and forth over the surface to be smoothed1 but do not press on it too heavily4 ,if you are to use metal in your work a metal file is necessary4 ,for wood a slightly curved surface is best4 ,the ,carpenter's ,bench ,when you can attain to a regular carpenter's bench you will indeed be happy1 but until then use a strong kitchen table that sits firmly on the floor or1 better still1 is fastened so that it cannot move4 ,have a carpenter add sides 7a1 ,fig4 #i71 and a vice 7b1 ,fig4 #i74 ,see page #b4 ,you can hardly get along without a vice1 for it is impossible to hold some of the work firmly enough without it4 ,the ,horses ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aj4 ,these wooden horses are convenient for holding boards when they are to be sawed1 and for lifting work from the floor4 ,you should have two of them1 like ,fig4 #aj1 made by the carpenter4 ,the ,mitre-box ,this very useful contrivance is simply three pieces of narrow boards put together in the form of a box1 having two sides and a bottom1 but no ends or top4 ,eighteen inches is a suitable length1 and its height should be no greater than the width of your saw4 ,the mitre-box is used for holding the wood and guiding the saw at any angle4 ,in the sides of the box are slits running from top to bottom1 some passing diagonally1 some at right angles through the boards4 ,any carpenter can make you a mitre-box2 do not attempt one yourself1 for to be of use it must be accurately made in every particular4 ,choosing the ,wood ,it is well to know a little about what kind of wood to select when you are buying your material1 for if you wish to make a durable article1 one that will last long enough to pay for the making1 you should not use wood that will warp and in a little while spoil your piece of work4 ,the heart-wood is always the best3 this consists of boards cut from the heart1 or centre1 of the tree2 they are harder1 dryer than others1 and less likely to warp or twist4 ,the sap-wood1 which is the part nearer the surface1 contains so much sap it is difficult to season and will generally warp4 ,select the boards yourself if possible1 and see that they are planed equally on both sides and have square edges4 ,do not take a cracked board1 a board with knot-holes or loose knots1 or one that seems damp or musty1 and be sure1 if you can1 that all your wood is well-seasoned4 ,soft woods are best for your purpose at first1 and while pine is very good1 white-wood is better1 and is easily worked4 ,what to ,make ,illustration3 ,the ,dressing-,table4 ,and now that all is ready and the workshop well stocked1 what shall we make8 ,what shall we not make1 rather8 ,suppose we begin with a few simple pieces of furniture suitable for a summer cottage1 a log-camp1 or a play-house4 ,we will use boxes1 clothes-horses1 or anything of the kind that will make a good foundation for the article and save extra work4 ,when you feel that you can construct a piece of furniture without such helps1 do so by all means1 but at first do not scorn the humble box and barrel1 they are excellent things to practise on4 ,we will start with ,a ,dressing-,table ,since the writer made one herself for her room in a log-house in the mountains of ,pennsylvania1 she is quite sure it can be done with very little practice in carpentry or cabinet-making4 ,fig4 #aa4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ab4 ,the dressing-table is made of two pine shelves1 two cigar-boxes1 two small brackets1 and an ordinary mirror4 ,for the large shelf choose a board about twelve inches wide or wider1 if you have one1 measure the space your dressing-table is to occupy1 mark the size on the board with a pencil1 using your try-square to make your line at right angles with the edge of your board1 and saw off the board at the ruled line4 ,if the room is neither plastered nor ceiled and the uprights are left uncovered1 let the large shelf reach across from one upright to the next1 and make the smaller shelf just long and wide enough to fit in between4 ,saw out your supporting braces after the pattern given in ,fig4 #aa1 with the grain of the wood running up and down1 making six in all2 two for the large shelf1 two for the small shelf1 and two for the little side-brackets4 ,draw a line at each end of your shelf where the brace is to be fastened1 and on this line bore two holes entirely through the board4 ,with screws long enough to reach through the shelf and into the braces fasten the shelf and braces together1 ,fig4 #ab4 ,bore a hole near the bottom edge of each brace1 as in ,fig4 #ac1 and directly over each brace screw into the top of the shelf1 as near the edge as possible1 a screw-eye1 ,fig4 #ad4 ,cover both shelves with pretty cretonne1 putting a ruffle on the large shelf and drawing the material neatly over the edges of the smaller one4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ac4 ,on each end of the large shelf tack a cigar-box1 which you have previously painted white4 ,these boxes are for holding brushes and combs4 ,screw strong hooks into the uprights at the proper distance from the floor1 then hook your large shelf on by the screw-eyes at the top1 and screw the braces to the uprights through the holes at their lower corners4 ,the upper shelf1 not being so heavy1 needs only the hooks and screw-eyes to support it1 and screws at the bottom of the braces are unnecessary4 ,hang this only a little way above the other shelf4 ,make the small brackets of thinner wood and let them be square1 of a size to fit the uprights4 ,one brace for each bracket is all that is necessary1 and the braces must1 of course1 be smaller than ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ad4 those used for the shelves4 ,paint the brackets white like the side boxes2 enamel paint is the best to use1 as it gives a hard1 smooth surface4 ,only the hooks and screw-eyes are required to hold the brackets4 ,hang the mirror with its bottom edge resting on the top shelf1 as shown in the illustration4 ,illustration3 ,the ,washstand4 ,a ,wash-stand to go with the toilet table is constructed on the same principle2 the shelf used for this1 however1 must be wider in order to hold the wash-basin4 ,if cutting a round hole in the shelf1 like ,fig4 #ae1 is too difficult1 do not attempt it1 but leave the surface plain and place your bowl on top4 ,make your braces quite strong and screw them to the wall4 ,make side-brackets1 as for the dressing-table1 and cover them and the shelf with white enamel cloth4 ,cut the edge of this in points1 turn it over and tack to the edge of the shelf with white-headed tacks4 ,the illustration will give you an idea of the appearance of this wash-stand4 ,for ,the ,towel-rack use two broom-sticks1 cut one shorter than the other1 and paint them white4 ,fasten them together with strong cord1 leaving a six-inch space between1 and hang them over the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ae4 wash-stand as shown in the illustration4 ,though the top stick is shorter than the other1 both must be long enough to reach across and rest against the two uprights of the wall4 ,this allows space at the back and gives plenty of room for the towels4 ,illustration3 ,portable ,corner ,clothes-,press ,a ,portable ,corner ,clothes-press ,use two folds of an ordinary1 large-sized clothes-horse for the frame of your clothes-press4 ,make two three-cornered shelves with back edges at perfect right angles and measuring half the length of the cross-pieces of the frame4 ,these shelves are to rest on the cross-pieces1 therefore you must saw off the corners at the back in order to make it fit1 ,fig4 #af4 ,across the outer edge of the top shelf nail securely a strip of wood three inches wide1 having its top edge on a level with the top of the shelf1 ,fig4 #ag4 ,into this strip1 as well as into the top cross-pieces1 screw clothes-hooks1 placing them about eight inches apart4 ,with short wire-nails1 or screws if you wish your press to be very strong1 fasten the top shelf on the upper cross-pieces and the other shelf on the middle cross-pieces of the frame4 ,paint the shelves and the inside of the frame white1 and over the outside tack flowered cretonne or chintz1 remembering to have the right side of the material turned inward4 ,fasten a brass or galvanized iron rod to the top of the two front uprights and from this hang a curtain of the same material4 ,to fit the holders1 or fastenings1 for the curtain rod it will be necessary to cut notches in the inner corners of the uprights1 ,fig4 #ah1 otherwise they will not be at the proper angle to hold the rod4 ,to prevent dust from settling upon the clothing1 tack a three-cornered piece of cretonne over the top of the frame4 ,the shoe-box shown in the illustration is not a part of the clothes press1 but is a convenient addition4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #af4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ag ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ah4 ,a ,five ,o'clock ,tea-,table ,illustration3 ,a ,five ,o'clock ,tea-,table4 ,make this of an oblong box with square ends and of a convenient height when set on end4 ,cover the box neatly with matting or burlap1 then make four shelves long enough to reach across the sides of the box and about nine inches wide4 ,round off the corners of the shelves as in ,fig4 #ai and make one brace for each shelf4 ,to each side of the box at varying heights fasten with screws two narrow strips of wood or cleats1 two inches apart1 ,fig4 #bj4 ,screw the braces to the shelves and paint all to match the color of the covering used on the box2 then rest the back edge of the shelf on the cleats prepared for it and screw the brace to the box and the shelf to the cleats1 ,fig4 #ba4 ,thus securely fastened the shelf becomes immovable and there is not the slightest danger of its slipping or tipping4 ,the illustration shows how the shelves are placed4 ,this little tea-table is especially suited to the piazza1 which1 from your workshop1 you may fit up for a place to entertain your friends most delightfully4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ai4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ba4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bj4 ,a ,piazza ,flower-stand will make a charming feature of your summer parlor1 for flowers are always needed to give the finishing touch in beautifying the inside or the outside of a home4 ,illustration3 ,piazza ,flower-,stand4 ,for the frame of the flower-stand use one fold of the ever-useful clothes-horse4 ,make twelve three-cornered braces1 cutting them out like ,fig4 #bb1 four measuring seven inches on their edges1 four nine inches1 and four twelve inches or as long as the width of the board will allow4 ,saw out four shelves which will reach exactly across the frame1 two of them nine inches and two eleven inches wide4 ,screw the smaller braces to the narrow shelves1 the larger ones to the widest1 making sure the back edges of shelf and brace are on an exact line2 fitting them in your try-square will assure you of that4 ,to give additional strength to the frame1 measure the distance from the bottom edge of the lower cross-piece1 where it joins the upright1 diagonally across to the other upright within one inch of the floor 7,fig4 #bc71 then take two narrow boards1 say three inches wide and one inch thick1 and saw them the required length4 ,lay your frame down flat1 place first one diagonal in position1 then the other1 and make a pencil line across the upper and lower corners showing where they must be taken off in order to fit inside the frame4 ,a mitre-box is very useful here1 for by its aid you can saw your boards ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bb4 at the required angle without difficulty4 ,lacking that1 be careful to have your edges straight4 ,place the diagonals in position in the frame and mark the width of each on the surface of the other where they cross4 ,between these two lines1 on the edges of the boards1 draw a line which will divide the edge exactly in half4 ,saw along the oblique lines down to the line on the edge1 then with a chisel pare down to the edge lines1 thus 8halving0 your boards1 ,fig4 #bd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bc4 ,cross your diagonals at the halving and with long wire nails1 driven from the outside of the frame1 nail them in place1 ,fig4 #be4 ,now fit the largest braces on the front and back of each upright with edges resting on the floor as in ,fig4 #bf1 and screw them on with screws near the top as shown by ,c and ,d1 ,fig4 #bf4 ,have the outside edges of the braces on a line with the outside ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bd4 edges of the uprights2 this will leave a space of about an inch on the inside of the uprights4 ,the braces will hold the frame in an upright position1 but in order to support any weight it must be further strengthened by adding a platform to which the braces may be screwed4 ,make the platform of a size to fit inside the uprights and reach across from end to end of the braces4 ,two ,illustration3 ,fig4 #be4 or more boards will be required to give sufficient width1 and it will be necessary to stay them by putting on three cleats across the under side1 as in ,fig4 #bg4 ,these cleats must be of equal width and thickness and1 as in all cleats1 the grain of the wood must run lengthwise4 ,cut notches at each end1 as shown in the diagram1 to fit the projecting uprights1 then fit the platform into the frame1 and screw the braces on to its edges1 ,fig4 #bh4 ,you have now a firm foundation and may add your shelves4 ,the widest shelves are to go across the frame on either side on a line with the top of the lower cross-piece1 the narrower ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bf4 shelves on a line with the top of the middle cross-piece4 ,fasten these in place with screws at the lower end of each brace1 and with hooks in the uprights1 and screw-eyes at the top of the shelves1 as in the shelves for the dressing-stand1 ,fig4 #ad4 ,instead of four you now have two very broad shelves1 running directly ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bg4 through the frame4 ,take measurements of these shelves and make a shallow box1 about seven inches deep1 to fit each shelf4 ,to prevent the boxes springing at the seams from dampness1 get a strip of tin three inches wide1 bend it through the middle lengthwise1 and tack it over the seams1 as in ,fig4 #bi4 ,paint the entire frame and the outside and edges of the boxes dark green1 and then varnish them4 ,of course the paint must be quite dry before the varnish is applied4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bh4 ,put a layer of charcoal in each box1 then a layer of sand1 and over all a thicker layer of good soil4 ,fill your boxes with flowering plants and hanging vines1 and use the lower platform for potted plants4 ,from the top cross-piece a small hanging basket may be hung1 adding its beauty and sweetness to the rest4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bi4 ,the illustration will give an idea of the appearance of the flower-stand1 though much of the beautiful1 luxuriant growth of plant and vine had to be omitted in the drawing so that the construction of the stand might be distinctly shown4 ,illustration3 ,hooded ,chair ,made of ,packing-,box4 ,a ,hooded ,chair ,made of a ,packing-box ,you must select with care the box for this rather unique piece of furniture1 for you will want it to be durable4 ,if you prefer you may make it altogether of new material after the same pattern1 but a box for the foundation will simplify the work4 ,when standing on end your box should measure about five feet six inches in height1 eighteen inches in depth1 and twenty inches in width4 ,nail two cleats1 each thirteen inches long1 in an upright position on each side and at the back of the box1 as shown by the letters ,e1 ,f1 ,g1 ,h in ,fig4 #cj1 placing the front ones1 ,e1 one inch back from the edge as in diagram4 ,fig4 #cj gives one side and the back of the box4 ,across and resting on the top of these upright cleats nail the cleats ,i and ,j4 ,lay the box on its side and draw a curve like ,fig4 #ca1 starting the line four inches from the top and ending it two feet from the bottom4 ,the curve at its greatest fulness should take in half the width of the side4 ,draw a curve exactly like the first on the other side of the box2 saw carefully along the lines1 following them as closely as possible1 and then take off the remaining rough edges with a chisel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cj4 ,nail a strip of wood four inches wide across the front at the top to finish the hood1 ,fig4 #cb4 ,box in the lower front up to the top of the cleats and there make a seat to fit in the chair and rest on the cleats1 ,fig4 #cb4 ,you will notice that in the seat1 near the forward corners1 are two holes2 these are for the adjustment of the rest1 which gives additional comfort to the chair1 and upon which one may stretch one's self out luxuriantly4 ,two boards1 three feet four inches long1 will be required for the rest1 which should be just wide enough to fit easily inside the chair1 resting on the seat4 ,cleat the rest at each end and in the middle1 as in ,fig4 #cc1 putting the end cleats on the edges of the boards and the middle one underneath4 ,round the corners and smooth them off with knife or chisel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ca4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cc4 ,measure the distance from the top of the seat to the floor and make the end-piece 7,fig4 #cd7 for the foot of the rest exactly that height1 for the foot must be on a level with the other end when adjusted4 ,screw the end-piece to the rest with screws passing through the top of the boards into the top edge of the end-piece1 and put braces at the corners to keep it secure1 ,fig4 #ce4 ,bore holes three-quarters of an inch in diameter at the upper corners of the rest1 making them one inch from the cleat and two inches from the side edges of the boards1 ,fig4 #cc4 ,place this end of the rest on the seat of the chair1 allowing it to lap about four inches1 and through the holes just made mark corresponding places for the holes in the seat4 ,make ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cd4 or buy wooden pegs like ,fig4 #cf1 and slip them through the holes in rest and seat when you wish to adjust the rest4 ,the ordinary wooden easel peg is about what you want for this purpose4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cf4 ,fig4 #ce4 ,pad the sides and back of the chair with cotton batting1 using only enough tacks to hold it in place1 then cover the chair inside and out1 except the seat1 with pretty cretonne1 making a box-plaited ruffle for the front1 as shown in the illustration4 ,pad the top of the rest up nearly to the holes in the end1 and cover it with the cretonne4 ,use an old feather pillow for the seat cushion1 and another 7smaller7 for an extra one at the back1 and cover them also with cretonne4 ,,chapter ,,ii ,,possibilities ,,of ,,an ,,easter ,,egg ,throughout the entire ,united ,states ,easter eggs are very popular1 and the practice of coloring them is increasing rather than diminishing4 ,the stores are full of all sorts of novelties in real or simulated eggs2 some valued at very large sums have been manufactured in ,london1 but ,uncle ,sam does not raise such costly varieties4 ,the real fun is in coloring one's own eggs1 and if the eggs can be transformed into something else1 the sport will be doubled4 ,to turn an egg into ,a ,frog ,that ,will ,swim in the water is a new idea1 and one which will furnish no end of diversion4 ,cut stiff paper in the shape of ,fig4 #cg4 ,make a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cg4 small hole on one side of an egg 7,fig4 #ch1 ,b7 and a tiny hole at one end 7,a71 remove the contents by shaking the egg and blowing in at the end ,a4 ,then fit the shell on a stand made of a paper box with a hole cut in it just large enough to hold the egg firmly1 and pour some melted wax in at the hole ,b1 using great care to keep the egg steady1 that the weight may fall exactly in the centre and make a perfect balance4 ,paste paper over each hole and fit the frog 7,fig4 #cg7 on the egg1 keeping the side of the egg with the covered opening ,b for the top1 forming the back of the frog4 ,remove the paper frog and cover the slashes cut in the back with melted sealing-wax1 while hot adjust it on the egg1 pressing the slashes against the shell ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ch4 before the wax hardens and holding them in place until they adhere4 ,when perfectly dry paint the frog mottled green on the back and a yellowish white underneath in oil colors 7,fig4 #ci74 ,try to recall the coloring of a real frog and make this one as lifelike as possible4 ,pour water in a large basin and stir it around to produce a current4 ,the paint having dried1 place the frog on the top of the water ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ci4 and watch it swim4 ,if you would like to race these queer ,easter eggs1 make two or three frogs and start them all swimming at the same time4 ,should oil paints not be at hand1 use stiff brown paper1 preferably glazed1 for ,fig4 #cg4 ,make a hole at each end of the egg-shell and remove the contents4 ,drop some shot in the shell and glue paper over each opening2 then fasten the paper frog1 with the hole in its back 7,fig4 #cg71 securely on the egg4 ,wait until it is perfectly dry before placing the little animal on the water1 where it will look very comical and lifelike1 even though it is not green in color4 ,at break of day on ,easter morn the sun dances for joy1 says the old legend1 and if you would prove it1 arise early and watch the reflection of the sun as it plays hide-and-seek on the surface of the clear water which you have placed in a tin basin where it can catch the first rays from the 8,king of ,day40 ,a breath of air will cause the water to move1 and with the motion comes the dance1 as the sun sparkles and glides here and there1 glittering and laughing in its joyous play4 ,the legend is a pretty one and its meaning deeper than appears on the surface4 ,illustrations3 ,figs4 #dj-dc4 ,beside enabling one to see the sun dance1 being up early gives time1 before breakfast1 to help decorate the table as a pleasant surprise to the family4 ,one of the most attractive ornaments is the white dove with its snowy wings spread wide1 while it floats and sways in mid-air as if it were really flying slowly and softly through the room4 ,it is easily made4 ,take a pure white egg1 and empty the contents2 then cut from writing paper the wing 7,fig4 #dj71 head 7,fig4 #da71 and tail 7,fig4 #db74 ,pin each in turn on a fresh1 smooth piece of cotton wadding and cut the raw cotton out along the lines of the pattern4 ,make two wings of the cotton wadding1 and cut two wing-bones 7,fig4 #dc7 from stiff paper2 open each cotton wing along the upper edge about a quarter of an inch in depth1 according to dotted line ,o ,o 7,fig4 #dj71 insert a paper bone in each opening and gum it sparingly here and there4 ,smooth up the edges of the cotton wings1 covering the bones entirely2 then gum the wings to the sides of the egg according to the dotted line on one end4 ,fasten the tail in place and1 last of all1 the head2 open the neck a little and paste each side of the open edge on the egg4 ,bend the wings out1 as if the bird were flying4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dd4 ,to float the dove in the air1 make a knot in a piece of fine thread and with a needle run the thread through a small square of white court-plaster2 pull the knot up tight to the plaster1 unthread the needle1 and with the court-plaster over the knot1 dampen it and gum the thread down tight on the back of the dove1 something as a leather sucker is stuck on a brick2 it will soon dry4 ,in the morning suspend the dove over the centre of the table 7,fig4 #dd7 by tying the end of the thread on the chandelier4 ,let it be about ten inches above the dishes4 ,if you can handle pen and ink very lightly1 the bird's eyes and mouth may be carefully marked1 although this is not absolutely necessary1 as the effect is almost the same without the features being emphasized4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #de4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #df4 ,one of the minor sports now gladly participated in by the girls1 is top-spinning1 and the amount of fun they derive from the whirling playthings is only equalled by their skill in the game4 ,all kinds of tops are welcomed and experimented with but the queerest is the ,spinning ,egg ,easter top 7,fig4 #de7 made of a hard-boiled egg colored red1 with a disk of stiff red paper 7,fig4 #df7 fitted and glued on with sealing-wax4 ,when twirled by the fingers the toy will whiz around almost equal to a peg top4 ,try it1 and try also ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dg4 ,the ,kaleidoscope1 for an egg-shell containing a kaleidoscope is a still greater novelty4 ,in preparing this it is better to blow the egg first1 then1 by puncturing holes1 as in ,fig4 #dg1 each end of the shell can be removed evenly4 ,care must be taken to thoroughly rinse and dry the shell1 as any moisture from the egg will dim and blur the glasses1 which should be kept perfectly clear4 ,fasten with mucilage three strips of glass1 two inches long and one-half inch wide1 to a piece of black paper1 as in ,fig4 #dh4 ,the dark paper left between the light strips will allow the two end-pieces of glass to be brought together1 thus forming a triangle1 which is held in place by pasting the paper extending beyond the edge of the last strip of glass over on the edge of the first piece of glass4 ,fasten triangular pieces of glass1 like ,fig4 #di1 to the ends1 in the following manner3 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #di4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ej4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ea4 ,cut from paper1 not too stiff1 a circle one inch in diameter1 out of the centre of which cut a triangle of even proportion1 just a trifle smaller than the glass1 see ,fig4 #ej4 ,paste the triangular glass1 ,fig4 #di1 over the triangular hole in the paper circle1 ,fig4 #ej1 then fit this paper-framed glass to one end of the cylindrical triangle1 and1 folding the paper down smoothly1 fasten with mucilage1 to hold it firmly in place4 ,put several small pieces of differently colored glass into the kaleidoscope and close the other end in the same way as the first4 ,when this part of the work is finished1 slide it carefully into the shell1 and over each end paste a piece of bright-colored paper with a triangular hole in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eb4 the centre1 as shown in ,fig4 #ea4 ,a half-yard of colored ribbon of the same shade as the paper1 tied around the egg1 forms a loop to hang it up by1 and also enhances its appearance 7,fig4 #eb74 ,in connection with the egg another emblem frequently found in the shops is the ,easter ,hare ,why this little animal is associated with ,easter eggs no one seems to be able to tell4 ,there are several legends which explain the connection1 each one different from the others4 ,this is the prettiest3 ,scarcely had the ,winter ,king left on his way to ,northland when the young ,prince1 ,spring1 passed along1 bringing with him delicate flowers and wild birds4 ,the flowers charmed his senses with their exquisite perfume1 and the birds entertained and delighted him with their sweet songs2 but ,spring was lonely and sighed for the children of the earth1 for whom he had brought these fair gifts4 ,thinking1 perchance1 they did not know of his coming1 he concluded to send them tidings1 when suddenly a little hare appeared1 and immediately the ,prince decided that the swift-footed animal should be his messenger4 ,the little hare1 however1 begged hard to be spared1 as he stood in terror of the dreadful shot-gun1 which had killed so many of his brothers4 ,but ,spring1 smiling said3 #8,you shall be the bearer of gifts to the people1 then they will not harm you1' and the hare1 calmed but hardly convinced1 consented to do the will of the ,prince4 ,then ,spring wove a dainty willow-basket and filled it with pretty colored eggs1 which the birds gave him1 and this he handed to the hare to give to the people1 with many sweet messages from ,spring4 8,taking the basket in his mouth1 the hare trotted off rapidly toward the nearest village4 ,when he reached there1 however1 fearing the grown people1 he delivered the messages to the children and gave them all the pretty eggs40 ,a delightful little legend1 isn't it8 ,and ,spring must have been well pleased with the hare for choosing to deliver his messages to the children1 for on this day it is the young people who first know of the coming of ,spring4 ,hares ,made of ,eggs ,the ,easter hares shown in ,fig4 #ec are made of eggs4 ,goose eggs are the best to use--they are so much larger than hen's eggs4 ,blow the egg if you desire to keep the little hare2 if you wish later to eat it1 boil the egg hard4 ,take two little tufts of cotton1 roll and pinch them in shape for the ears1 then two more tufts for the forefeet2 fasten ears and feet to the shell with gum arabic1 in the position shown in ,fig4 #ec4 ,remember1 the small end of the egg is the hare's head2 on this end1 below the ears1 draw with pen and ink the eyes1 nose and mouth1 using ,fig4 #ec as a guide4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ec4 ,if you make two hares1 place them together on a fresh1 green leaf of lettuce1 and they will look very natural4 ,did ,palmer ,cox have in mind an egg when he drew the picture of one of his famous ,brownies8 ,this queer little character certainly suggested one so forcibly that it was impossible to resist trying the experiment of making his likeness from an egg1 and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ed4 ,the ,brownie shows the result1 see illustration4 ,prepare the shell of a goose egg as for the ,easter hare1 and follow the directions given for blowing the egg4 ,fig4 #ed is the ,brownie's face4 ,trace this on tracing-paper1 turn the other side and rub a soft lead-pencil all over the back until that side of the paper is covered with lead1 taking care not to tear it in doing so4 ,place the face on the shell1 the printed side out1 and holding it steady1 go over the lines with a pencil4 ,this will reproduce the face on the shell1 then with pen and black ink strengthen the drawing4 ,the small end of the shell is the head and the face must be drawn well up on it4 ,illustration3 ,the ,brownie4 ,make the ,brownie's costume1 cap and all1 of brown material4 ,an old brown stocking will be just the thing to use4 ,fig4 #ee is the pattern of the cap2 the dotted lines on the edges show where the seam is to be taken1 and the dotted line running from side to side shows where the cap is to be turned up4 ,fig4 #ef is the back and ,fig4 #eg half of the front of the jacket4 ,fig4 #eh is the pattern of half of the trousers1 which are made in two pieces cut exactly alike4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ef4 ,make two little rolls of unbleached cotton1 two inches long1 for the arms4 ,fig4 #ei shows how the muslin is turned up on one edge and then rolled4 ,fig4 #fj gives the roll stitched and complete4 ,when the jacket is made1 slip the arms into sleeves and fasten at top of sleeve4 ,make the legs just as you did the arms1 but use black cloth for them instead of white4 ,finish the trousers and sew in the legs at the dotted lines4 ,when the costume is complete cut a disk of soft muslin like ,fig4 #fa1 and slip through it1 at the centre1 a needle threaded with strong linen thread4 ,a long darning needle will be the best4 ,pass the needle through the hole in the large end of the shell and up through the hole at the top4 ,draw the disk of muslin down to the large knot in the end of the thread1 then bring it up close to the egg as in ,fig4 #fb and paste the muslin on the shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ei4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fa4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fb4 ,dress the ,brownie in his clothes2 first his trousers1 then his jacket2 fasten them here and there with glue2 run the needle which you have passed through the shell up through the little cap and out at its point on top4 ,slide the cap down on his head and glue in place4 ,let the thread be long enough to hold while you dance the ,brownie on the floor4 ,eggs can also be turned into ,fruits1 ,vegetables1 ,opera ,glasses1 and ,dishes ,how would you like great1 luscious purple plums1 watermelons and fine radishes for breakfast8 ,we can manage to have them1 and at the same time may be served mammoth acorns--not the kind gathered for cups and saucers1 but quite different4 ,these are as large as eggs and either all brown or green in color4 ,they taste something like hard-boiled eggs1 and1 what is more strange1 the plums1 watermelons and radishes all have a similar flavor4 ,to prepare them1 color some eggs1 make the eggs all of solid hues1--a few rich purple1 several red1 others brown or light green1 one or two dark green4 ,when the eggs are boiled hard and of the desired shade change them into the vegetables and fruits4 ,begin by making ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ff4 ,the ,radish ,gum a number of crisp tissue-paper leaves cut from ,fig4 #fc on the big end of the red eggs4 ,fold each leaf lengthwise through the centre1 according to the dotted line 7,fig4 #fc72 then slip a hatpin or the back of the blade of a table-knife tight up in the fold and1 holding the leaf in place with the right hand1 gradually push it up together on the blade with the left hand2 this gives the leaf a natural crimped appearance 7,fig4 #fd74 ,take a small piece of raw cotton and dip it in the dye1 or1 better still1 color it with a little crushed red crayon2 then pull the cotton into the form of ,fig4 #fe4 ,fasten this red point on the small end of the egg and the egg will be a radish 7,fig4 #ff74 ,use a dark green egg to make the baby ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fg4 ,watermelon ,mark uneven1 lengthwise bands around it with a soft lead-pencil and fasten in the stem with sealing-wax4 ,bore a hole in the large end of the melon1 making the opening big enough to admit the end of a small curved twig which must form the stem2 put on enough sealing-wax to secure firmness 7,fig4 #fg74 ,convert the purple egg into ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fh4 ,a ,plum by fastening it on a natural twig in the same way you stuck the melon on its stem4 ,gum two green tissue-paper leaves to the branch for foliage 7,fig4 #fh74 ,the funny big ,acorn must likewise be attached to a stem1 and on its small end ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fi4 you should fasten with sealing-wax a leaf bud from a lilac bush2 if that cannot be obtained1 make the little point of cotton4 ,let a band of colored raw cotton or crumpled tissue-paper be glued on to form the edge of the acorn cup 7,fig4 #fi74 ,when the fruit is ready for the table1 serve each piece on a separate small plate in which has first been laid a white doily or a home-made mat cut from white paper4 ,fresh flowers always give an added charm to the breakfast table1 and in ,a ,dainty ,vase their value is doubled4 ,select three large-sized eggs1 bore holes in the small ends of each1 and carefully make the openings large enough to admit the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gj4 points of a pair of small1 sharp scissors4 ,with these cut the holes to a diameter of nearly one inch1 remove the contents of each and place the shells close together1 as in ,fig4 #gj4 ,notice where the sides touch and drop hot sealing-wax there to fasten the three shells together4 ,flower vases are collected by people whose aim is to obtain as odd and as many vases as possible4 ,other collectors delight in teapots1 and you will find on their shelves all sorts of queer and antique affairs4 ,if you happen to have a friend with such a hobby1 give her ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ga4 ,a ,unique ,little ,teapot to add to her collection--one from which the tea can actually be poured out of the saucy1 wee spout 7,fig4 #ga74 ,remember1 however1 the fragile little affair cannot be placed on the hot stove4 ,blow the contents from an egg and1 if desired1 color it4 ,have the sealing-wax of a broken color1 if it is obtainable1 such as soft gray1 delicate brown or quiet gray-green4 ,the work will appear better than when more positive colors are used4 ,with sharp scissors carefully cut a round hole in each end of the shell and another small one in the side1 a short distance from ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gb4 the top1 as an opening for the spout4 ,soaking the shell in warm water for nearly half an hour will render ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gc4 it less brittle4 ,make the bottom of the teapot of a round piece of stiff paper2 cover the upper side of the paper all over with melted sealing-wax1 and before the wax hardens set the shell down on it4 ,for greater security drop melted sealing-wax entirely around the bottom where it joins the shell4 ,let the wax splash up on the egg2 it gives a decorative effect4 ,the spout 7,fig4 #gb7 should be cut from stiff paper1 also the handle 7,fig4 #gc72 fasten both on the egg-shell with sealing-wax in their respective positions1 following the dotted lines4 ,when finished test the teapot to make sure it is water-proof2 then fill it more than half full with water and have the fun of ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gd4 pouring the water in a tiny stream out of the spout4 ,if the teapot leaks the least bit1 fill the crack with sealing-wax4 ,be sure that the little gift is in perfect order before it leaves your hands4 ,having completed the teapot1 it will be easy work to make ,the ,sugar ,bowl ,use two strips of paper for the handles2 fasten them on with sealing-wax1 and set the round bottom of the half egg-shell in the soft sealing-wax which you have dropped on a circular bit of paper4 ,the paper being flat will give the sugar bowl a level stand1 enabling it to remain erect and firm 7,fig4 #gd74 ,in old-fashioned ,southern country-houses there is usually a pail of clear1 cold spring water conveniently near1 with a gourd dipper from which to drink in place of a common glass4 ,the gourds are interesting1 odd-looking drinking vessels1 but cannot compare in quaintness with the little ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ge4 ,egg ,dippers fashioned from egg-shells4 ,a large half of an egg-shell forms the bowl and a slender stick the handle 7,fig4 #ge74 ,bore a hole in one side of the dipper and slide the end of any kind of a slender stick through4 ,fasten this securely in place with hot sealing-wax both outside and inside at the juncture of the bowl and handle1 and in less time than it takes to tell it the dipper will be made4 ,place all the ,easter gifts you have manufactured on a table where you may enjoy them1 and in order that you shall get the full benefit of their beauty1 look at them through a pair of opera-glasses2 but first you must make the glasses4 ,cut ,fig4 #gf from card-board2 then bore holes in each end of two eggs1 remove the contents and cut the openings large enough to see through 7,fig4 #gg74 ,the egg after the holes are made is shown in ,fig4 #gh4 ,attach the large ends of the shells to ,fig4 #gf by means of melted sealing-wax2 glue them on tightly1 and the opera-glasses will be ready for use 7,fig4 #gi74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gi4 ,illustration3 ,paper ,butterflies that ,fly1 and ,egg ,frogs that ,swim4 ,,chapter ,,iii ,a ,,paper ,,easter ,even play eggs manufactured of paper have many possibilities4 ,of course1 all girls would rather make these for themselves than to buy them1 be the trifles ever so beautiful2 for1 after all1 the purchased eggs can only be looked at and then put away4 ,you cannot have any real sport with them2 cannot take them apart and put them together again any more than 8all the king's horses and all the king's men0 could restore 8,humpty ,dumpty0 after his fall2 nor can you change these designs from one thing to another1 each complete in itself4 ,only the home-made ,easter egg admits of such manipulation4 ,it is an ,enchanted ,egg and from it can be made ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ha4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hb4 ,an ,ostrich1 ,rabbit1 ,penguin1 and ,rooster ,to make the egg1 cut from medium-weight water-color paper two egg-shaped designs1 ,fig4 #hj2 in one of these cut two slits exactly like ,fig4 #ha2 lay this over the second paper egg1 being very careful to have the two perfectly fitted1 and with a pin-prick mark the ends of the slits of the top egg into the under one2 stick the pin entirely through1 first at one end and then at the other of each slit2 remove the top egg and draw a straight line from pin-point to pin-point of the upper and then of the lower slit2 these lines are guides and render it easy to cut the slits to correspond with those in the first egg4 ,the two eggs must be exactly alike1 as they are in reality the two sides of one egg4 ,trace the markings of ,fig4 #hb on one egg and spread strong paste sparingly over the darkened portion1 not allowing it to extend in the least across the boundary lines1 for the white spaces must be left free1 that they may form openings or pockets4 ,again fit the two sides together 7the paste will cause them to adhere71 and place the egg under a few books1 or some other weight1 to dry1 and in a little while it will be ready for transformation4 ,changing an ,egg ,into a ,rooster ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #he4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hd4 ,trace the rooster's head 7,fig4 #hc71 his tail 7,fig4 #hd71 his wings 7,fig4 #he71 and his foot 7,fig4 #hf71 on the water-color paper4 ,make two feet and two wings2 either paint the natural markings or indicate them with ink on the different parts1 then slide the head in the large end of the egg at ,d1 ,fig4 #hb1 fitting it in between the two sides according to the line drawn above ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hg4 the letter ,d on neck of rooster4 ,in the same way place the tail in the egg at the small end1 ,a1 ,fig4 #hb2 fit the wings in1 one on each side1 at the slit ,e2 notice that each wing is cut on both sides of the extension ,e1 to bring the top edges of the wings up higher1 when they are in position1 than their central top portions4 ,slide the feet in the slit ,f1 one on each side1 slightly bending them out from each other2 the rooster 7,fig4 #hg7 will then stand alone when it is placed on a level surface4 ,a ,rabbit from the ,egg ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ib4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hi4 ,fig4 #ij4 ,fig4 #ia ,after the rooster has served its day remove the different parts and leave the egg as it was at first4 ,we are now ready to construct a rabbit4 ,make the head 7,fig4 #hh71 the tail 7,fig4 #hi71 one fore foot 7,fig4 #ij71 and two hind legs 7,fig4 #ia71 of the same water-color paper4 ,carefully slip the head in the small end of the egg1 ,fig4 #hb1 ,a1 and place the tail down low in the large end of ,d2 the piece which represents the fore feet--it should be painted to look like two1 one slightly back of the other--is placed at the opening ,b1 and the hind legs are fastened on each side of the egg in the upper slits ,e4 ,bend the hind legs out a trifle and stand the little rabbit on its feet 7,fig4 #ib74 ,if you wish you can copy the markings on this one and make your rabbit look as natural as possible4 ,all the animals that you make should be white1 except the penguin1 as the white egg forms the body of each one4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ih4 ,the ,egg ,develops ,into an ,ostrich ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ic4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #id4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #if4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ie4 ,in order to hatch the ostrich change the rabbit back again to an egg4 ,cut from light-weight card-board the head 7,fig4 #ic71 and the two legs 7,figs4 #id and #ie72 these must be stiff and strong3 you will notice that the legs are not bent alike4 ,use water-color paper for the two wings 7,fig4 #if7 and a tail 7,fig4 #ig74 ,the wings and tail should look as much like ostrich-plumes as you are able to make them4 ,slide the extension of the neck1 ,fig4 #ic1 ,d1 into the upper part of the large end of the egg1 ,d1 ,fig4 #hb1 and the extension of the tail into the small end1 ,a1 fitting it in according to the line on the tail drawn around ,a2 slip a wing into each side of the egg at the slits ,e1 and finally fasten the legs1 one on each side1 in the slits ,f4 ,slightly bend the legs outward and adjust them so they will balance the body perfectly2 the ostrich is now able to stand alone and will even appear to be walking 7,fig4 #ih74 ,to ,hatch a ,penguin from the ,egg ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ii4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aja4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajb4 ,make the head like ,fig4 #ii4 ,a is the portion which must be placed in the small end of the egg1 ,a1 ,fig4 #hb1 allowing the lower curve of the head1 ,k1 to extend down over the egg4 ,cut from very stiff writing-paper a like curve1 and paste it in position on the other side of the head1 where it should hang free3 only the top edge of the piece being fastened on the head in order that the curve may easily slip down over the other side of the egg4 ,this will make both sides of the bird appear alike4 ,fold a piece of writing-paper1 and from it cut ,fig4 #ajj2 the straight fold extends from ,o to ,u4 ,carefully fasten together the open edges of the back from ,t to ,o and from ,u to ,p2 gluing them on the extreme edges1 that the pocket thus formed may be as large as possible4 ,take stiff paper for ,figs4 #aja and #ajb1 which are the feet and tail of the bird1 the extension ,x of ,fig4 #ajb forming the tail4 ,leave the eyes and mouth white1 and paint the remainder of the head black2 also blacken the wings and back1 ,fig4 #ajj1 and the feet and tail4 ,place the head in the small end of the egg1 ,a1 with the curves ,k down over the white egg on each side2 then put on the little fellow's overcoat1 or back1 ,fig4 #ajj1 fitting it over the sides1 ,f1 ,fig4 #ha1 of the egg2 push the egg or body of the penguin in the pocket formed in the back of the overcoat1 and shove the feet into the large end of the egg1 ,d1 ,fig4 #hb4 ,hold the lower edges of the egg firmly together while you bend out the feet sufficiently to enable the penguin to stand alone1 ,fig4 #ajc4 ,these little creatures should be made so carefully that either side will be presentable4 ,it is always distressing to know that 8the other side0 does not look real1 and it is a great satisfaction to be able to show both sides of our work to our friends and know there is no 8wrong side0 in what we do4 ,if you can manage to paint the designs in water-colors they will look best1 but even when marked with black ink the little animals are charming2 no adequate idea can be gained of this fascinating ,easter egg until all the different parts have been made and the egg changed from one to another of the various life-like little creatures4 ,the egg has been so planned that the wings come down and cover the tops of the legs of both rooster and ostrich2 the penguin and rabbit need no such cover1 as the rabbit's legs fit in naturally1 and those of the penguin merely slide up in the egg4 ,a little practice will enable you to perform the work skilfully4 ,butterflies are also emblems used for ,easter4 ,the beautiful fairy-like creature changing in its close1 gloomy chrysalis from an insignificant little worm to the radiant winged creature of the air1 fitly typifies the ,resurrection4 ,did you ever find a chrysalis and after examining it lay it carefully aside1 to await the development of the life within1 and some bright morning discover the shell broken and empty1 while in the room fluttered a brightly colored butterfly8 ,if so1 you will enjoy all the more ,the ,butterfly ,that ,will ,fly and which we will manufacture of tissue-paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajd4 ,take four pieces of tissue-paper--yellow1 red1 blue1 and white--and cut each according to ,fig4 #ajd4 ,the shape is not exactly that of a real butterfly1 but when made of paper it proves more satisfactory1 because such butterflies fly far better when cut in this way4 ,fasten a fine black thread through the back of each butterfly 7,fig4 #aje72 bend the wings up a little and tie1 or fasten with bits of court-plaster1 the loose ends of the threads on a round stick1 placing them at a distance of about four inches apart4 ,let the threads vary in length from six to thirteen inches2 this will bring the butterflies at different distances from the stick4 ,when all is ready stand about forty-five inches from and in direct line with a register built in the side wall next to the floor2 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aje4 hold the stick1 with the butterflies attached1 up and out horizontally fifty or more inches from the floor4 ,the gentle heat will cause the brilliant little things to flutter up and down1 this way and that1 in a most natural manner2 the fine black threads being practically invisible1 the butterflies appear as if floating in the air without aid from any source4 ,you might try the experiment of taking them out-of-doors2 if the breeze is not too strong1 the butterflies will behave in the most approved manner1 which you know all about1 having so often watched the graceful movements of the beautiful live insects during the long summer days4 ,perhaps the most charming of all ,easter offerings is ,the ,easter ,lily ,everyone strives to have a lily on ,easter day4 ,if you are unable to obtain one of the beautiful1 fresh flowers1 do the next best thing2 make a lily--a stately1 graceful white blossom on a long1 dark-green stalk4 ,the flower is lovely even when manufactured of tissue-paper1 and can be made to look so natural that one almost expects to find the sweet1 delicate perfume of the real blossom4 ,the paper plant has one advantage at least over the natural one3 it lasts much longer and needs no care to keep it fresh4 ,from a new1 smooth sheet of white tissue-paper cut six petals 7,fig4 #ajf72 fold each lengthwise through its centre and bend or curl the top into a slight curve to take away the stiffness 7,fig4 #ajg72 then cut ,fig4 #ajh of unruled white writing-paper4 ,paint both sides of the stigma or top a greenish yellow and the style or stem-like portion a pale ,nile-green4 ,bend the style up flat against the scalloped stigma according to the dotted line in ,fig4 #ajh4 ,allow an eighth of an inch and bend the style back again1 which will make a little tuck in the style1 bringing it exactly in the centre of the scalloped stigma when it is straightened out 7,fig4 #aji74 ,fold each of the three scallops of the stigma through its centre and bend them down 7,fig4 #aji72 this finishes the pistil4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aab4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aji4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaa4 ,make six stamens according to the pattern 7,fig4 #aaj72 paint the anthers or tops orange color on both sides1 and the supports or stems a very light green--as you remember those in the natural flower4 ,bend the supports in the same way as you did the style of the pistil1 and slightly curve the orange-colored anthers4 ,these should seemingly balance directly on the tip-top of the supports 7,fig4 #aaa74 ,with strong paste fasten the pistils and stamens on the end of a stick which has previously been covered with dark olive-green tissue-paper 7,fig4 #aab72 then paste on three of the white petals 7,fig4 #aac74 ,use paste sparingly1 and be careful to arrange the petals evenly before adding the remaining three 7,fig4 #aad71 which should be placed one over each space between the first three petals4 ,fig4 #aae will make the idea plainer4 ,the petals numbered #a1 #b1 #c represent the first three2 the other three alternate with these1 coming back of and between them as in the corolla 7,fig4 #aae74 ,should the last petals incline to droop1 attach them to the inner ones about midway up with a very little paste4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aac4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aad4 ,take a strip of olive-green paper and cut it according to the dotted lines in ,fig4 #aaf2 slightly curve each leaf in the hollow of your hand by rolling the round head of a hat-pin down its centre2 when finished wind the strips of foliage around the lily stalk 7,fig4 #aad74 ,have the stalk quite long1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aae4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaf4 a short one does not look well4 ,if you desire buds as well as blossoms1 cut squares of white tissue-paper 7,fig4 #aag72 roll each paper 7,fig4 #aah71 fold down the top ends a trifle and pinch up both ends2 then pull the bud into proper shape 7,fig4 #aai74 ,paste the pinched tops together and fasten the lower end of the bud on a green-covered wire 7,fig4 #abj74 ,you can make smaller buds for the top and have the larger1 which represent buds ready to open and blossom1 bent as in ,fig4 #abj4 ,to make a stalk bearing buds and several blossoms1 instead of building the flowers on the end of a stick1 fasten each blossom and each ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aag4 bud on a separate wire which has first been covered with green tissue-paper2 then bind the small buds on the top of the long green stalk with thread or fine wire4 ,next fasten on the larger buds1 afterwards the blossoms1 and when all are arranged satisfactorily wind the green foliage around the stalk 7,fig4 #aad71 and it will all look very beautiful and natural4 ,the lilies may be placed in a tall glass vase or the end of the stalk pushed into the earth in a real flower-pot1 and at a short distance it will have the appearance of a growing plant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aah4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aai4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abj4 ,,chapter ,,iv ,,vacation ,,work ,,with ,,nature',s ,,material ,here is a piece of advice for you1 girls2 possibly it may not be appreciated1 but it is good advice1 nevertheless3 ,while you are away for your summer holidays1 keep out of sight the fancy work you do at home4 ,when we drop the work or study that has employed us during the long winter and spring months and go off in the summer to be refreshed and invigorated1 do we not say we go for recreation8 ,if you will stop to think about it you will see that recreation means literally re-creating1 being created anew2 it means the laying aside of our ordinary habits and thoughts and adopting entire new ones1 for the time being at least4 ,it is this refreshing change of thought and occupation as well as change of air that proves so beneficial2 therefore1 don't keep the one little portion of your brain which you devote to fancy work busy all summer long in the old routine1 but let it have recreation as well as the rest of your mind and body4 ,by this ,i do not mean that the faculty ordinarily exercised in the interest of fancy work should not be used in any way1 or that the hands which take so kindly to needle and thread should be always idle4 ,not at all2 but there are other forms of work for quiet hours1 distinctively summer work1 which with their entire or comparative novelty refresh the mind and give added deftness to the hands4 ,illustration3 ,cone ,hanging-basket4 ,the rainy day comes occasionally and you cannot be out of doors2 then is the time to look over the store of treasures which you have gathered in your walks through wood and field and try to devise some means of preserving them or making them of use4 ,to begin with1 there are your pine cones1 and no doubt you have gathered a great number of them2 everyone does4 ,sort the cones and select several of the largest1 most open ones to use as hanging-baskets in your window next winter1 and if you have an open fire devote the remaining cones to creating a cheery blaze1 to help disperse the gloom that a northeast storm in summer is apt to throw over one4 ,if you are impatient to try the experiment of making a ,cone ,hanging-basket1 you need not wait until winter1 for1 being in the country1 your materials are all close at hand1 and there is no reason why you should not start one immediately4 ,having selected your cone1 shake out the seeds1 if any remain in it1 and tie a cord around at about the middle1 leaving a loop on the top by which to hang it1 as in the illustration4 ,fill the interstices with lightly sifted earth1 scatter a handful of wheat or oats over it1 and thoroughly dampen the whole4 ,hang the cone in your window1 keep it damp1 and shortly the grain will sprout and the cone will become a mass of vivid green4 ,of course the beauty of the cone hanging-basket does not last a great while1 but a new one can be so quickly and easily prepared that1 with a store of half a dozen cones1 you may have one fresh and green in your window all winter4 ,almost any kind of small cereal will sprout if treated in this way1 and each time you can plant different seeds4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aba4 ,if you happen to have sweet grass in your collection1 make it into ,sweet-grass ,mats to put in the linen closet or bureau-drawers4 ,these mats1 placed between sheets or clothing1 impart such a sweet1 country perfume you will be surprised and delighted with the result4 ,take seven or eight stalks of the sweet grass1 cut off the flower-heads1 bunch the stalks together1 and with a long1 strong blade of the grass1 wrap tightly into a rope1 as in ,fig4 #aba4 ,make several of these ropes before beginning your mat4 ,then coil one in an oblong1 and sew it together1 as shown in the diagram1 ,fig4 #abb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abb4 ,when the first rope is nearly used up1 wrap the free end securely to the end of another rope and continue to coil as before4 ,when finished1 the longest diameter of the mat should measure about seven inches4 ,you will notice in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abc4 ,fig4 #abc1 which shows the sweet-grass mat completed1 that the last end is tucked in neatly under the coil next to it1 where it is fastened tightly with needle and thread4 ,with all the other treasures1 ,i hardly think it has occurred to you to collect corn-husks1 and yet many pretty things can be made of them4 ,for instance1 there is the ,corn-husk ,basket1 strong1 durable1 and useful4 ,for making one of these baskets select the fine1 inner husks1 and wrap them in a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abd4 damp cloth1 let them remain two hours1 and then cut into strips about one inch wide4 ,take six of these strips and tie them together at one end with a strong thread2 separate the strips into three strands1 two strips to a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abe4 strand1 and braid as in ,fig4 #abd4 ,in the beginning do not choose strips all of the same length1 as they will have to be pieced out to make the braid the required length1 and the piecing should not be all done at the same place4 ,when you have nearly reached the end of your shortest strip1 open it out flat1 lay the end of a new strip over it as in ,fig4 #abe1 and fold together as in ,fig4 #abf4 ,in this way the piecing goes on as the braid grows in length4 ,when you have about a yard of the braid1 dampen and begin to coil it as in ,fig4 #abg1 fastening the edges together with needle and strong1 waxed thread4 ,it will require the whole yard of braid for the bottom of the basket1 which should measure about five inches in diameter4 ,before you have coiled quite all of it1 piece the strips again and make a yard or so more of braid4 ,dampen the new part and begin to coil once more1 this time turning the braid up on its edge1 and running it around horizontally to form the sides of the basket1 widening the sides a little with each row4 ,four inches is a good depth for a basket of this kind4 ,finish the top of the basket by sewing another row of braid around the outer edge4 ,for the handle make a braid twelve inches long1 then divide the strands and at the end of the large braid make two small ones six inches long4 ,fasten the ends of the small braids and cut off neatly close to the wrapping4 ,remove the thread which holds the other end of the large braid together and separate the strips far enough up to make two small braids at that end the length of those you have just finished4 ,sew the handle on the outside of the basket in the position shown in the illustration1 tucking the ends between the bottom and next to the bottom row of braids1 and fastening them neatly on the inside4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abg4 ,illustration3 ,corn-husk ,basket4 ,like the sweet-grass mats the ,lavender ,sticks are for perfuming clothing and household linen4 ,they are pretty little trifles1 and make most acceptable birthday and ,christmas gifts4 ,illustration3 ,the ,lavender ,stick4 ,gather your lavender stalks 7each one having a blossomed top7 while they are fresh and green1 and use them as soon as possible after cutting1 as they grow brittle when dry4 ,it will take about twenty-five stalks for a large lavender stick1 less for a small one1 but in both cases there must be an uneven number4 ,you will need1 also1 some narrow lavender ribbon4 ,it is best to buy the ribbon by the piece1 or roll1 as it is not easy to calculate the exact amount required for the sticks4 ,bunch your lavender stalks together1 with the heads at the top1 and tie securely just below the blossoms 7,fig4 #abh7 with linen thread4 ,bend the stems over carefully1 bringing them down over the blossoms 7,fig4 #abi74 ,a little raw cotton may be used to fill out the bulb or1 if you have them1 extra lavender blossoms4 ,pin one end of your ribbon at the top of the bulb1 where the stalks are tied together1 pushing the pin through the ribbon down into the bulb1 then begin to weave it under and over the stalks as in ,fig4 #abi4 ,weave about two inches1 widening all the time1 then draw the ribbon a little tighter1 bring the stalks closer together1 and narrow the bulb gradually4 ,when the stalks are bunched again1 stop weaving and begin to wrap1 lapping the edges of the ribbon as in the illustration4 ,have the wrapping tight and firm and1 when about an inch or two from the ends of the stalks1 fasten with needle and thread1 then tie the ribbon in a bow of many loops4 ,finish the top with a bow also1 making it quite full4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abi4 ,braiding ,palm-grasses and ,corn-husks ,away down in ,florida1 where the palms and palmettos are as common as are the most ordinary trees and shrubs in the ,north1 most of the children wear hats made of the strong and durable leaves of these beautiful trees2 and all the children know how to braid the palm in a number of ways4 ,indeed1 it was a little girl not more than eight years old who taught me just what ,i am going to try to teach you4 ,she was 8keeping house0 with a number of other children on one of the fine1 shady streets of ,daytona1 ,fla41 and1 stopping to watch them at their play1 we were made welcome in their 8house10 and one little hostess gave me the lesson ,i asked for then and there4 ,you all know how a palm-leaf grows1 tall and straight1 and closed tightly like a fan until it is time for it to open1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acj4 when it slowly separates and spreads its fingers wide4 ,it was the unopened leaf of the cabbage-palm which was chosen for the braid1 and very pretty the tender leaf is2 white1 soft1 and pliable1 and edged with light green4 ,it is beautifully adapted to braiding1 and the fingers of my little teacher flew deftly1 as the braid lengthened in her hands1 and my mind sped along almost as swiftly1 as ,i tried to adapt the process to materials to be found in the ,north1 so that ,northern1 as well as ,southern1 girls might share with me this little piece of handicraft4 ,i am sure wide1 flat grasses can be braided in this way1 and corn-husks and--well1 a number of other things which you will find if you keep your eyes open2 but ,i must return to the palm and tell you just how ,i was taught to braid that4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aca4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acc4 ,first ,i tore the leaf into strips about one-quarter of an inch wide1 then taking two strips1 ,i folded one end of each as in ,fig4 #acj1 and lapped the folded ends as in ,fig4 #aca4 ,bending the right-hand strip 7,a71 ,i pushed it through the loop formed by the other 7,b7 as in ,fig4 #acb1 and pulled ,b down tightly 7,fig4 #acc74 ,bending ,b1 ,i pushed that through the loop ,a had formed1 and drawing ,a tightly1 left a loop of ,b at the top 7,fig4 #acd74 ,each time a loop was formed ,i pushed another loop through it and drew the first down snugly1 and so braided a strip like ,fig4 #ace4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ace4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acf4 ,my little teacher forgot to show me how to piece the strips1 and ,i was obliged to work out the problem for myself and for you4 ,when one of the strips had dwindled down and grown too narrow1 ,i cut it off1 leaving a little over an inch below the loop4 ,i then inserted another strip over ,b1 pushing it under ,a1 as in ,fig4 #acf1 bringing it over the ,b loop and again under ,a on the other side1 pulling it down until the two short ends were even4 ,after that ,i continued to braid as before1 the first two ,b loops being double1 of course4 ,it is not well to have the piecing of both strips come together1 therefore one should be longer than the other at the start1 and the strips should be always of the same width in order to make the braid uniform and even4 ,this is regular hat braid you have learned to make1 and perhaps having done so much you will feel inspired to continue the work and make a hat1 if not a large one1 at least one for your own or your younger sister's doll4 ,or you can make it into a basket by sewing the braid together1 lapping one edge over the other4 ,the braid should be back-stitched for both hats and baskets4 ,most materials require damping before they are braided1 for even when soft and pliable they are apt to separate when dry1 unless they have first been soaked for a while in water4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #add4--;,a ,girl's ,collection of ,pictures4 ,,chapter ,v ,,collections ,every girl can have her own gallery of famous artists' pictures1 and the searching for and finding of treasures to form a home art collection are a constant source of interest4 ,when once the supply is started it grows rapidly1 for the fascination increases as the work progresses1 and the nucleus of a fine assortment is soon gathered4 ,daily papers furnish valuable material in this line through their reproductions of paintings1 and the market is flooded with beautifully illustrated magazines giving the art of our own land and that of foreign countries2 then there are unmounted photographs of masterpieces which may be purchased for a very small sum2 many can be bought at a penny each4 ,if new magazines are not to be had1 old ones can be found at bookstalls for low prices1 which contain reproductions of paintings and excellent accounts of them4 ,carefully take the magazines apart1 removing the wire fastenings by straightening and drawing them out before attempting to separate the leaves2 then cut out the chosen pictures1 allowing as wide a white margin as possible4 ,only those prints which represent the work of eminent artists should be selected4 ,decide upon some definite line of art1 for the field is a large and varied one4 ,better results can be obtained if you devote your efforts to the paintings of only one nation1 such as ,american1 ,english1 ,french1 or ,flemish art4 ,again1 the collection might embrace the works of but one artist or school of painting1 or be restricted to famous caricaturists or mural decorators4 ,having made your choice and collected two or three designs1 buy low-priced medium-weight card-board for ,mounting the ,pictures ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acg4 ,select a kind not brittle or liable to tear2 get either a soft gray tone or white1 the former often harmonizing best with black and white pictures4 ,your material being ready1 turn the pictures on the wrong side and mark the centres4 ,the easiest way of doing this is by laying a ruler diagonally across the back of picture1 ,fig4 #acg1 and drawing a line on the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ach4 paper along the edge of the ruler4 ,be sure to have the ruler precisely at the corners2 if placed either to one side or the other1 the centre will not be found4 ,fig4 #ach shows the first line drawn2 cross this line by another running from the remaining two corners which will give ,fig4 #aci2 the point where the lines intersect is the exact centre of the picture4 ,cut the mounting board in portions large enough to allow a surrounding margin of four or five inches ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aci4 on each picture2 then mark the centres on the right1 not wrong1 side of the mounting board4 ,it will be unnecessary to extend the line from corner to corner of the mounting board2 lay the ruler across and mark it merely at the centre1 ,fig4 #adj4 ,take the print ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adj4 you intend to mount first and carefully place it upon the blank piece of paper so that the centre of the picture will be exactly over the centre of the blank paper2 lightly mark a line in lead-pencil around two corners of the picture1 remove the print and the blank paper resembles ,fig4 #ada4 ,the last markings are a guide in pasting the picture on the sheet of paper4 ,first dampen the wrong side of the print with a wet sponge4 ,have ready some strong paste and spread it lightly on the wrong side4 ,be careful not to get too much paste lest it smear the mounting-paper4 ,lay ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ada4 the mounting-sheet upon a perfectly clean1 level surface and place the print on it according to the guiding marks4 ,have the picture absolutely smooth1 without a suspicion of a wrinkle or blister1 and with a clean cloth again smooth it gently1 pressing it down here ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adb4 and there as seems necessary to make it adhere firmly 7,fig4 #adb74 ,then place a weight upon the mounted picture and leave it to dry4 ,after having been successful with one picture no difficulty will be found in mounting the others4 ,it often happens that it is impossible to separate a picture from the article treating of it1 for the reason that one side of the page gives the print and the other side the description4 ,this difficulty is remedied by ,splitting the ,paper1 which will give two layers of uniform thickness1 and if there are pictures on each side of the paper they may both be preserved4 ,cut two pieces of perfectly smooth muslin a little larger all around than the sheet of paper to be split4 ,dampen one of the pieces of muslin and lay it out smooth on an even1 flat surface2 cover one side of the paper to be split with a thin layer of very strong paste or glue and carefully place the paper1 paste-side down1 on the muslin2 lay it out flat and be sure it does not wrinkle2 then cover the other side of the paper with paste and place the second dampened piece of muslin over it4 ,be certain that the muslin adheres over the entire surface of both sides of the paper4 ,should it fail in places1 the spots of paper not clinging to the muslin will tear out during the splitting4 ,see that the paste extends to the outermost edges of the paper1 and do not forget that muslin1 paper1 and paste must all be smooth4 ,use a rolling-pin to secure uniform adhesion4 ,when the pasting is done1 let it dry1 and after it has dried perfectly1 separate the two pieces of muslin at one corner1 and the paper will begin to split if the work has been properly done4 ,continue opening the edges until all four sides are partially separated1 and the fission of the paper just beginning2 then a firm pull will entirely separate the two pieces of muslin and1 at the same time1 split the paper4 ,if you experiment on a small piece of paper before attempting the picture you will better understand the process4 ,to remove the muslin from the paper1 soak it in hot water2 place the water in a basin large enough to admit of the muslin lying out flat4 ,let the paper side be underneath1 so that the muslin may be easily removed when it detaches itself from the paper4 ,should any bits of paste remain on the paper1 soak them off2 move the paper gently in the water back and forward1 until the paste is washed away2 then lift the paper from the water by placing a thin stick of wood under one edge and carefully drawing the wet picture out2 it will hang like a curtain from the stick4 ,let the water drip off2 then lay the paper down flat and smooth on a piece of blotting-paper1 picture-side up4 ,when nearly dry1 place the picture between two sheets of pasteboard1 and leave it under a weight until quite dry4 ,mount split pictures on white card-board2 gray will show through the thin paper4 ,on the back of each mounting-board fasten two small brass rings by which ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adc4 ,to ,hang the ,picture ,slide a ring on a short piece of tape and glue the ends of the tape at one side on the back and near the top of the picture to form a hook 7,fig4 #adc1 ,h74 ,do the same with a second ring and tape4 ,when both tapes are securely fastened on the mounting-board1 paste over each a strip of tough paper or muslin 7,fig4 #adc1 ,p74 ,if a wire be fastened on the rings1 the pictures may hang from the picture-moulding around the room1 or the collection can depend upon nails for support4 ,if desirable1 the rings may fit over tacks driven in the wall4 ,fig4 #add at the beginning of the chapter gives a girl's collection of reproductions from famous paintings4 ,the pictures can be kept in ,a ,portfolio made expressly for the purpose1 should there be no wall-space on which to hang them4 ,make the portfolio of two strong1 stiff pieces of pasteboard1 cut large enough to extend one inch beyond each of the four sides of the mounted designs so as to preclude all possibility of damage to the edges of the work4 ,sew a length of brown tape at each corner of the two sides of the portfolio1 making in all eight pieces of tape1 four on each pasteboard2 then lay each cover down on a piece of denim and mark four spots on the cloth1 corresponding to the places where the tapes are fastened on the pasteboard4 ,remove the denim and punch holes through the cloth at the four places designated on each piece2 button-hole stitch the openings1 and run the tapes through1 drawing the cloth down tight and flat upon the pasteboard2 smooth the brown covering out evenly and turn the four sides neatly over the edges where they can be securely fastened by long stitches of strong thread taken from edge to edge of the cloth4 ,cover the wrong side of each piece with heavy1 rough1 brown paper2 paste it on carefully and put them under weights to dry2 the paper forms the inside and the cloth the outside of the portfolio4 ,in such covers any number of mounted pictures can be kept secure from harm4 ,it is only necessary to pile them up evenly on one cover1 lay the other cover on top1 and tie the two together over the pictures by means of the tapes at the four corners4 ,the portfolio is not intended to stand on edge2 it must be laid flat4 ,another and different collection is very precious1 though the best part is not visible4 ,it is a collection that is sure to be always a comfort1 and one with which the more familiar you grow the better you will feel4 ,such a collection is called the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ade4 ,sunshine ,diary ,the book may be one of the usual styles of diaries sold in the stores1 or an ordinary blank-book2 better still1 a home-made book4 ,the latter requires forty-six sheets of writing-paper 7,fig4 #ade71 and for a cover stiff brown paper or card-board--the kind used for making passe-partouts and which comes in all colors--will be excellent4 ,cut the cover a trifle longer and broader than the writing-paper1 so that it may extend beyond the leaves of the book on the sides1 protecting the edges 7,fig4 #adf74 ,fasten all together by means of a strong brown or yellow cord laced through holes made in the cover and book 7,fig4 #adg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adf4 ,should you be unable to cut the holes as neatly as you desire1 send the book to a shoe store or a harness-maker's to have the holes made4 ,decorate the cover in gilt4 ,make a circle for the sun and use a ruler in marking the rays4 ,draw the top and bottom rays first4 ,begin at the top of the centre ray and run the lead-pencil down along the edge of the ruler as far as you wish the ray to extend2 then raise the pencil1 but ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adg4 not the ruler4 ,hold that down firmly with the left hand1 while you again place the pencil down below the circle and draw the lower ray4 ,make the two horizontal rays in the same way 7,fig4 #adh74 ,after this it will be easy to draw the remaining rays by laying the ruler diagonally between the top and bottom and the side rays4 ,beneath the sun mark the title in plain lettering 7,fig4 #adi74 ,if you cannot make the letters even and straight1 do the best you can1 and they will look very well--better1 in a way1 than if another had made them for you1 because that will be your own ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adh4 work4 ,when the design is finished in pencil go over it with liquid gilt1 painting the sun a solid gold disk1 the rays mere lines of gold1 and the lettering slightly heavier4 ,on the first page of the diary write in ink your age and full name and under this the year and day of the month4 ,then turn over the leaf and on the right-hand page rule a line exactly across the centre with red ink4 ,at the top of the page write in red ink the day of the week and month and under the red line write the next day of the week and month 7,fig4 #aej74 ,put down all dates and divisions in red ink4 ,the book is now ready for the record of ,january #a4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adi4 ,before making any entry try to think of the kindest and pleasantest things said to you and done for you during ,new ,year's ,day1 and with black ink write these1 and these alone1 for each day must reflect only beautiful thoughts and acts--nothing else is allowed in the 8,sunshine ,diary40 ,on the second day of the month make a similar record on the lower half of the page2 the third day turn over the leaf and carefully rule the next two pages as you did the first1 which will make four equal divisions for ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aej4 four more days4 ,date each half of the page correctly and proceed with the journal4 ,continue in the same way until the end of the year and you will have a treasure well worth keeping all the days of your life4 ,the very act of carrying out the 8sunshine0 idea will tend to strengthen all kindly feelings and cause you to be on the watch for happy items to jot down in your book4 ,a ,guest ,book ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aea4 ,another work is the 8,guest ,book0--one in which each friend who calls to see you can write his name1 with the date and a few remarks4 ,one boy might draw a simple little pencil sketch under his name2 another could write a joke in reference to some mutual experience4 ,from one of the girls might come an apt quotation2 from another an original rhyme--in fact1 anything that would be interesting4 ,let the grown people also have the privilege of leaving their autographs with a few remarks in the 8,guest ,book10 for they1 too1 are your friends4 ,the book itself should be at least seven inches long and five broad2 larger would be better4 ,the common blank-book of good paper will answer the purpose2 it can be covered with stiff linen1 which is sold for dress lining and may be found in the shops4 ,cut the cover to extend beyond the book two or three inches 7,fig4 #aea74 ,the dotted line indicates the book4 ,adjust the cover evenly and crease it slightly along the edges of the book in order to know exactly how it will fit4 ,still holding the book in the left hand1 carefully cut two flaps1 in the extension at the top and bottom of the back4 ,remove and unfold 7,fig4 #aeb1 ,a and ,b72 turn down the flaps as in ,fig4 #aeb1 and again place the linen on the book4 ,fold over the linen at the top and bottom of one side of the book binding 7,fig4 #aee72 do the same with the other side1 then turn in the outer edge 7,fig4 #aed74 ,again remove the cover and1 after creasing the folds1 cut the four corners out1 as in ,fig4 #aee1 ,c1 ,d1 ,e1 ,f4 ,keep the flaps 7,fig4 #aeb1 ,a and ,b7 folded in1 and place the cover on the book 7,fig4 #aef74 ,paste the corners ,g and ,h firmly to the underlying piece of linen1 do the same with the other side and the cover will be finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aec4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aef4 ,letter the outside in deep1 rich red1 using paint and brush4 ,if you cannot print the letters1 write the title 8,guest ,book0 in a bold hand with the brush4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aeg4 ,calendars ,calendars are always welcome and appropriate on ,new ,year4 ,make yours of twelve pieces of heavy unruled1 tinted writing-paper4 ,decide upon twelve persons whom you would like to think of often and cut twelve slips of white writing-paper of exactly the same size4 ,send one to each chosen individual and ask that the friend's name and some sentiment be written on the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aeh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aei4 paper and that it be returned to you4 ,having received all the slips1 paste one near the top of each sheet of writing-paper 7,fig4 #aeg72 below paste one leaf of a printed calendar representing one month 7,fig4 #aeh74 ,use a ,christmas card for an outside cover and through the two top corners of the calendar make round holes large enough to allow a silken cord1 matching in color the tint of the paper1 to pass through4 ,then fasten all the pieces of the calendar together in order1 ,january being the first and ,december the last 7,fig4 #aei74 ,as each month passes by slide that leaf back on the cords1 bringing after ,january1 for instance1 ,february to view4 ,hold the two loops of cord together at the top and hang the calendar where it may be readily seen4 ,you can also ,begin ,illustrating ,books ,do not be surprised6 ,no knowledge of drawing and painting is necessary in order to illustrate in the new1 easy fashion4 ,decide upon some short story you wish to embellish2 then look among your scraps for appropriate pictures4 ,should you not find exactly what you want1 make the pictures over to suit4 ,if the story introduces a jolly little maiden full of fun1 and describes her as feeding her pet dog and laughing at his antics1 and there is no such maiden in your collections1 look for one with the style of face you think the girl in the story ought to have4 ,when this is found and the body is not satisfactory1 cut off the head and hunt up an appropriate body to fit it2 that obtained1 paste the pretty head on the new body and cut out the entire figure4 ,find a dog1 in the correct position1 in some old magazine or newspaper1 cut out the animal1 and before pasting the group in place try the effect of both on a blank piece of white paper4 ,slide the figures together and apart until you have them where they look best2 then paste the girl and dog neatly in position on the white paper1 and the full-page illustration is ready for insertion in the book4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afj4 ,always leave a wide white margin on all illustrations2 never crowd the picture up to the very edge of the page if you desire it to look well1 and be sure to dampen the wrong side of each picture before attempting to paste it in your book1 that it may be smooth and not wrinkle4 ,the new leaf for the picture should be cut wide enough to allow a quarter-inch projection or more over on the opposite page1 as in ,fig4 #afj1 ,,oo1 where it can be pasted down on the inner margin of the other leaf4 ,the dotted line indicates the centre of the book4 ,bound books will not admit of many extra leaves being inserted1 so you can select only a few of the incidents in the narrative for illustration4 ,use care that the picture shall express your idea of the event or place you desire to represent4 ,sometimes it may happen1 by lack of suitable material1 that you cannot finish certain pictures for days or weeks after they are begun4 ,in such a case bide your time until the wished-for designs appear1 and in the meantime go on with the other illustrations4 ,if the book is paper-covered1 you can take it all apart1 insert as many pictures as you desire and fasten it together again4 ,when obtainable use ,colored ,pictures and ,photographs as illustrations4 ,you may chance to find appropriate colored reproductions from water-color sketches1 that will serve the purpose without alteration4 ,such would give a fine appearance to your book4 ,unmounted photographs can also be employed1 but1 if possible1 avoid different styles of pictures in the same work4 ,keep the colored designs for one book1 the prints for another1 and the photographs for a third4 ,bear in mind that1 whatever the nature of the illustrations1 you are to use only such as appeal to you and express your ideas2 the scheme will lose individuality--that is1 it will not represent your choice--if you select what others may deem best in preference to that which you would have chosen if left unmolested4 ,it is the individuality which gives value to the work4 ,never attempt to illustrate a valuable book in this new way1 though it would not injure the volume if you found a good unmounted picture of the author and pasted it on one of the fly-leaves in the front of the book4 ,the portrait would add to the value and interest of the volume1 as would also items of information on the subject of which the book treats1 if pasted on an extra loose leaf and left in the back of the book4 ,when you have a collection of snap-shots that you wish to preserve1 make ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afa4 ,a ,photograph ,book in which to keep them4 ,cut two pieces of stiff pasteboard1 each #f inches wide and #e inches high4 ,use strong paste to fasten these on one side of a strip of heavy linen of a soft green color1 #ad inches long by #f inches wide4 ,leave a space of uncovered linen three-fourths of an inch wide in the centre1 ,fig4 #afa4 ,this will give the foundation for the cover of your book4 ,draw the linen tightly over the edge of the card-board at the top and bottom1 paste it down smooth and even2 then paste the two end-pieces over1 thus binding the four edges of the book4 ,cut sixteen leaves from heavy ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afb4 dull-surfaced paper1 matching the green linen in color1 make each leaf #f inches wide and #e inches high4 ,two of the leaves serve as lining for the cover1 leaving fourteen leaves or twenty-eight pages for the unmounted photographs4 ,paste the first leaf on the left-hand side of the cover1 let it fit over the turned-in border of linen and extend across the centre onto the edge of the other card-board1 ,,ll to ,,kk1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afc4 ,fig4 #afb2 the dotted lines indicate the turned-over linen underneath the paper leaf which is used as a lining4 ,take a second leaf and turn down the left hand edge to a depth of of an inch1 leaving the leaf #f inches wide4 ,cover the of an inch extension with paste1 then lap it over on the left-hand side of the centre and paste securely4 ,the place where the side of the leaf should be fastened down to the lining of the cover is represented by ,,mm in ,fig4 #afb4 ,fig4 #afc shows the space ,,mm covered by the side of the leaf1 the diagram giving two leaves properly glued together1 the dotted line indicates the centre of the book4 ,as each leaf is fastened in1 turn it over and paste the next one on it as in ,fig4 #afc4 ,continue adding leaves1 always allowing the right-hand leaf to ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afd4 overlap the left three-quarters of an inch4 ,when the last leaf is fastened in place1 paste it down tight on the right-hand side of the inside of the cover1 where it will form a lining concealing the raw edges of the linen and the blank pasteboard as the first leaf covered the left-hand side of the inside of the cover4 ,this system of fastening the leaves together will cause them to fold in the back where there will be no raw edges4 ,fig4 #afd gives four leaves1 showing the back where they are folded over after each is joined to the preceding leaf4 ,when the book is finished the back hinge part of the cover is free from the leaves1 leaving an opening from top to bottom large enough to run a slender pencil through when the book is opened4 ,if desired the cover can be decorated with the title 8,snap-,shots40 ,illustration3 ,making ,valentines4 ,,chapter ,,vi ,,original ,,valentines ,always alert1 chubby little ,cupid works hard on ,st4 ,valentine's ,day2 his duties are many1 and his pretty bow sends the arrows flying in all directions4 ,he is a merry little fellow1 full of queer pranks and a great favorite4 ,the venerable ,st4 ,valentine seems to have merely loaned his name to the fourteenth of ,february1 leaving all the duties to ,cupid1 who appears to be well pleased with the arrangement4 ,for hundreds of years past the young people have been as anxious to send and receive valentines as at the present time ,in ,former ,days1 before valentines were dropped in the mail-box1 girls and boys had a great deal of fun sending them to each other4 ,generally the young folks waited until twilight2 then each would sally forth in his neighborhood1 lightly step up to the front door of the house where the valentine was to be left1 and without the least noise slip the paper under the door1 ring the bell and scamper away as fast as possible1 to avoid being seen4 ,valentines to-day bring the same thrill of pleasure1 and when the whistle of the postman announces the arrival of the mail on the eventful day1 eager fingers are impatient to open the envelope and discover the treasure within4 ,then the question follows1 8,who could have sent such a lovely valentine to me80 ,before making original valentines try to think of some particular study or pursuit in which each friend is interested to whom you desire to send a token on ,february #ad4 ,one may have a talent for painting1 another for music2 a third may delight in flowers1 and so on throughout a long list of subjects which will furnish you with many suggestions for ,the ,most ,appropriate ,valentine to be sent to each4 ,as a little practice before using ideas entirely your own1 try making the valentines here described4 ,the mystic four-leaved clover 7,fig4 #afe7 would be just the thing for a companion who delights in hunting that symbol of good luck4 ,this valentine is very simple and can be made in a short time4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aff4 ,cut a sheet of unruled heavy writing-paper in halves and on one piece trace ,the ,four-leaved ,clover 7,fig4 #aff74 ,paint it green2 an even flat tint will look well if you cannot manage shadows1 but be careful to do the work to the best of your ability4 ,in plain lettering mark the words1 8,good ,luck to ,you1 my ,valentine20 then slide the missive into an envelope large enough to contain an unfolded half-sheet of paper4 ,in case you happen ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afg4 to have a natural four-leaved clover which has been pressed1 use it instead of the painted one1 and take a whole sheet of paper so that the brittle leaf may not be exposed1 but can be secured inside the sheet on the third page by means of a little paste4 ,with the pressed clover the lettering should be made on the outside of the sheet of paper before the leaf is placed within4 ,another easy valentine to make is ,the ,easel ,holding a ,picture ,cut this from stiff paper or light-weight card-board 7,fig4 #afg74 ,first trace the design on the card-board2 then ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afh4 cut it out and paint the easel golden-brown on both sides1 except the part which forms the canvas for the picture and the cross-piece for the lettering4 ,leave these white2 draw a line at the bottom of the canvas and letter the strip1 8,to my ,valentine40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afi4 ,paste any pretty colored floral design you may possess on the blank space or canvas left for the purpose4 ,bend down the supporting strip 7,a7 projecting from the top 7,fig4 #afg71 and the miniature picture and easel will stand alone and be ready to send to some friend who is studying drawing or is interested in art 7,fig4 #afh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agj4 ,to an attractive friend who has no special fancy for any particular avocation1 send the valentine shown at ,fig4 #afi4 ,make it of ,two ,heart-shaped ,pieces of stiff white paper and a small piece of broken mirror4 ,cut the heart according to the size of the glass 7,fig4 #agj72 then with strong paste fasten the mirror on the heart 7,fig4 #agj74 ,cut another heart exactly like the first1 and and in its centre make a heart-shaped opening as large as possible1 while leaving it small enough to cover well the edges of the glass4 ,if you do not know how to make a heart-shaped design trace ,fig4 #afi4 ,decorate the top part with a painted pink ribbon1 and on one side write1 8,look into this ,mirror ,clear10 and on the other1 8,and ,my ,true ,love will ,appear40 ,at the bottom point of the valentine paste a ,cupid2 then using strong paste fasten the heart-shaped frame over the glass and lay the valentine under several books until the paste is dry1 taking the precaution to put a clean piece of paper underneath1 and another over the top of the valentine to keep it perfectly fresh and clean4 ,any other style of decoration may take the place of the ribbon and ,cupid4 ,small colored embossed paper forget-me-nots could be used4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aga4 ,should one of your friends delight in fireworks displays give her ,the ,firecracker shown at ,fig4 #aga4 ,roll together a piece of stiff paper two inches wide and three inches long 7,fig4 #agb72 let the two sides overlap each other slightly and join them securely with strong paste1 forming a hollow tube4 ,have the paper the peculiar red of genuine firecrackers1 if you can obtain such4 ,for the inside take a piece of white paper four inches long and a trifle less than three inches wide and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agb4 write on it these words3 8,your eyes are so bright ,that if they were mine1 ,i would soon have a light ,for this queer valentine40 ,in the turned-over edge at the bottom of the paper paste a waxed string1 as in ,fig4 #agc4 ,then roll the paper and insert it in the red tube 7,fig4 #aga74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agc4 ,one of the prettiest customs of ,st4 ,valentine's ,day was instituted by the daughter of ,henry ,,iv4 of ,france1 ,madam ,royal1 who built a palace and named it the ,valentine4 ,she then gave a grand party in honor of ,st4 ,valentine where each lady received a beautiful bouquet of flowers from one who was chosen as her valentine4 ,the same gallantry was repeated ever after on like occasions4 ,the idea of the valentine flowers is very pleasing1 and we will use it in a modified form1 but instead of cut blossoms in a bouquet we will have ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agd4 ,a ,pot of ,growing ,flowers 7,fig4 #agd74 ,trace on reddish-brown card-board 7,fig4 #age71 and cut it out1 also cut the point ,b and the slits ,c and ,e4 ,bring the two sides together1 sliding the end ,d over1 not under1 through the slit ,c1 at the same time pushing the point ,b into the small slit ,e2 and bend back the extension ,d on the wrong side to hold the sides together and keep the flower-pot upright4 ,cut out the bottom 7,fig4 #agf7 and let it drop down through the top of the flower-pot until it lodges4 ,straighten and fit it in evenly2 then cut out the top 7,fig4 #agg7 of dark card-board1 as it represents the earth4 ,of course1 one cannot dig holes in paper earth to plant paper flowers1 so slits must be made according to ,fig4 #agg4 ,on white card-board trace ,figs4 #agh1 #agi1 and #ahj2 paint them to resemble as nearly as possible natural pinks1 and plant them ,illustration3 ,fig4 #age4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agg4 in the paper earth in this way3 slip the rounded extension of ,fig4 #agh through the slit ,f 7,fig4 #agg74 ,bend back the angular part ,k and slide its extension ,l through the small slit ,t4 ,turn the paper earth over on the wrong side1 holding the flowers in position the while1 and bend up the roots of the two projecting pieces against the under side of the disk or earth2 paste them in place4 ,next plant ,fig4 #agi in the same manner1 sliding its rounded extension through slit ,g1 and its smaller one through slit ,o4 ,plant the last flower 7,fig4 #ahj7 through ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agh4 slit ,h2 adjust the earth or top disk1 and the finished work will be a little round flower-pot filled with growing pinks standing up separately from each other and looking very bright and natural 7,fig4 #agd74 ,on a dainty piece of paper write this message3 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agi4 8,go1 ,little ,flowers1 ,salute ,my ,valentine1 ,who ,can1 ,who ,may1 ,who ,must ,be ,mine40 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aha4 ,place the note inside the flower-pot4 ,pretty colored printed flowers or embossed ones for scrap-books1 which may be bought in almost any toy-store1 can be substituted for the pinks4 ,fasten them in position by making three tracings of ,fig4 #aha and pasting a group of flowers and foliage on each one2 these extra pieces will furnish the flowers with proper paper roots1 which can be planted and fitted in the paper earth in the same manner as the pinks4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahb4 ,a ,gentle ,little ,friend should receive the valentine which is shown at ,fig4 #ahb4 ,cut from white card-board the circular disk 7,fig4 #ahc72 around its edge write3 8,lift the ,loop and ,you ,shall ,see ,that ,which ,makes ,me ,think of ,thee40 ,from fancy gold paper cut a circular band 7,fig4 #ahd7 smaller in circumference than the card-board2 fold it through the centre 7,fig4 #ahe71 bring the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahf4 folded ends together and again fold 7,fig4 #ahf74 ,once more fold 7,fig4 #ahg7 and from this cut the outline seen in ,fig4 #ahh1 being careful not to cut the folded ends ,p and ,q4 ,unfold the paper and you will have ,fig4 #ahi4 ,place this ornamental golden band on the white cardboard4 ,it should fit just inside the writing4 ,stick it down slightly here and there with a very little paste2 then make ,fig4 #aij of fancy white paper4 ,insert the scissors at the beginning 7,s7 and cut the spiral around and around in one unbroken strip until the centre is reached4 ,in the centre make a short slit and push the two ends of a narrow white ribbon through the slit2 then turn the spiral over and paste each end of the ribbon flat against the paper1 as in ,fig4 #aia4 ,have ready a white paper dove and fasten it in the centre of ,fig4 #ahc1 which has previously been decorated with the gold-paper design4 ,slide the end ,s of the spiral under the edge of the gold band1 placing the spiral so that it will lie flat and even inside the golden paper and will cover the centre of the valentine4 ,lift the cover by the loop and you will have a glimpse of the white dove1 which means peace and gentleness4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aia4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aij4 ,,chapter ,,vii ,,vegetable ,,animals ,,and ,,fruit ,,lanterns ,do you know that with the aid of a little enchantment equal to magic employed by the fairy folks of old1 you can make a tiny fowl1 one small enough to stand on the palm of your hand8 ,a certain process which you shall learn will cause a common raw potato to change into a wee turkey of which anyone might well be proud4 ,the wands you will use for the work differ in nature and appearance and are far superior to the fairy wands2 the latter are merely stiff sticks said to be endowed with magical powers1 while yours are of most wonderful workmanship and adapted to any use to which you care to put them4 ,more than that1 you have complete control over the wands2 at your command they do your bidding1 making all kinds of useful and beautiful things1 from the most delicate and fragile articles to the largest and heaviest creations4 ,one of your wands is known as the right1 the other as the left hand4 ,look at these pliable and exquisitely fashioned wands1 think of all they have accomplished and may do for you1 then set them both to work on your ,potato ,turkey ,select a small potato 7,fig4 #aib7;,illustration3 ,fig4 #aib41 break off the ends of three burnt matches and force the longer portions into the potato1 two to serve as legs1 and one as a support 7,fig4 #aic ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aic474 ,trace ,fig4 #aid ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aid4 on stiff brown pasteboard1 an old box-lid will be the best thing to use1 its surface being dull and almost the same in color as the potato4 ,cut out the tracing and mark eyes1 mouth1 and tuft on it with ink 7,fig4 #aie ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aie474 ,if you wish to have your turkey look extra fine1 make wattles of red paper or cloth 7,fig4 #aif ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aif472 fold as in ,fig4 #aig ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aig41 and paste the band-like upper portion over each side of the turkey's neck1 allowing the lower flaps to hang free 7,fig4 #aih ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aih474 ,cut a slit in the potato 7,fig4 #aib1 ,a-,a7 and insert the head1 pushing in the extension as far as the dotted line1 or until it fits 7,fig4 #aii74 ,make a small opening on each side of the turkey 7,fig4 #aii1 ,c7 and stick in two curved feathers for wings4 ,if you have only stiff feathers1 choose two small ones1 and with your forefinger and thumb bend the ribs 7,fig4 #bjj7 until they are rounded enough to cling to the sides of the turkey4 ,use stiff feathers for the tail1 first making holes in the turkey in which to insert them 7,fig4 #aii74 ,push the feathers in securely1 and should they stand up unevenly at varying heights1 trim them carefully with scissors and the turkey will be finished 7,fig4 #bja74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aii4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bja4 ,in the ,south a young pig1 called ,a ,shoat1 is considered as desirable as a turkey and is eaten with much relish4 ,of course1 each person is served with only a portion ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjb4 and cannot have a whole one1 as is your privilege2 for your shoat1 like the turkey1 will be very small1 no larger than a lemon1 and of the same color-in fact1 it is a lemon to begin with 7,fig4 #bjb74 ,four sticks furnish the legs 7,fig4 #bjc74 ,the ears are ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjc4 formed by cutting the skin in the shape of a ,v on each side of the pointed end of the lemon 7,fig4 #bjd1 ,b7 and bending up the points 7,fig4 #bje74 ,a slender stick bent at short intervals 7,fig4 #bjf7 until it simulates a twist or curl is used for a tail 7,fig4 #bjg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bje4 ,in cutting the ears be cautious not to pierce entirely through the skin2 allow the point of the knife to enter only deep enough into the rind to cut a piece of sufficient thickness to turn up without ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjg4 breaking1 and have the slender sticks used for legs and tail sharpened at one end so they may readily be pushed into the lemon4 ,ordinary wooden toothpicks will answer the purpose1 but they must first be broken into shorter lengths for the legs4 ,the eyes are two black-headed pins4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bji4 ,turtle ,soup is thought a great delicacy by some families1 who deem a holiday dinner incomplete without the dish4 ,while we do not care for the soup1 we would like a small turtle1 one that will not snap at us but be content to remain quiet and look natural4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baa4 ,ask for a large raisin 7,fig4 #bjh7 and six cloves1 five without and one with the round seed2 work in the four cloves with claw-like ends to serve as feet 7,fig4 #bji74 ,use the reverse end of a clove for the tail 7,fig4 #baj7 and the round seed clove for a head 7,fig4 #baa74 ,bend the head and tail up and the feet down 7,fig4 #bab74 ,beautiful golden pumpkins hold a prominent place in the minds of ,americans4 ,beside the delicious pies made of the yellow fruit1 there are the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bab4 ,funny ,lanterns fashioned by cutting a semblance of a face in the pumpkin1 shaking out the inside fibre and seeds1 and1 in the evening1 placing a lighted candle in the queer head1 causing the light to shine through eyes1 nose1 and mouth in a manner startling to those unaccustomed to the sight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bac4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bad4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bae4 ,the real pumpkin is large and heavy to handle1 but you can have ,a ,substitute in the form of an apple4 ,choose one that is deep red in color1 in order to have the greatest possible contrast between the features and the head proper4 ,it will not be ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bag4 necessary nor desirable to light up the face1 the apple head is comical enough with the face merely cut in its surface and the work is very easy4 ,cut out from the apple 7,fig4 #bac7 two triangles near the top for eyes 7,fig4 #bad72 directly below the eyes but in the central part cut the triangular nose 7,fig4 #bae72 under the nose make the mouth in the shape of a slender crescent 7,fig4 #baf71 and tie a ribbon on the stem as an ornamental headdress 7,fig4 #bag74 ,there6 you have fairly made the apple laugh4 ,only see how it is stretching its mouth in a broad grin6 ,,chapter ,,viii ,,pasteboard ,,models ,,for ,a ,,home ,,drawing ,,class ,study drawing at home and make your own models2 form a class of several girls and work together2 criticise one another's drawings1 and get a criticism from an artist whenever you can4 ,much may be accomplished in this way if you have the enthusiasm1 perseverance1 and will to carry it through4 ,starting with one object1 complete in itself1 a variety of forms may be evolved1 and combinations can be made until an entirely new model is produced4 ,such1 for instance1 is the church shown in the illustration4 ,first there is the house1 then the house with a chimney1 the house with chimney and one wing1 the house with chimney and two wings2 then the church1 which is made by adding turret and steeple1 the church without wings1 and the church with wings4 ,a number of times this model may be used1 changing the position and adding to or taking from it1 and a different picture will be the result of each drawing4 ,simpler models like ,the ,pyramid can also be made1 and it is well to try your hand on this before attempting the more complicated forms4 ,illustration3 ,pasteboard ,model of ,church4 ,lay a sheet of heavy card-board flat on your work-table and draw carefully four triangles like ,fig4 #bah4 ,these are for the four sides of the pyramid4 ,use a rule to keep your lines straight1 and make each side according to the dimensions given on the diagram4 ,you will see that the measurement from apex to base is ten inches1 and the width at the bottom is six and one-half inches4 ,with a sharp knife1 or large shears1 cut out each part1 taking pains to keep your edges true to the lines4 ,besides the card-board you will need a roll of passe-partout paper4 ,this comes in one-inch widths1 ready gummed1 for making passe-partout frames4 ,it is strong1 easily handled1 and altogether more convenient for joining the parts of the models than ordinary strips of paper4 ,should the passe-partout paper be out of reach use new cotton cloth ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bah4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bai4 cut in even one-inch strips4 ,of course the cloth or paper must be white4 ,cut off a strip of your gummed paper a little longer than the long edge of the triangle4 ,with a pin at each end1 pin it to the table1 the gummed side up1 and draw a line lengthwise through the middle1 dividing it exactly in half4 ,have ready a glass of clear water and a paint brush1 dip the brush in the water1 and with it moisten one half of the paper4 ,over the wet half lay one of the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbj4 triangles so that its long edge almost touches the central line1 then gently press it until the paper holds fast to the card-board 7,fig4 #bai74 ,remove the pins and turn the triangle over to make sure the paper is quite smooth on the right side2 then lay it down again1 moisten the other half of the gummed surface and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bba4 press another triangle over that part1 keeping the edges of the two triangles perfectly parallel1 but not touching4 ,the space between the edges must be left to give room for the bending of the corners 7,fig4 #bbj74 ,pin a second strip of ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbb4 paper to the table1 moisten one half1 and press still another triangle in place2 continue doing this until all four sides of the pyramid are joined as in ,fig4 #bba2 then bring the last two edges together1 while holding it in your hand1 and press the moistened paper down1 smoothing out any wrinkles that may appear4 ,lastly1 trim off the ends of the paper at the bottom1 and stand your pyramid up1 holding it so that its base will form a perfect square 7,fig4 #bbb74 ,do not allow it to flatten and form a diamond4 ,the top edges of the paper should be trimmed off as the sides are put together4 ,there are six parts to ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbc4 ,the ,house1 two sides1 two ends1 and two halves of the roof4 ,draw these on your heavy card-board1 like ,fig4 #bbc1 the roof2 ,fig4 #bbd1 the side1 and ,fig4 #bbe1 the end1 making them according to the dimensions given on each diagram4 ,put the house together1 as you did the pyramid1 with the passe-partout paper4 ,when you have joined the sides and ends of the house and have fastened the two halves of the roof together1 paste strips of the passe-partout paper along the upper edges of the sides of the house1 as in ,fig4 #bbf4 ,these strips must be on the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbg4 inside1 and half of the paper must extend above the edges of the sides4 ,moisten this part and1 fitting the roof to the house1 put your hand inside and press the paper up against the roof2 this will hold it securely in place4 ,in fitting the roof on1 be sure it extends exactly the same distance over each end of the house 7,fig4 #bbg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcj4 ,the ,chimney is adjustable and is not fastened to the house4 ,make four sides2 two like ,fig4 #bbh1 two like ,fig4 #bbi4 ,the dimensions of each side are given on the diagrams4 ,in putting the chimney together1 paste your strips of paper only as far up as the dotted line at the top1 the part beyond this line is to be turned over as in ,fig4 #bcj1 which shows the completed chimney4 ,make ,the ,wings with slanting roofs like the ones shown in the illustration of the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bca4 church4 ,fig4 #bca is the highest side1 which goes next the house when the wing is added2 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcb4 ,fig4 #bcb is the lower side2 ,fig4 #bcc is for the two ends1 which are exactly alike1 and ,fig4 #bcd is the roof4 ,the dimensions are given on the diagrams4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bce4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcg4 ,the ,tower and ,steeple which transform the house into a church are shown in the illustration4 ,cut two sides for the tower like ,fig4 #bce1 and two like ,fig4 #bcf1 and put them together like ,fig4 #bcg4 ,the notches in the lower part of the tower and of the chimney allow them to sit astride the roof1 which position holds them in place without making them permanent4 ,fig4 #bch and ,fig4 #bci are for the cornice of the tower1 which is something like a box with a square opening at the bottom and a round hole at the top4 ,cut ,fig4 #bch according to the dimensions given and bend at the dotted lines1 first the lengthwise lines1 then the cross ones4 ,allow the laps with the trimmed corners to come on top of the others4 ,put the two end edges together with the gummed paper to form a square1 then with a drop of glue or paste at each corner fasten the laps in position1 as shown in ,fig4 #bdj4 ,in the centre of a perfect square1 made according to the dimensions on the diagram1 ,fig4 #bci1 cut a circular hole2 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bch4 paste strips of paper along the four edges of the square1 ,fig4 #bda1 bend down the free edges of the paper and paste the square on top of the cornice4 ,fig4 #bdj is the cornice with top down to show its construction4 ,cut the steeple from rather heavy drawing-paper1 like ,fig4 #bdb1 keeping to the dimensions on the diagram4 ,turn in the lower laps and paste the side lap over the corresponding edge to form a cone 7,fig4 #bdc74 ,drop a little glue on each of the lower laps1 place the cone directly over the circular hole in the top of the cornice1 and1 slipping your fingers through the hole1 press the laps down until they are firmly fixed4 ,fit the cornice on the tower1 but do not attempt to glue it1 for it will hold its place quite well without4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bci4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bda4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdc4 ,your own ingenuity will suggest other models to be made in this way2 any angular object is easily constructed1 and curved ones are not impossible4 ,illustration3 ,the ,tower and ,steeple which ,transform the ,house into a ,church4 ,,chapter ,,ix ,,quick ,,ink ,,pictures ,when you happen to drop ink on paper you may be using1 do not look disconsolate and feel uncomfortable4 ,make a joke of the accident by turning the blot into something funny4 ,fold the paper over the ink-spot1 press the two sides together2 then open the fold1 and you will find the dull1 round blot transformed into a queer1 comical-looking object the like of which was never seen on land or sea4 ,the strange thing about these oddities is that try as you may you cannot coax any two ink-drops to change themselves into the same shape2 they utterly refuse to do so4 ,experiment with them and you will soon realize that each has its own independent idea regarding the figure it will assume1 insisting1 when you press it1 upon taking the matter into its own hidden hands and turning into whatever it pleases4 ,the various results are generally decorative and might often be used with good effect for book-plates4 ,if ,you ,have a ,group of three or four ink-drops1 they may be controlled to a certain extent4 ,hold the paper so that the wet ink will trickle downward1 and you can join the blots together1 elongating the design2 then1 when the paper is folded lightly1 if you press the ink with short1 gentle strokes out sidewise the tiny splashes tend in that direction1 and an upward movement will cause the ink to spread upward--sometimes in little streaks1 again in a bulging way1 giving an uneven1 undulating boundary4 ,should the paper be folded across the ink the result would be a single figure1 while an allowance of an eighth or quarter of an inch space before creasing the paper gives two designs1 one a duplicate because a print of the other4 ,a similar method of making ink-impressions is to splash the fluid on the paper with a paint-brush and then to fold and press it2 or1 group drops of ink with the splash of a brush and press the two sides of the paper together4 ,illustration3 ,ink ,marine4 ,fig4 #bdd4 ,the ink-impressions may be made to take the form of ,landscapes and ,marines ,often very pretty effects can be produced in this simple manner4 ,fig4 #bdd is a suggestion showing a stretch of sky with mountains as a background and points of land jutting ,illustration3 ,ink ,marine4 ,fig4 #bde4 out into the sea for the middle distance1 while the foreground is entirely of water1 which reflects the distant purple hills4 ,the picture is readily made1 but the work must be rapid to insure success1 as delays cause the ink to dry in spots1 which ruin the design4 ,fold through the centre a piece of blank1 unruled paper from a large-sized writing pad2 open it and on the upper portion mark the sections according to diagram ,fig4 #bde4 ,the dotted line indicates the crease through the centre of the paper and gives the distance at which the first sections should be placed above the fold4 ,with a lead-pencil lightly trace the divisions3 have ready a bottle of ink1 a common water-color brush1 a glass of water and a clean dinner-plate4 ,dip the brush in the ink and dab it on the plate several times2 then do the same with the water1 mixing ink and water together4 ,try the strength of this mixture on a scrap of paper2 if it corresponds to the tone of the second point of land in ,fig4 #bdd 7or ,a in the diagram7 it is ready for use4 ,b and ,d 7,fig4 #bde7 require a degree lighter than ,a1 so mix more water than ink on a clean place in the plate4 ,c 7,fig4 #bde7 is the faintest mountain and needs the most water mixed with ink4 ,use ink as it comes from the bottle for ,e 7,fig4 #bde71 the nearest point of land1 as that is the darkest portion4 ,test the three tones and keep changing them1 adding more water as needed1 until you are satisfied that each one is of the required strength2 then wash the brush clean and be sure everything is ready for the work4 ,having once commenced1 you cannot stop an instant until the sketch is finished2 understand exactly what you intend to do and how you are to do it before beginning1 as there will be ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdh4 ,no ,time for ,deliberation1 and you must work as fast as possible4 ,dip the brush in the lightest tone of diluted ink1 have it well charged with the fluid1 and in swift strokes paint ,c4 ,without stopping1 take up the next lightest tone on the brush and sweep in ,b and ,d1 then the darker1 ,a1 and finish with ,e in pure ink4 ,fold the paper immediately1 and1 holding it down flat on the table with the left hand1 press with the right2 rub the paper all over again and again1 being sure to cover the entire surface in order to print the mountains on the lower portion of the paper4 ,the study will then be finished with the exception of the sailing-vessel1 which may be indicated with a few strokes4 ,bring the brush to a fine point and trace in ink the lines of ,fig4 #bdf4 ,first make the central vertical line1 then the slanting line on the right-hand side which joins the mast a short distance from the top1 from the same point extend two lines down on the left4 ,fig4 #bdg is the hull of the vessel1 and the straight line crossing it a short distance from the top denotes the narrow space to be left white4 ,fig4 #bdh shows the complete outline of the craft1 intentionally made as simple as possible1 to enable any girl to introduce the boat into the sketch without difficulty4 ,as is seen in ,fig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdi4 #bdd1 the boat is filled in with black and duplicates itself in the shadow reflected on the water1 but the shadow must be made with the brush2 it cannot be printed from the boat4 ,the chrysalis of the ,ink ,butterfly 7,fig4 #bdi7 was made of two or three ink-blots and a splash of ink from a paint-brush4 ,this chrysalis did ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bej4 not in the least resemble a real one1 but when the paper was folded along the edge of the ink a butterfly appeared4 ,on soft-finish paper write any word you choose2 then1 while the ink is wet1 fold the paper1 and upon opening it you will find ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bea4 ,an ,odd ,design ,figs4 #bej and #bea were made in this way2 both from written words which represent most desirable states of mind4 ,when you can gain ,fig4 #bej you will surely have ,fig4 #bea4 ,the ,fantastic ,horses 7,fig4 #beb7 gave no hint of what might be expected when they were first seen in the form of a group of shiny black spots1 and it was only after opening the folded paper that they revealed their true character as extravaganza animals with legs different in length and extraordinary eyes4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beb4 ,you can make creatures wilder in appearance than these1 and in this way form a collection of pictures of the animals you have never known4 ,fig4 #bec represents ,a ,pair of ,birds of a peculiar kind1 found nowhere but inside ink-bottles4 ,others may come from the same source1 but none will be precisely like these4 ,try the experiment of ink-drops on pieces of muslin2 work rapidly and you will be delighted with the results4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bec4 ,if you are fond of ,nature ,study and happen to have vines or any other kind of house plants1 you can make valuable ink sketches from them4 ,break off a few pieces of the main growth4 ,take one at a time1 and with the left hand hold the spray either in the bright sunlight or lamplight in such a way as to cast a distinct clean shadow upon the paper pad that is placed beneath it4 ,with a brush dipped into the ink1 paint over the shadow2 be careful to follow every turn and twist of leaf and stem1 that the sketch may be true in every detail4 ,you will find the work to be quick and easy and the results satisfactory4 ,in no other ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bed4 way can better characteristic growth of the various specimens be obtained4 ,notice carefully ,fig4 #bed1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bee4 and it will give a true idea of the plant2 and ,fig4 #bee1 how naturally and gracefully the vine turns in curving lines4 ,fig4 #bef gives sprigs from four different plants4 ,can you name them8 ,all the studies are decorative and furnish original designs for embroidery1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bef4 or wood-carving1 but1 best of all1 you can make and use this kind of ink-pictures as illustrations for the book in which you write down your notes on ,nature study1 and so be able1 after describing a plant1 to give an original1 realistic picture of it4 ,small specimens can be painted with ink1 root and all forming one picture1 but larger plants must be separated at the centres and a study made of each part1 the two halves being placed side by side on the same piece of paper4 ,,chapter ,x ,,moving ,,toys ,how would you like a merry-go-round with all the animals prancing one after another1 each with a girl or a boy on its back1 riding along regardless of the speed of the steed1 like the real ones you have tried in the parks and at the seashore8 ,the ,merry-go-round ,fig4 #beg1 is easily made1 the work consisting mostly of stringing different things on a hat-pin and sticking the pin through a box4 ,procure a long hat-pin 7,fig4 #beh71 a large1 empty spool 7,fig4 #bei71 three small corks 7,fig4 #bfj7 and1 for a foundation1 a round flat box if you can obtain or make it1 if not1 a common note-paper box must answer the purpose4 ,a piece of string about a yard long and two shank buttons will help out the simple machinery 7,fig4 #bei74 ,the canopy is of paper or card-board 7,fig4 #bfa7 and the support for the animals of card-board 7,fig4 #bfb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beh4 ,lay a piece of card-board flat and place over it an ordinary tea-plate2 hold the plate steady and draw a circle on the card-board by running the lead-pencil around the edge of the plate4 ,this will give a circle of about the desired size4 ,then draw bands across the circle1 as in ,fig4 #bfb2 to do this draw lines dividing the circle into quarters and at the left of each of the four lines draw a line a little more than half an inch away from it1 making four bands 7,fig4 #bfb74 ,cut out the circle1 then the four wedge-shaped pieces between the bands1 and bend up the end of each band five-eighths of an inch 7,fig4 #bfb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bei4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfj4 ,on these ends paste any stiff paper animals you may happen to have1 7,fig4 #bfc71 selecting those which will balance each other1 as the merry-go-round must revolve evenly4 ,colored scrap-book animals look well and are stiff enough to hold themselves firmly in place4 ,should you not happen to possess these1 animals from old pamphlets1 advertisements or newspapers may be used4 ,they should be stiffened by being pasted flat on thin card-board or stiff paper4 ,when fastening the animals on the merry-go-round paste the body of the animal to the turned-up end of the card-board band 7,fig4 #bfc74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfa4 ,in ,making the ,canopy use a small saucer or bowl as a guide to draw the circle on paper or card-board4 ,cut out the circle1 point it around the edge 7,fig4 #bfa71 turn the points down and the canopy is ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfb4 ready to go on the hat-pin4 ,if you do not have the correct-sized plate1 saucer1 or bowl1 the circles may be drawn with the aid of a home-made compass4 ,to make the compass1 take a pair of scissors and a piece of card-board 7,fig4 #bfd71 punch two holes about two inches apart in the card-board and through them pass the points of the scissors until they extend through on the other side an inch or a trifle more2 secured in this way the scissors make a very good compass4 ,adjust the scissors so that the distance between the two points is four inches1 then firmly ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfc4 stick the sharper point in a piece of cardboard and1 keeping that steady1 slowly move the other point around in a circle1 pressing it down only hard enough to scratch the surface 7,fig4 #bfd74 ,make the circle for the canopy in the same way1 but have the distance between the scissor points ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfd4 much less--not more than two and one-fourth inches--in order to preserve the correct proportions4 ,now watch the almost ,magical ,forming of the ,merry-go-round ,pass the long hat-pin 7,fig4 #beh7 through the exact centre of the canopy 7,fig4 #bfa7 then put on one of the corks 7,fig4 #bfj72 work this up tight to the canopy that it may hold the latter in place4 ,twist the cork around and around on the pin1 as it will be apt to go on crooked if the pin be forced carelessly through the cork4 ,string on another cork1 working it up the pin midway1 then slide on the bands1 with the animals attached1 pushing the pin through the exact centre of the pasteboard2 next put on the large spool4 ,the ,box ,must ,have ,some ,holes made in it before using2 puncture two one inch from the front edge and four inches apart in the lid2 then make two more holes through both lid and box on the front side half an inch from the top and five inches apart1 as seen in the illustration4 ,fig4 #beg4 ,stick the loaded pin through the centre of the box-lid1 bringing it well down1 and cover the extreme point of the pin with the last cork in order to prevent the pin from coming through and pricking4 ,this cork must lie firmly on the bottom of the inside of the box4 ,the merry-go-round is now ready for the machinery to set it in motion4 ,pass the string around the spool and cross the two ends in front 7,fig4 #bei7 keeping the ends crossed2 thread one of the ends through the two holes on its own side of the box1 bringing the end out from the front of the box1 do the same with the other end of the string as shown in the illustration4 ,to prevent the string from accidentally slipping back through the holes1 tie a shank button on each of the ends4 ,now1 holding the box with one hand1 gently ,pull ,one ,end of the ,string with the other hand and see the animals go dancing around1 just like the big wooden griffins1 zebras1 and giraffes on real carousels4 ,of course1 the merry-go-round needs boys and girls to ride the animals and enjoy the sport4 ,look them up in the advertisements of old magazines1 newspapers1 or wherever you can find paper young people4 ,cut them out neatly and let them take turns riding on the different animals4 ,when cutting out the legs of the paper children1 merely cut up a deep slit to divide the legs in order to make the riders cling firmly to the various animals4 ,the brighter the colors used in the merry-go-round the gayer and more attractive its appearance4 ,there is ,something ,very ,fascinating in the toy2 even grown people are interested and amused as they watch it whiz around with its burden of happy little paper children4 ,another lively game for paper children is the ,flag ,dance1 7,fig4 #bfe71 where each doll actually waves its own little paper flag as she dances to and fro4 ,make four small flags of different colored tissue-paper1 each #a inch wide and #c inches long1 which allows for fastening to the staff4 ,four little paper girls can be cut from ,fig4 #bff4 ,take four half-sheets of stiff1 unruled white writing-paper1 fold each lengthwise through the centre2 then trace ,fig4 #bff and cut it out of an extra piece of paper4 ,lay this half figure with its straight edge on the fold of one of the papers and with a lead-pencil draw a line around it4 ,cut out and open 7,fig4 #bfg74 ,make four dolls4 ,cut the flag-staff off the right hand of two and off the left hand of the other two1 that the hands on the outside of the group1 when the dolls ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfe4 are in place1 may hold the flags 7,fig4 #bfh74 ,draw or paint a face and dress on each of the little girls1 being sure to use the inside of the bend or fold for the front of the doll1 as this slight inclination to fold forward after the doll is cut out and straightened out flat is of great assistance in bracing the figure when it is in position4 ,cut a slit up between the feet1 but no further4 ,let the legs be of one piece1 to insure greater strength to the standing doll 7,fig4 #bfg74 ,fold the flag-staff lengthwise1 also the hand holding it1 and give to each of the paper children one of the home-made tissue-paper flags by pasting a flag on every flag-staff 7,fig4 #bfh74 ,when the dolls are ready1 obtain a very flexible1 slender1 cloth-covered1 long steel from a dress-waist or stays1 and tie a strong black thread from end to end1 making a stretch of nine or ten inches4 ,on the centre of this thread tie another about a yard long 7,fig4 #bfe71 and on the steel foundation fasten the four dolls4 ,they should stand erect1 one on each end1 and two midway between centre and ends4 ,fig4 #bfh shows the method of pasting the feet of the figures on the steel2 slide the steel up between the feet2 then bend them forward and glue one foot on each side of the steel1 flat against it4 ,fasten a flag1 about four and a half inches long1 on the end of a long1 strong hat-pin2 then stick the pin firmly in a small pastry-board and slip the steel with its pretty children over it1 resting the centre of the steel flat against the pin1 which is now a flag-pole 7,fig4 #bfe74 ,illustration ,illustration ,take hold of the loose end of the thread and step-back from the table on which the dolls are placed4 ,when a sufficient distance away to cause the thread to stretch out straight give it a number of gentle jerks in quick succession4 ,this will cause all the paper children to rush back and forth1 waving their bright flags in triumph4 ,they can enter more heartily into the play if there is music1 and it gives life to the 8flag dance40 ,ask your companion to strike up the 8,star-,spangled ,banner0 on a comb while you make the little paper children dance in time to the music1 which you can do by jerking the thread to the musical rhythm4 ,find three large-sized button-moulds and some burnt matches for your ,button-mould ,tops ,select round matches1 as they will fit the holes in the button-moulds4 ,place one mould flat down on a piece of orange-colored paper and draw a line on the paper around its edge4 ,cut out the circular paper and paste it on the flat side of the button-mould2 then pierce a hole through its surface1 exactly over the hole in the mould1 slide a match1 unburnt end first1 through the mould1 until it extends about one-third ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfh4 beyond the bottom of the mould4 ,if the match does not seem firm1 fasten it in place with a little mucilage4 ,when this top is finished1 make two more of the same size1 one covered with red and the other with green paper4 ,no string is necessary for spinning these tops2 merely give each one a twist with the thumb and second finger of the right hand and around it goes4 ,the ,game consists in spinning the three tops1 one immediately after the other1 the red top first1 then the orange one1 and last the green1 allowing them all to whirl around together and not disturbing them in any way until the last one to cease spinning falls4 ,the top which keeps up for the longest time scores the first point4 ,when the first round is finished set the tops twirling again1 commencing with the orange one and taking the red one last4 ,mark down the score of the winning top and give them all a third and last trial1 leading with the green top and bringing in the orange last4 ,the top which gains the greatest number of point wins the game4 ,should each top gain a point1 the game would be a 8tie10 and necessitate the playing of it all over again4 ,in case two friends would like to join in the sport1 the game may be changed4 ,let each1 with closed eyes1 select a top1 leaving one for the hostess4 ,at a given signal have all the tops spin at once4 ,the top which stands up longest wins the first point1 and the greatest number of points the game4 ,allow two rounds1 making six points to each three-handed game4 ,,chapter ,,xi ,,home-,,made ,,pyrotechnics ,if you would like some bright1 lively fireworks1 the kind you can manufacture at home1 make them the day before the celebration1 and there will be no necessity of waiting all the long hours until dark before seeing the sparks fly4 ,begin the fun early the next morning1 and fire off these queer fireworks the entire day4 ,the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bga4 ,three-story ,red1 ,white1 and ,blue ,pin-wheel is very satisfactory1 affording three times the enjoyment of a simple one-story affair4 ,fold a three-inch square of stiff red paper diagonally across from corner to corner1 making two folds1 which cross at the centre of the paper4 ,unfold and cut the square along the folds almost to the centre 7,fig4 #bfi72 then pierce the alternating corner flaps with a long1 stiff hat-pin1 allowing each point threaded on the pin to remain there2 run the pin through the centre of the paper 7,fig4 #bgj7 and shove the red pin-wheel up close to the large round head of the hat-pin4 ,push a small cork on also1 to prevent the pin-wheel from slipping4 ,work up another cork on the pin1 about an inch or so below the first one2 then make a larger pin-wheel of white paper and slide it on the same hat-pin1 holding it in place with a third cork4 ,cut the last pin-wheel still larger and make it of blue paper4 ,shove up a fourth cork on the pin1 and below1 against it1 thread on the blue pin-wheel4 ,no cork will be required under the last pin-wheel2 the hat-pin being now pushed firmly into the end of a stick1 the blue pin-wheel cannot slide out of place 7,fig4 #bga74 ,when ready1 run with the toy1 or whirl rapidly around1 holding it in your hand1 and see how beautifully the three parts spin1 the whole appearing like a whirling red1 white1 and blue pyramid4 ,another ,pin-wheel in ,your ,hands has a button as a foundation4 ,take a large cup and trace two circles on yellow paper measuring three and a half inches in diameter2 make two smaller circles of red paper1 two still smaller of green paper1 two others--decreasing in size--of yellow paper1 and the two smallest circles of blue paper 7,fig4 #bgb74 ,separate the disks into two groups exactly ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgc4 alike2 then fasten each of the two sets of disks together by placing one over another2 they will form two vari-colored disks1 each a duplication of the other4 ,select a large button and place it between two vari-colored disks4 ,be sure to have it in the centre2 then with a large pin or needle punch two holes through the disks1 covering the corresponding opposite holes in the button4 ,thread a string through the two holes and tie the ends together 7,fig4 #bgc72 join the edges of the two disks and the pin-wheel will be ready for action4 ,place the first two fingers of the right hand in one loop1 and of the left hand in the other2 give the string a twirl and pull the hands apart4 ,the motion causes the string to twist1 allowing the hands to come nearer together2 another outward motion of the hands and the pin-wheel will revolve rapidly in another direction4 ,by alternately bringing the hands together and pulling them apart1 the pin-wheel can be kept spinning as long as you like4 ,in making the pin-wheel1 the paper may be either pasted or sewed2 it is firmer when pasted4 ,pin-wheels on the ,fence are fiery1 sparkling1 and larger than the hand pin-wheels ,find a large-sized empty spool 7,fig4 #bgd7 for a foundation2 then cut a circular pasteboard disk four inches in diameter for the back of the pin-wheel 7,fig4 #bge74 ,make blue fire of strips of fringed-out bright-blue paper 7,fig4 #bgf7 and paste them across each other on the disk 7,fig4 #bgg74 ,cut a square ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bge4 of yellow paper fringed around the edges for the yellow fire and fasten it over the blue fire4 ,make red fire of a circle of fringed red paper 7,fig4 #bgh7 a trifle smaller than the yellow1 that the yellow fire may be seen surrounding the red and the blue stand out beyond the yellow4 ,each succeeding layer of fire must be smaller1 though not necessarily of the same shape as the last4 ,the uneven1 straggling ends add to the effect when the pin-wheel is in motion4 ,let the last two ,illustration3 #age papers be white and green and on the top fasten irregular lengths of the thread-like tinsel left from your ,christmas-tree decorations4 ,do not bunch it too much2 have the tinsel string out ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgh4 long in various directions1 so it will look like dropping flying sparks when you fire off the pin-wheel4 ,if you have no tinsel1 finely cut stands of gold-paper may take its place4 ,paste the back of the pin-wheel securely on one end of the empty spool4 ,when finished it should resemble ,fig4 #bgi4 ,select a strong wire nail and push it through a small disk of inked pasteboard 7,fig4 #bhj72 bring the pasteboard up close to the head of the nail1 then pierce the pin-wheel in the centre and run the nail through both wheel and spool4 ,the little black card-board prevents ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgi4 the pin-wheel from slipping off the nail4 ,after the paste or glue has dried1 hammer the nail which is in the pin-wheel upon the fence and set the firework off by means of a strong string placed over the spool with the ends crossed 7,fig4 #bha74 ,by holding the two ends of the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bha4 string1 one in each hand1 and rapidly pulling first one1 then the other1 the pin-wheel will revolve so fast that it might be mistaken for one of actual fire1 but unlike the real one there is no likelihood of the paper wheel turning black and falling to the ground4 ,yours will spin as long and as often as you like1 losing none of its brilliancy 7,fig4 #bhb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhb4 ,the ,sparkling ,calumet is fascinating4 ,its bright sparks fly up and out in every direction all over your head1 hair1 and clothing1 but they do ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhc4 no harm4 ,take a strip of stiff paper three and a half inches wide and eleven inches long2 cut a hole in one end 7,fig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhd4 #bhc7 and paste the two lengthwise edges together1 forming a hollow tube2 then pin up the open end nearest the hole 7,fig4 #bhd74 ,cut ,fig4 #bhe1 making it about four inches across at the widest ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhh4 point2 slash the lower edge and pin this pipe-bowl in funnel shape by bringing ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhf4 the two sides together 7,fig4 #bhf72 fasten it on the tube over the hole in the top by gluing the flaps down on the pipe-stem 7,fig4 #bhg74 ,half-fill the pipe-bowl with brilliantly colored bits of paper1 including ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhg4 scraps of gold and silver tinsel cut very small4 ,in this way pieces too little for anything else can be utilized4 ,make a good supply so that you may fire off the calumet many times4 ,place the open end of the tube to your lips and blow 7,fig4 #bhh74 ,it will not take more than five minutes to make the ,roman ,candle ,cut a piece of paper about ten inches long and seven inches wide1 roll it up and slip a small elastic over the roll ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhi4 to hold the ,roman candle in shape2 carefully fold in one end of the roll 7,fig4 #bhi72 then collect all of the scraps of bright-colored paper ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bij4 and bits of tinsel for sparks 7,fig4 #bij74 ,when the sparks are ready load the candle by filling it with them4 ,hold the candle in one hand and gayly swing it around like a real ,roman candle4 ,in what a dazzling circle the bright paper sparks fly6 ,no matter if they do scatter all around1 they may be gathered up and used again4 ,if you can find a side-steel taken from a dress-stay1 use it for a ,snap-fire ,bend the ends together ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bia4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bib4 until it breaks at the centre 7,fig4 #bia74 ,on the broken end of one piece paste two gay tissue-paper streamers 7,fig4 #bib74 ,to fire it1 hold the firework in an upright position1 streamers downward1 the papered end between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bic4 the upper end held with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand4 ,bend the snap-fire as in ,fig4 #bic4 ,let go suddenly with the right hand1 then an instant later with the left1 and see the firework spring up high in the air1 carrying its gay trimmings with it4 ,just wait until you make the ,rushing ,comet and send it flying through the air1 with its long tail sweeping ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bid4 out behind4 ,how heartily you will laugh when it strikes its round head against some object which drives it flying backward4 ,a rubber ball about three inches in diameter will make a good comet's head 7,fig4 #bid74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bie4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bif4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #big4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bih4 ,cut two strips of bright red tissue-paper1 each four inches wide1 the entire length of the sheet1 and paste the two pieces together1 forming a long paper ribbon 7,fig4 #bie72 fold this once near the centre 7,fig4 #bif72 fold again1 bringing the lower folded end up to the first end 7,fig4 #big71 then cut the paper in a fringe1 making the strands half an inch wide2 begin at the folded end and cut through all the layers up to the single layer of paper 7,fig4 #bih74 ,unfold and you will have ,fig4 #bii4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bii4 ,fasten this tail on the ball with strong paste 7,fig4 #cjj74 ,in the same manner cut another long fringe of bright-blue tissue-paper2 fasten it on the ball partly beyond and partly ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjj4 overlapping the red paper4 ,make a third fringe of orange-colored tissue-paper1 and glue that also on the comet's head4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cja4 ,gather up the tail carefully so it will not tangle and set the ball aside until it is perfectly dry2 then run out in the sunshine with the comet in your arms and throw it up as far as you can toward the blue sky4 ,the comet will look gorgeous sailing through the air4 ,when it comes down1 take the ball up again and throw it as far in front of you as possible4 ,away it will speed with a flutter and a dash1 a long1 brilliant streak of color 7,fig4 #cja74 ,the tail of the comet can be made longer by using three instead of two lengths of the paper4 ,now we will make ,the ,pistol of any firm1 strong1 hollow cylinder4 ,a slender pasteboard mailing tube1 or a stick of bamboo1 or a section of some shrub from which you can push the pith1 leaving a hollow case1 will answer the purpose4 ,have the hollow stick about eight inches long1 and for a ramrod cut a smooth1 round stick an inch or two longer4 ,be sure that the ramrod slides easily through the tube while fitting snugly4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjb4 ,fig4 #cjb shows the ramrod in the pistol4 ,get a large raw potato and cut off several thick slices to use for bullets4 ,punch a slice with one end of the pistol1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjc4 then with the other1 leaving the potato bullets in it exactly as they came from the slice4 ,when you are ready to fire1 place the ramrod against the bullet in one end of the pistol and suddenly push the ramrod with force through the tube1 sending the first bullet flying1 and as it leaves the pistol a loud report will follow4 ,fig4 #cjc shows the potato slice and the bullets which have been used4 ,should you be able to find corks which exactly fit the pistol you could use them instead of potato4 ,fasten each cork to the end of a string and tie the string firmly around the centre of ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cje4 the pistol4 ,remember that the success of the pistol depends upon keeping the air bottled up tight in the tube by having the bullets fit tight4 ,if the air is allowed to escape1 no report will be heard2 the bullets will not pop4 ,but never fear2 you will be able to make the pistol2 have confidence1 patience1 and care1 and your work will turn out well4 ,sky-rockets are one of the best kind of fireworks and furnish lots of fun4 ,we will make some and send them flying through the air4 ,cut strips of paper eighteen inches long and two inches wide1 fringing them seven inches on one side 7,fig4 #cjd74 ,commence at the unfringed end1 ,b1 and roll them like lamplighters 7,fig4 #cje71 folding each over at top end to keep it in place 7,fig4 #cjf1 ,c74 ,these are the sky-rockets1 and are best made of stiff1 bright-colored paper1 but may be of any kind except very limber paper4 ,make a number of sky-rockets and 8fire them off0 by the aid of a large1 empty spool with a piece of elastic adjusted loosely over one end1 but tied securely 7,fig4 #cjg74 ,place one sky-rocket at a time through the hole in the spool1 fringed end out1 and1 grasping the tip end in the elastic 7,fig4 #cjh71 pull the sky-rocket toward ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjf4 you and let it fly back as you would send an arrow from a bow4 ,there is another paper sky-rocket which rivals a real one in brilliancy1 and is much easier to fire4 ,make the rocket of a hollow stick--a bamboo handle from a ,japanese fan or parasol1 or an old dried sunflower stalk will do--and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjg4 cut the stick about seven inches long4 ,near one end tie on firmly a stout rubber band 7,fig4 #cji74 ,the stick of the sky-rocket should be strong and slender and about twelve inches in length4 ,have it small enough in diameter to slide easily through the sunflower stalk4 ,fasten many gay-colored streamers of tissue-paper on one end1 making them fully a yard in length4 ,when all is ready1 place the stick with streamers uppermost in the tube1 draw back the rubber band with the stick 7,fig4 #caj71 and fire 7,fig4 #caa74 ,the sky-rocket goes swiftly through the air1 carrying a stream of paper fire in its wake4 ,as with the real fireworks you must be careful not to aim any of these in a direction where they will strike anyone4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cji4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caa4 ,,chapter ,,xii ,,monotypes ,they are charming1 these monotypes2 charming in effect when finished1 delightful in their accidental results1 and wholly fascinating in the method1 or lack of method1 used in their production4 ,painted with a bristle brush1 a camel's-hair brush1 a sponge1 a rag or your thumb1 as the case may require2 painted on glass and then printed on paper1 with a clothes-wringer for a printing-press2 can anything be more enchantingly unconventional8 ,yet the finished monotypes are truly artistic and beautiful4 ,if you can paint at all1 be it ever so little1 you can make some kind of a monotype1 and you will always have the feeling that you can do better next time4 ,the ,materials for your work are a piece of glass about six inches square1 a tube of lamp-black oil-paint1 some sewing-machine oil1 and a pad of unruled writing-paper4 ,see that your glass is perfectly clean and free from dust1 squeeze out some of the black paint in a saucer and mix it with a few drops of the machine oil4 ,you will soon learn the consistency required1 for if you make the paint too thin it will run and blot1 and if there is not enough oil it will go on too thickly and smudge in printing4 ,the ,painting ,choose a photograph or print for your copy which is simple in effect--that is1 one which shows a good deal of sky and broad stretches of light and shade4 ,it may be either landscape or marine1 but1 until you have had some experience with the work1 avoid figure pieces1 and architecture4 ,when you have learned the process be as original as you like1 but keep to your copy at first2 you will never make an exact reproduction4 ,use whatever kind of a paint-brush seems best fitted1 and work rapidly that the paint may not dry4 ,a fine soft sponge will give excellent foliage effects2 this should be dipped in the paint and simply dabbed on the glass4 ,a clean cotton rag will take off extra paint and is especially useful where water is represented in the picture4 ,by dragging the rag or sponge over a surface too thickly painted you can loosen it and give the appearance of grass and shrubbery1 or of a roadway4 ,soft clouds can be made by putting the cloth over the end of your finger and rubbing on the glass with a circular movement1 using but little paint2 for an ordinary sky make horizontal strokes with the rag1 keeping the tint as flat as possible4 ,if you place a piece of white paper under the glass the work will be easier1 for you will appear to be painting on a white surface and the transparency of the glass will not trouble you4 ,illustration3 ,soft ,clouds4 ,can be made with a cloth on the end of your finger4 ,illustration3 ,foliage ,effect4 ,made with a sponge4 ,illustration3 ,the ,distant ,city4 ,printed on ,unruled ,writing-paper4 ,if you have ever painted ,heads1 sooner or later you will long to try one with this process4 ,a woman's head with flowing1 wind-blown hair seems especially adapted to the work4 ,a bristle brush and the ever-useful rag will spin the hair out1 and toss it about in decorative masses4 ,for the face you will need a small pad made of soft silk1 or muslin1 and raw cotton--indeed1 several pads will be found useful4 ,cut the silk into a four-inch square1 place in the centre a wad of raw cotton about the size of a hickory nut1 and1 drawing the silk smoothly over the cotton at the bottom1 bring it together at the top2 wrap with thread close to the cotton and tie securely4 ,draw the outlines of the face lightly with a fine camel's-hair brush1 and lay in the shadows broadly with a large brush2 then take your pad and go over the shadows1 stippling them with little dabs until they are smooth and free from brush strokes4 ,when it is necessary to deepen a shadow add more paint with the pad4 ,do not put in the features with hard lines1 let the face be modelled with light and shade1 making deeper accents where more sharpness is required4 ,the definite strokes about the eyes1 the nostrils1 and the line between the lips can be made with a brush without hardness4 ,hard lines never look well in a monotype2 they stand out harshly from the general softness of the effect1 and appear unpleasantly out of place4 ,the ,printing ,when your painting is finished1 slightly dampen a piece of paper by passing a wet sponge across one side1 lay the dampened side carefully on the glass next to the paint1 and then pass both through the clothes-wringer4 ,remember to hold the glass as it comes through that it may not fall and break4 ,lift your paper off lightly and quickly1 without dragging1 and you have the completed monotype1 like1 and yet unlike1 the picture you painted4 ,in the first place1 the design is reversed1 and then there are often beautiful effects which your brush could never have produced4 ,if the painting on the glass still holds1 try another print1 and even a third2 the first are not always the best4 ,illustration3 ,the ,turbulent ,sea4 ,printed on ,imported ,blotting-paper4 ,illustration3 ,study of a ,head4 ,printed on ,imported ,blotting-paper4 ,illustration3 ,study of a ,head4 ,printed on ,imported ,blotting-paper4 ,when no more impressions can be taken1 wipe the paint from the glass with a cloth and begin another picture4 ,monotone ,monotypes ,a very pretty experiment is to use color instead of black and make a monotone of your monotype4 ,sepia will give the picture in soft brown1 ,indian red in bright red1 while ,antwerp blue produces the tone of blue found in a blueprint photograph4 ,of course oil colors alone must be used1 water colors will not print4 ,another ,field for ,experiment lies in using several colors in one picture4 ,for instance1 you might make your mountains blue1 your trees green1 and your foreground red and yellow4 ,then again mixing the colors and using them as if painting on canvas will prove interesting4 ,the deepest pleasure in all work of this kind is to experiment and discover methods for ourselves1 then to work out and perfect these methods and make them all our own4 ,there are various ,papers suitable for monotype painting4 ,rice-paper is especially pleasing2 it is soft of texture1 light of weight1 and has a warm1 creamy tone4 ,the monotypes printed upon it are delicate1 clear1 and distinct4 ,imported blotting-paper also produces satisfactory results1 though the print is not quite as soft in effect2 it has a smooth1 rather hard surface1 but takes the paint well4 ,both of these papers are used dry4 ,some professionals use a ,japan paper and a ,holland paper4 ,the ,japan paper is very thin1 and the ,holland paper has a surface like water-color paper1 but is heavier than the ordinary kind4 ,for first efforts the unruled1 ten-cent writing pad is the best4 ,very good prints can be made on this1 and one feels free to experiment as much as heart desires with such inexpensive material4 ,the monotypes given here were painted on writing-paper and imported blotting-paper4 ,illustration3 ,early ,spring4 ,printed on ,unruled ,writing-paper4 ,illustration3 ,florida ,coast4 ,printed on ,imported ,blotting-paper4 ,,chapter ,,xiii ,,priscilla ,,rugs ,as there is no limit to the beautiful effects which may be produced by the well-chosen color combination in the ,priscilla rag rugs1 and anyone who has an eye for color 7which1 by the way1 may be cultivated7 is sure of success4 ,there are many new inventions in hand-looms1 yet the old cumbersome loom of our grandmother's day is still to be found in the outlying districts of most towns and cities1 and the weaving done on this is fully as satisfactory as that on the new looms4 ,almost every village has its rag-carpet weaver1 and on his old-fashioned machine can be woven all that we want in this line4 ,first1 there are the all-wool rugs for general use in the house1 then mixed wool and cotton rugs for the piazza1 all cotton for bedroom and bathroom1 mixed cotton and silk and entire silk for portires and couch-covers1 and for covers for sofa-pillows4 ,there are also rugs of heavy cotton1 such as denim in its dull reds1 blues1 yellows1 greens1 and browns4 ,the size of a rug for general use is usually one yard wide by two yards long1 the yard width being the limit of the ordinary loom4 ,smaller rugs are woven in different proportions3 a runner for the hall is three-quarters of a yard wide and of any required length1 and door-mats half a yard wide by one yard long4 ,squares for the centre of the room can be made by having two breadths woven exactly alike and then sewing them together4 ,you who possess a loom of even the clumsiest design have a field open before you full of interest1 for freedom to experiment in pattern and manner of weaving will lead to continually new results and there will be increasing originality and beauty in your productions4 ,color ,schemes for ,rugs ,collect all your available material1 plan your combination of colors1 and then decide whether it will be necessary to put some of the rags into the dye-pot4 ,if you have a handsome vase in your room it is a pretty idea to take that for your keynote and reproduce its color in your rugs4 ,solid colors are the best unless you wish to have part of your rug what is called 8hit or miss40 ,for 8hit or miss0 any short pieces may be used and sewed together indiscriminately2 then again1 if you have a good deal of checked1 plaid1 or mingled material1 it may be used by itself for centre or border4 ,it is upon the solid colors1 however1 that you must principally rely1 as there is less of the element of chance in their use1 and your calculation as to the result of your color combination will be surer4 ,illustration3 ,making a ,priscilla ,rug4 ,a favorite design is a 8hit or miss10 or a solid-colored centre with striped ends4 ,a more unconventional effect is produced by making the rug in stripes of unequal width and in daring color combinations2 some of these latter are startlingly barbaric and artistic in appearance and are well adapted to studio use4 ,again1 more harmonious effects are produced by using various tints and shades of one color4 ,very narrow stripes of black and of white often separate wide stripes of different colors1 sometimes singly1 sometimes together1 and when used with discretion they give a certain decision and finish to the whole4 ,you will naturally want to exercise your own taste and originality in designing your rugs1 so a description of one all-wool rug will be amply sufficient as a guide4 ,this rug is one yard wide by two yards long4 ,the centre is exactly one yard square and is of solid dark cardinal red4 ,the two ends are precisely the same and the stripes of the border follow each other in this order3 ,next the centre comes a very narrow stripe of old gold1 then one of the same width of white4 ,these are made by putting the strips of color only once through the loom1 or once across4 ,after these comes a five-inch stripe of old blue1 again the narrow yellow and white stripes followed by a two-inch stripe of moss green1 a three-inch stripe of dull light blue1 a five-inch stripe of light brown1 a two-inch stripe of old blue1 and next the fringe a one-inch stripe of dark cardinal red4 ,the fringe is simply the warp allowed to extend beyond the rug about a quarter of a yard at each end4 ,gray is a useful color in all-wool rugs and makes an effective centre for a bright-colored border4 ,the ,fire ,rug is a beautiful blending of reds and yellows giving a flame color4 ,the ends are dark red1 and1 by degrees1 the red runs into orange1 which1 in turn1 melts into dark yellow1 growing gradually lighter until the centre of the rug is a pale1 soft yellow4 ,illustration3 ,tack on a ,piece of ,paper ,samples of the ,rags ,used4 ,pale tones of yellows and greens are sometimes combined1 also yellows and browns4 ,before taking your rug to the loom tack on a piece of paper samples of the rags used in the order in which you wish them woven1 and write opposite each sample the width the stripe is to be made1 as shown in diagram4 ,give this to the weaver that no mistakes may be made by him in the placing of the colors4 ,the ,weight ,to calculate how much you will need of each color1 remember that it requires about two pounds of woollen rags to the yard2 therefore1 if you want half a yard of one color1 one pound will be required2 for a quarter of a yard1 one-half pound4 ,do not make your calculations too closely1 with a little over-weight in each case no harm is done and it is better than falling short of the required amount4 ,the narrow1 or once-across1 stripes require an inch or two over the yard for each stripe4 ,how to ,cut and ,sew the ,rags ,illustration3 ,sew the pieces together in this way4 ,cut your rags in strips one-half an inch wide unless the material is very thin or loosely woven1 in which case make them wider2 very heavy cloth should be even narrower than the half-inch4 ,cotton rags should be one inch wide4 ,as the rags are pinched together when woven it is the thickness that counts1 and the object is to keep them of an even bulk so that the rug may not have an uneven1 lumpy surface4 ,perhaps you will be told by the weaver not to sew your rags too securely1 for they cannot be jerked apart readily when it is necessary to break off one color to begin weaving the next2 but do not act on such advice4 ,you must sew the strips together with care so that the ends may not stand out and give a ragged look to the finished rug4 ,the accompanying diagram shows the best manner of joining the pieces4 ,you see that one piece is laid over the end of the other1 then both are folded lengthwise and sewed securely in the fold4 ,this gives smooth joints and an even surface4 ,wind your different colors into balls1 having1 as a rule1 one pound in each1 and put them in a bag to send to the loom4 ,cotton and ,wool ,rugs ,for piazza rugs1 or for summer cottage use1 cotton may be mixed with the wool2 indeed1 some hold that it is unnecessary to have all-wool for any purpose1 though the writer thinks differently4 ,the temptation is great1 however1 to use the pretty bits of gingham and lawn left from summer gowns1 and they do give a certain1 if not lasting1 brilliancy to the rug4 ,that much of the cotton is apt to fade and grow shiny with use is of little consequence when the rugs are not subjected to hard and constant use4 ,rugs of this class should be as bright and gay as possible2 the combination of even the crudest colors looks well on a vine-shaded piazza and in the gayly decked summer cottage4 ,all-cotton ,rugs ,for bedroom and bathroom all-cotton rugs are exceedingly pretty and appropriate1 and when they are made of fast-colored material they may be washed with ease and kept always fresh and clean4 ,illustration3 ,the ,centre may have ,dashes of ,color through it4 ,white should predominate in these washable rugs1 and the best as well as the simplest effect is produced by combining it with but one other color4 ,indigo blue and turkey red are safe and useful colors2 brown and green gingham also look well with the white4 ,of cotton rags allow one and one-half pounds to the yard4 ,when you are in doubt as to the permanency of your colors soak the rug1 before washing1 in a strong solution of salt and water2 this will 8set0 almost any color4 ,these cotton rugs may be woven in alternate strips of color and white1 or the white be used for the centre and the colors for the border1 or the centre may have dashes of color through it as shown in diagram4 ,illustration3 ,in ,stripes of ,unequal ,width4 ,bathroom rugs can be entirely of white or1 towel-fashion1 have a narrow colored strip at each end4 ,any white cotton may be used in these bathroom rugs1 old being better for this purpose than new1 as it is much softer4 ,warps and ,fringe ,gray linen is undoubtedly the best-wearing warp and harmonizes with all colors1 therefore for all-wool rugs it is the best4 ,it gives1 of course1 a gray fringe1 but that is not undesirable4 ,when a colored fringe is wanted the cotton warp will have to be used4 ,this comes in red1 blue1 purple1 yellow1 and white4 ,use cotton warp for cotton rugs1 and where the filling is largely white the warp should be white also4 ,when red warp is used with white filling a pink tone is the result1 while blue and purple with white filling produce a gray effect4 ,at each end of the rug the warp should be woven with self-filling to the depth of one inch4 ,this makes a heading for the fringe and prevents the rag filling from ravelling4 ,it is1 in fact1 a selvage4 ,you may knot the fringe1 using six strands to a knot1 or plat it and then knot as in diagram1 or it may be stitched at the top and left to flow freely4 ,dyeing the ,cloth ,those who make a business of manufacturing rag rugs scorn to use the dyes that come ready prepared and think it well worth the extra trouble to make their dyes themselves4 ,so it is1 perhaps1 when one has plenty of time to devote to the work1 but a girl's life is so full of interests and occupation she generally chooses quick methods1 though the results may not always be as lasting4 ,illustration3 ,you may ,knot the ,fringe or ,plat it and ,knot it4 ,in case your heart yearns toward the old-fashioned process and you want to go into the work thoroughly1 read the recipes given here and follow them carefully4 ,they are taken from an old manuscript recipe-book1 yellow with age and worn by use1 which has descended to the writer from an ancestress famous for her good housekeeping and housewifely arts4 ,the dye appears to have been prepared in large quantities1 usually enough for sixteen pounds of wool1 but you can easily regulate the proportion of the ingredients and make as much or as little as you want4 ,wool ,dyes ,navy ,blue4--,boil in a sufficient quantity of water twelve ounces of copperas1 three ounces of alum1 one and one-half ounces of verdigris1 one and one-half ounces of cream-tartar4 ,run,a your cloth in it for four hours1 then air4 ,empty out that liquor and fill up with clear water2 add four and one-half pounds of logwood1 boil it for one hour and a half1 then add six ounces of madder and boil for half an hour1 then run your cloth for half an hour4 ,air it 7the cloth71 then add six ounces of blue vitriol and three ounces of pearl-ash4 ,mix it well and run your cloth in it for twenty minutes1 then air and rinse it4 ,footnote ,a3 ,to 8run0 means to leave the cloth in the dye1 moving and stirring it about occasionally that the dye may be evenly distributed4 ,silver ,gray4--,on one pound of woollen3 ,take two ounces of sumac and three ounces of logwood and boil for one hour in four gallons of water1 then add one-half ounce of cream-tartar4 ,put in your woollen for one hour1 then take out and air4 ,refresh your dye with water and add one-half ounce of copperas1 bring it to a boil and run your woollen for half an hour1 then air1 rinse1 and dry it4 ,yellow4--,on woollen for one pound3 ,dissolve in four gallons of boiling water three ounces of alum and one ounce of cream-tartar1 then run your cloth for one hour and a half at boiling heat4 ,take out1 cool1 and rinse1 then boil one pound of fustic chips for five hours1 run your cloth1 while boiling1 for one hour1 then cool1 rinse1 and dry it4 ,madder ,red4--,on one pound of woollen3 ,boil five gallons of water in a kettle1 add three ounces of powdered alum and one ounce of cream-tartar1 then run your woollen in it for two hours1 rinse and air it4 ,put five gallons of fresh water in a kettle1 add eight ounces of madder1 mix it well and bring it to the boil1 then run your woollen for one hour1 but it must boil only five minutes4 ,take it out1 air and rinse it4 ,add to the dye one-half pint of clear lime-water1 then run your woollen for ten minutes1 then take it out and rinse it immediately4 ,cotton ,dyes ,brown4--,on cotton for five pounds3 ,bring eight gallons of water to the boil and add four ounces of pearl-ash1 dip your yarn 7or cloth7 for half an hour and then wring out4 ,take twenty gallons of water and one bushel of maple or white-oak bark1 boil it two hours1 then take out the bark and strain the liquor and add one pound of copperas2 stir it until it is dissolved and let your liquor cool to lukewarm4 ,dip your yarn for five minutes1 wring and air it2 dip again for fifteen minutes1 wring and dip again until you have it dark enough4 ,purple4--8,on cotton for two pounds3 ,boil four ounces of sumac in four gallons of water1 then dip your yarn for half an hour2 wring1 air1 and put it in again over night1 then take out and wring4 ,boil in seven gallons of water one pound four ounces of logwood for one hour2 take three gallons of the logwood liquor and dip your yarn in it for twenty minutes1 then add three quarts of the logwood liquor and dip for twenty minutes1 then put in the remainder and dip for twenty minutes1 then wring out and dry your yarn40 ,the wringing process given in the last two recipes is for cotton yarn2 cotton cloth or woollen cloth should never be wrung out2 simply lift it from the dye with two sticks1 immerse it in clear cold water1 if you are to rinse it1 then hang it up and let it drip4 ,all material must be perfectly clean and thoroughly soaked before being put in the dye4 ,note4--8,in boiling1 all drugs and barks that will not dissolve ought to be put in a thin1 coarse bag and taken out before you dip1 and the liquor should be settled4 ,dip only in clear liquor40 ,,chapter ,,xiv ,a ,,peanut ,,noah',s ,,ark ,changing one thing into another is always interesting1 and the most charming part of a ,peanut ,noah's ,ark is that you can transform these ground-nuts into any and every kind of wild creature4 ,at your command they will come trooping from all parts of the tangled jungle1 the elephants leading and tigers1 lions1 bears1 wolves1 kangaroos1 giraffes1 and others following4 ,ever so many insects1 too-the curious peanut spider1 actually as large as one of those mammoth ,southern tarantulas which often travel ,north on bunches of bananas1 and the enormous hard-shelled hornet1 whose sting will not hurt half as badly as its smaller cousins who are alive and whose nests are large and round1 dark gray in color and appear as if made of paper4 ,in addition to these you can have beetles of different kinds1 grasshoppers1 and various sorts of moths4 ,with the help of bits of paper and some wooden toothpicks the ground-nuts may be transformed into ,denizens of ,earth1 ,air1 and ,water4 ,first we will catch the terrible hornet1 but to get him you must select a peanut as near like ,fig4 #cab as you can find4 ,this is for the thorax or chest2 choose a longer nut1 resembling ,fig4 #cac1 for the abdomen or body4 ,take six common wooden toothpicks for the legs 7,fig4 #cad71 and bend each stick until it fractures near the centre without breaking 7,fig4 #cae74 ,for the waist use a short piece of toothpick 7,fig4 #caf74 ,for the sting take a pin 7,fig4 #cag74 ,to insert the sting in the body make a small hole on the lower side and thrust in the pin so that the point will project from the tail2 push the head of the pin into the nut until it is out of sight1 as shown by dotted lines in ,fig4 #cag1 #b;,a4 ,this diagram gives the point of the pin as it stands out from the nut4 ,join the chest and body by thrusting one end of ,fig4 #caf into ,fig4 #cab and the other end into ,fig4 #cac1 leaving a small length of ,fig4 #caf exposed to represent the slender waist of the hornet1 as shown in ,fig4 #cah4 ,this done1 put three legs on each side of the insect by forcing the toothpicks into the thorax or chest peanut 7,fig4 #cah74 ,illustration3 ,,details ,,of ,,the ,,terrible 8,,pea-,,nut0-,,hornet ,fig4 #cab-cbb4 ,now we have a huge ant1 and as ants are practically wingless hornets1 some of them even having stings like the bee tribe1 it is only necessary to add a pair of wings to complete the terrible peanut hornet4 ,if you have any tracing-paper or the waxed paper from a candy-box1 the semi-transparent material will form wonderfully natural wings2 but any kind of paper will make ,a ,pair of ,good ,wings4 ,with a pencil draw the pattern 7,fig4 #cai7 upon a bit of paper1 fold at the dotted line and you will have ,fig4 #cbj4 ,with the scissors cut around the outline through both leaves of the folded paper2 the result will be ,fig4 #cba1 the two wings joined together4 ,paste them on the back of the thorax1 and you will have ,fig4 #cbb4 ,to make it look still more lifelike1 ink stripes across its back and head1 and stick in the front of the head two fine1 small black pins for the antenn4 ,to prove that this is a live hornet1 let anyone who doubts the fact press the end of his finger on the point of the sting and he will be satisfied4 ,should he still claim that the thing is not alive1 dip your finger in a glass of water and allow a drop of the fluid to fall on each joint of the legs where the wood is fractured2 the swelling of the wet wood will cause the legs to move in a manner sufficiently lifelike to satisfy the most critical4 ,it is not commonly known that ,spiders ,are ,good to ,eat1 but the newly discovered specimen known as the ,peanuticus spiderencus is one which the most dainty little girl may eat without feeling at all nervous as to consequences4 ,spiders differ in many respects from true insects1 but we need only observe the most obvious points of divergence4 ,fig4 #cbc4 ,fig4 #cbd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbe4 ,first1 they have no waist2 that is1 their body is jammed upon their thorax 7,fig4 #cbc74 ,next1 their heads are driven into their shoulders1 so to speak1 so that they not only have no neck1 but there is not even a line to indicate where the head ends and the thorax or chest begins4 ,from the quart of peanuts select one which looks most like ,fig4 #cbc4 ,spiders have more legs than beetles or wasps4 ,garden spiders have eight well-defined legs1 and our ,peanuticus belongs to the garden spider family4 ,therefore1 take eight toothpicks and1 bending them as before described1 make eight legs4 ,push two legs into each side of the large part of the nut--the abdomen--inclining them backward1 and two more into each side of the small part of the nut--the thorax--slanting them forward1 as in ,fig4 #cbd4 ,make the antenn of two black pins1 bent according to ,fig4 #cbe2 push the pins well into the head of the spider 7,fig4 #cbd74 ,if you thread a fine piece of black elastic through the spider's back1 allowing a length of about a half yard1 and weight the body by fastening a little flattened piece of lead or a small stone on the under part with melted sealing-wax1 the ,peanuticus can be made to dance up and down in the air like a natural spider running on its web4 ,the black elastic will not be noticeable4 ,tie the end of the elastic on a stick2 then you can hold it out from you and have a better view of the curious creature4 ,pick up another peanut and see what it suggests4 ,imagine it with long ears4 ,what would it look like8 ,a ,rabbit1 of ,course4 ,cut two ears from white paper and a tail from the same paper2 paste one ear on each side of ,bunny's head and fasten the little stumpy tail in place4 ,then stick two short pieces of toothpicks in the nut for the front legs2 bend the back legs at the centre and push the upright part into position so that the lower horizontal portion will be bent forward and rest on the ground4 ,ink round spots for eyes and a line partially across the front for the mouth4 ,camels are curious creatures1 always carrying a little mountain on their backs1 and chewing as if they had an inexhaustible supply of chewing-gum tucked away in some invisible pocket4 ,think of the mountain's back when selecting a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbg4 peanut for this animal and find one with a high hump4 ,cut the head and neck 7,fig4 #cbf7 of stiff paper or card-board2 ink the eyes and mouth1 and slide the head into a slit cut in the nut4 ,make the tail of heavy black thread or darning-cotton and fasten it on by simply sewing the thread in the nut4 ,tassel out the end4 ,for the two hind and one of the front legs use three stiff1 straight toothpicks2 bend the other toothpick for the front left leg so that the camel will appear to be walking4 ,the little animal will stand on three legs1 holding the fourth up1 as in ,fig4 #cbg4 ,find a nut shaped something like ,a ,little ,chicken1 with part of it inclining upward for the head4 ,stick two short1 bent toothpicks in for feet2 if properly adjusted the chick rests on them4 ,cut paper wings and paste one on each side of the chicken4 ,make the beak also of paper and insert it in the front of the head4 ,the eyes can be marked with ink4 ,when among the jungle folks1 off in the tangled wild woods1 ,the ,elephant grows to an immense size1 but things are very different in ,peanut ,land4 ,there the big-eared creature is a wee thing not much larger than the chicken you have just made4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbh4 ,fig4 #cbi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccj4 ,fig4 #cca4 ,it is a veritable midget of an elephant and not at all dangerous4 ,look over all your nuts and choose the one most closely resembling the body and head of an elephant2 then make two pasteboard front legs like ,fig4 #cbh1 and two more like ,fig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccb4 #cbi for the hind legs4 ,cut two ears 7,fig4 #ccj7 and a trunk 7,fig4 #cca74 ,the tail should be comparatively slender and a trifle bushy at the end4 ,paste ears1 tail1 and trunk in their proper places and cut four slits in the lower part of the nut for the four legs1 which you may then slide into place 7,fig4 #ccb74 ,the tusks are two toothpicks stuck into the lower part of the head4 ,by the diagrams it may be plainly seen just how the work is done4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccc4 ,the ,owl is fashioned from a nut without the joint-like extension4 ,ink the eyes1 beak1 and wings1 and with heavy thread or darning-cotton sew the wise bird to a twig or toothpick4 ,divide the stitches forming each foot into two portions or two toes1 as a real owl shows only two when in the same position 7,fig4 #ccc74 ,in the queer ,peanut ,land ,storks hold an important position4 ,they are very proud and carry their heads high as they stand perched upon their long stilt-like legs4 ,their ,holland relatives delight in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cce4 building nests on the tops of chimneys1 and it is always considered a sign of good luck for the occupants of the house when ,mr4 and ,mrs4 ,stork favor them with their presence4 ,your stork will not have to remain on the outside of the house1 because1 not being as large as the others of his family1 you can find room for him in almost any place4 ,make the bird's body of the most common-shaped peanut1 his legs of two stiff wooden toothpicks1 and his head 7,fig4 #ccd7 of stiff paper4 ,mark eyes on the head and put the different parts of the bird together4 ,he will stand up straight if you punch his feet into a piece of patented paper used in packing bottles 7,fig4 #cce74 ,if you have no such paper1 use anything you can find that will answer the purpose4 ,lobsters which will not pinch also live in ,peanut ,land4 ,they have eight bent toothpick legs1 a tail of paper 7,fig4 #ccf71 and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccg4 paper claws 7,fig4 #ccg74 ,the antenn are toothpicks4 ,real lobsters have one front claw larger than the other1 but on peanut lobsters these are of the same size4 ,when you have made the lobster 7,fig4 #cch7 you might boil him by dipping the funny little thing in red ink1 for lobsters are always red after being boiled4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cch4 ,all these animals need a ,noah to keep them in order in the ,ark4 ,make ,noah entirely of peanuts2 a small one for the head1 a large one for the body1 two for the arms1 two for each leg1 and two small nuts for the feet4 ,string the nuts together with strong1 coarse thread4 ,make the hair of a number of strands of black thread tied together in the centre4 ,pin this wig on the peanut head1 part the hair and spread it out to meet in the back and gum it in place4 ,mark the face with ink and dress the doll with loose trousers and loose sack coat4 ,cut the hat of common wrapping-paper4 ,first make the brim of a circular piece of paper1 with a round hole in the middle2 then the crown of a strip of paper slashed on each side4 ,fasten the ends of this together1 turn out the slashes on one side and slide the brim over the crown down on the turned-out slashed portion4 ,paste it on tight4 ,next turn in the slashes on the top edge of the crown1 fit a disk of paper over them as you would put a lid on a pan1 and gum the top of the crown in place4 ,you will find ,mr4 ,noah rather loose-jointed1 but that does not matter2 he is better so1 for he is not too stiff to run about and attend to his collection of animals4 ,make ,mrs4 ,noah of peanuts as you did ,noah1 and dress her in bright colors with a gay little hat fastened firmly on her head4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cda4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cci4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdj4 ,the ,ark may be an ordinary pasteboard box1 with a gabled roof pasted on the lid4 ,take a box like that shown in ,fig4 #cci1 bend a piece of stiff paper 7,fig4 #cdj71 paste the sides of ,fig4 #cdj on the lid 7,fig4 #cda71 and over the two open ends gum triangular paper cut as in ,fig4 #cdb4 ,paint windows and a door on the sides of the ,ark2 then paste the ,ark on a piece of another larger box-lid cut like ,fig4 #cdc4 ,put ,noah and his wife in the box with all the animals1 and tie a string through a hole pierced in the front of the stand of the ,ark1 so that the ,ark with its entire cargo of peanut animals may be dragged from one place to another 7,fig4 #cdd74 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdb4 ,noah's ,ark and all its animals has ever had a great attraction for young folks1 and it is not an uncommon sight to see baby grab ,noah1 ,mrs4 ,noah1 or some of the gorgeously painted animals1 and put the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdc4 toy in its mouth4 ,many of the colors used in painting the shop toys contain poison1 but the present ,mr4 and ,mrs4 ,noah and all the zological collection described in this article are healthy1 wholesome food4 ,so when you tire of playing with them you may eat them1 with no danger of ill consequences4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdd4 ,just think6 ,elephant and camel for first course1 stork and lobster second1 and dessert of spiders1 wasps1 and small birds4 ,what a novel bill of fare6 ,one little girl may eat a couple of elephants1 several giraffes1 a rhinoceros or two1 and still have a good appetite for her regular dinner4 ,should you think of some favorite animal not here described1 which would be an addition to your collection1 put your wits to work and hunt up a peanut suitable for the purpose2 then find a photograph or printed picture of the animal1 that you may be sure to have it as perfect as the materials will allow4 ,in this way almost ,any ,animal1 ,fish1 or ,insect ,can be ,made1 for after working out the given examples you will have gained sufficient knowledge of the governing principles of the work and enough skill to enable you to continue the manufacturing of peanut toys alone or with the help of other girls and boys4 ,different ,lines of ,objects can also be formed from the nut4 ,break open one with only a slight indenture at the centre and make the two halves into fairylike little sailing vessels by the addition of a sail and mast cut all in one from white writing-paper1 and gummed to the bottom of the boat near the large end4 ,it requires but a moment to make these tiny crafts1 and they will sail across a basin of water as if they were in reality large affairs on the salt sea1 their white wings gleaming out in the most charming manner4 ,stir the water slightly with a stick and see how the boats dance2 blow gently on the sails and off the two will race for the opposite side of the basin4 ,if you are near any small stream or pond you may launch your tiny boat and watch it bravely breast the little ripples4 ,,chapter ,,xv ,a ,,flower ,,feast ,this dinner party will be great fun1 especially as there need be no worry about cooking1 for the sun1 with the assistance of the rain and air1 has attended to that part of the preparation4 ,we shall have to provide some sort of a dining-table4 ,an ordinary letter-paper box about eight inches long and five inches wide will answer the purpose4 ,spread over the table a fresh1 white table-cloth of paper1 and for a centre-piece choose ,a ,pineapple made of a cone one and one-half ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdi4 or two inches high 7,fig4 #cde71 cutting it off flat at the stem 7,fig4 #cdf7 so that it will stand firmly on the table 7,fig4 #cdg74 ,on the top of the fruit pin a small bunch of coarse grass tips tied together with thread 7,figs4 #cdh and #cdi7 and use the petals of a bright-colored flower1 ,illustration3 #bjj which will lie flat when the lower portion is cut off1 as an ornamental mat to place under the pineapple2 a nasturtium blossom 7,fig4 #cej7 will look well4 ,almost everyone is fond of ,a ,fine1 ,fresh ,fish for dinner1 so we will select one which is sound and perfect4 ,carefully open a large-size milk-weed pod in the seam which you will find on the rounded side 7,fig4 #cea7 and take out the beautiful white fish composed of the seeds clinging to their downy wings1 the seeds forming the fish's scales 7,fig4 #ceb7 and the down its body4 ,cut out a piece of white paper 7,fig4 #cec7 and with a drop of paste fasten it on the fish to form the tail 7,fig4 #ced72 also gum a small1 round piece of inked paper in position for the eye2 place the fish on a dish made from a long1 green leaf 7,fig4 ,illustration3 #bej #cee74 ,hollyhock seeds1 which are ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cec4 packed together in rounded forms1 must furnish cheeses1 the resemblance ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cee4 being very marked 7,fig4 #cef74 ,two will be required and should be placed on the opposite sides of the table4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cef4 ,fig4 #ceg4 ,the ,rosy-cheeked ,apples 7,fig4 #ceg7 which come from the rose-bush are the seed-vessel of the flowers1 and so closely do they imitate little apples1 when detached from the bush they might easily be mistaken for such4 ,select a leaf plate1 fill it with the apples and place them on the table between the pineapple and the salad4 ,they give a bright note of color1 which helps the decoration4 ,the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceh4 ,fig4 #cei4 ,fig4 #cfj4 ,fruit ,salad shall be dainty enough for a fairy queen4 ,we will mix shredded orange from the petals of a full1 fresh young dandelion blossom 7,fig4 #ceh shows one of the petals magnified7 with shredded strawberries produced from the common red-clover blossom 7,fig4 #cei represents an enlarged petal71 and shredded cocoanut made from the ordinary white-clover petals 7,fig4 #cfj also magnified74 ,when these are well mixed serve them on a pretty1 green leaf plate1 and the dish will give another bit of mingled color with its pink1 white1 green1 and yellow4 ,the ,cups and ,saucers are furnished by the oak-tree and made of acorns4 ,the lower part 7,fig4 #cfa7 forms the saucer2 the upper 7,fig4 #cfb7 ,illustration3 #ge the cup4 ,cut off the top1 then remove the kernel and the cup is ready for use 7,fig4 #cfc74 ,it is better to select a large-sized acorn for the saucer and a smaller one for the cup1 in order that the ,illustration3 #bjj cup may have more space in the saucer and not fit too closely 7,fig4 #cfd74 ,miniature dippers can be fashioned of acorn cups by piercing a hole in one side near the top and pushing a slender stick through until it rests against the opposite side 7,fig4 #cfe74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfg4 ,odd little baskets are also made of acorns 7,fig4 #cff7 by cutting away all of the top of the acorn except a band through its centre2 this forms the handle4 ,the acorn is ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfh4 left in its rough saucer1 which gives the outer surface of the basket1 the inner surface being the interior of the acorn proper4 ,make several cups and saucers1 and the feast will be ready for others to see 7,fig4 #cfg74 ,of course1 it is only intended to give pleasure in this way and not really to serve as food4 ,rose petals make an excellent substitute for the common ,snapping ,bonbons1 such as are usually served at parties with the refreshments4 ,choose ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgj4 the largest and best petals 7,fig4 #cfh7 and gather up the edge of one all the way around1 holding the folds securely2 a little1 bag-like object is thus formed 7,fig4 #cfi71 which1 when held firmly with the thumb and forefinger of one hand and struck against the out-stretched palm of the other1 snaps with a loud noise4 ,if any opening is allowed when gathering up the edges of the petal1 the air will not be confined and consequently the bag will not snap1 and you must try another4 ,of the thorns covering the stems of the roses you can make chains by sticking the point of one thorn into the base of another and continuing in this manner until the chain is as long as you desire 7,fig4 #cgj74 ,the party being over we will make some ,baskets of ,green ,burs4 ,they are pretty and rustic and can be shaped into almost any style2 each bur is provided with little hooked fingers 7,fig4 #cga7 that lock when the two burs are pressed against each other1 enabling them to stick fast together--not so tight1 however1 that they cannot be separated when desired4 ,be sure the burs are young and fresh2 they will then be free from all dryness and perfectly safe to work with2 if too old they will be difficult to handle and apt to drop the small1 thorny particles4 ,before commencing the work spread a newspaper out in front of you1 then1 placing your burs on that1 take one bur and with several others form a circular row around it2 another row around completes the bottom of the basket 7,fig4 #cgb74 ,build up the sides on the top of this last row and form the handle with a row of burs long enough to reach easily from side to side ,illustration3 #ejj of the basket 7,fig4 #cgc74 ,you can experiment and make all sorts of things--vases1 bowls1 plates1 chairs1 tables1 and houses--of burs1 and the work is very interesting and easy4 ,beside contributing to the salad1 the dandelion furnishes ,a ,variety of ,amusement4 ,you have only to hold its golden head up under your chin to learn if you are fond of butter4 ,with one hand hold the flower 7,fig4 #cgd71 with the other hand a mirror4 ,if you see a yellow reflection cast upon your chin by the blossom underneath1 you enjoy using plenty of butter on your bread4 ,take the grandfather dandelion with his round1 white head 7,fig4 #cge7 and blow once1 then again and again1 three times in all2 the number of downy seeds left on the head denotes the time of day4 ,for instance1 should all be blown away except three 7,fig4 #cgf71 it would mean that it was three o'clock2 if two are left it would say two o'clock1 and so on4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgd4 ,select another nice ,old ,grandfather ,dandelion and he will tell you when you are fortunate enough to obtain a certain wish4 ,first make a wish1 then say aloud 8yes0 and give a single blow2 next say 8no0 and blow again4 ,proceed in this way1 repeating the two words alternately1 giving one blow at each1 until all the seeds are detached from the head4 ,if the word 8yes0 comes at the last blow your wish will be granted2 if 8no0 comes last it ,illustration3 #cjj will be denied4 ,with stems of this same flower1 which1 you know1 are hollow and much smaller at the top than at the bottom1 you can make pretty green rings by pushing the smaller into the larger end of the stem 7,fig4 #cgg74 ,to make a chain1 join a number of rings together by first passing one end of the second stem through the first ring before the two ends of the second stem are fastened together1 doing likewise with the third1 fourth1 and fifth stems 7,fig4 #cgh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chj4 ,to make an odd little ornament1 split the dandelion stem about two inches down lengthwise through the centre 7,fig4 #cgi7 and draw one side strip through your lips several times--it is perfectly harmless--until it curls ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgi4 up 7,fig4 #chj74 ,treat the other side in the same way and it will also curl 7,fig4 #cha74 ,the ,morning-glory gives us some of the most fragile flowers of which we have knowledge2 they are so delicate and fine of texture not many artists are able to render perfectly the peculiar charm of the blossom4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cha4 ,beautiful in their varied colors1 they blossom until killed by frost1 and growing as they do almost anywhere1 even along the dusty roadside1 their cheerful faces sing out a bright 8,good-morning0 if one is there in time to find them open4 ,usually they begin to close early in the day1 and when they close they change into twisted elongated affairs which are eagerly sought by children bent on having a little sport4 ,if you will gather a few of these floral cornucopi you can make them pop so loud they will rival the torpedo4 ,hold tight the opening end of the closed blossom with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand and fill it with air by gently blowing in the wee stem end2 grasp this securely with the left hand2 then suddenly push the two ends together1 and snap6 will go the flower4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,home-made ,baskets4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,,chapter ,,xvi ,,basket-,,weaving ,in and out1 in and out2 under and over1 under and over2 around and around1 again and yet again2 widening and narrowing1 and1 lo6 a basket is woven4 ,a child of eight can learn it1 a woman will find the work a charming pastime2 so this is written for girls of all ages4 ,dye your reeds1 put all the bright colors you like into your baskets1 and see if they are not much prettier and more substantial than the so-called 8,indian work40 ,red1 blue1 green1 yellow1 black1 purple--a butterfly's wing need not be gayer nor an old-time work-basket more useful4 ,large1 small1 medium-sized1 deep or shallow--only one's desire need determine the question4 ,materials for ,weaving ,a variety of materials are adapted to basket-weaving1 but the most substantial baskets are made of reeds4 ,when the principle is mastered you may use anything you choose which will lend itself to the work4 ,the basket-reeds can be purchased from any reed and rattan manufacturer1 and come in various sizes4 ,nos4 #b1 #c1 and #d are the ones to use1 and as ,no4 #d is quite heavy you will need that only for large baskets1 such as waste-paper baskets1 flower-pot cases1 etc41 and even for such purposes ,no4 #c will answer4 ,no4 #b is the finest1 and of that you will use the most4 ,the prices range from twenty-three cents to thirty-five cents a pound1 ,no4 #b being the most expensive4 ,beside the reeds you will need a twist of raffia2 this is a soft material used by the florist for tying up plants1 and may be obtained from him at little cost1 probably eighteen or twenty cents a hank4 ,to ,prepare the ,reeds ,the reeds come in bunches of five pounds each2 separate these1 and taking each reed wrap it loosely around your hand to form a coil1 twisting the ends in and out to hold them in place4 ,this puts your material into a convenient form1 and you need unwrap the reeds only as you have use for them1 one at a time4 ,have ready a pan or pail full of water1 for the reeds must be soaked awhile before they are used to make them more pliable and to keep them from breaking4 ,try a small basket at first--let us say a rather flat1 shallow one--and for this one coil of ,no4 #c and several of ,no4 #b reeds will be enough4 ,when they have soaked for about five minutes take out the ,no4 #c reed1 unwrap it1 and cut six pieces twelve inches long and one piece eight inches long2 then untwist your raffia and cut off one strip4 ,weaving the ,basket ,the reeds you have just cut are for the ribs of your basket4 ,lay the short rib to one side within easy reach1 then take three of the ribs in your left hand and cross them with the other three1 as in ,fig4 #chb4 ,be sure the reeds lie flat and side by side2 do not bunch them4 ,hold the ribs where they are crossed between the thumb and first finger ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chb4 of your left hand1 the vertical ones on top1 as shown in ,fig4 #chb1 and with your right hand place one end of the raffia on top of the reeds1 under your left thumb1 leaving the free end to fall to the left1 as in ,fig4 #chb4 ,hold the ribs securely now1 and bring the raffia up under those on the left-hand side close to the crossing1 then over the upper ribs 7,fig4 #chc71 under the right-hand ribs and over the lower ones1 going ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chc4 around twice and catching down the end of the raffia in the process2 then trim off the remaining short end of the raffia4 ,do not loosen your hold with your left hand1 but with your right separate the ribs as well as you can and begin to weave the raffia1 starting at the left-hand rib of the upper group1 as shown by letter ,a1 ,fig4 #chd4 ,bring the raffia over ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chd4 this rib and draw it down close to the centre1 then under the next1 over the third1 under the fourth1 and so on until you have been once around1 when you will find another rib necessary to make the weave come out properly4 ,here is the place for the short rib2 place one end of this rib across the centre of the others1 as shown by letter ,b1 ,fig4 #che1 and hold in place with your left thumb4 ,bring the raffia over the new rib1 and continue ,illustration3 ,fig4 #che4 weaving as in the first round2 when you reach the short end of the rib bind it down with the raffia as you carry it over one of the other ribs1 as shown by letter ,c1 ,fig4 #chf4 ,weave steadily with the raffia now1 and keep your mind on separating the ribs until they are of an equal distance apart2 also remember to draw the raffia down firmly each time you pass it in and out between the ribs1 first on one side1 then on the other4 ,of all parts it is most essential that the centre ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chf4 of the basket should be firmly and strongly woven4 ,be careful not to weave under or over two ribs at one time4 ,under one1 over the next1 is the rule2 and when you find1 as you will occasionally1 that something is wrong1 and alternate weaving has become impossible1 look back over your work and you will discover that you have somewhere crossed ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chg4 two ribs at once4 ,in such a case pull out the work and correct the mistake4 ,weave the raffia until the centre is about two inches in diameter1 or until you have used up the raffia1 then take from the water a coil of the ,no4 #b reeds1 unwind it1 and placing one end across the end of the raffia1 hold it with the thumb of your left hand1 and proceed to weave with the reed just as you did with the raffia 7,fig4 #chg74 ,in all cases the joining must be done on the inside of the basket4 ,illustration3 ',weaving ,baskets4' ,illustration3 ,begin to shape the sides ,by bending the ribs upward ,fig4 #chh4 ,weave ,your ,reed as closely as possible1 and when you have a disk about four inches in diameter begin to shape the sides by bending the ribs upward toward you 7,fig4 #chh7 and drawing your reed tighter4 ,if this slips up in the process1 push it back in place and hold it down by passing the fingers of your left hand between the ribs from the inside4 ,indeed1 this is a good way to hold your basket as soon as the ribs are sufficiently separated4 ,your left hand follows your right always in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chi4 basket-weaving1 holding in place what the right hand commits to its care4 ,when the ,first ,reed is ,used ,up take another1 cross the ends1 and continue as you did when beginning with the first reed4 ,as your weaving progresses do not forget to keep the distances between all of the ribs equal1 and try to avoid the tendency they have to curve spirally4 ,when your basket has slanting sides you will find it will almost shape itself after you have given the ribs a sharp bend at the first and started them in the right direction4 ,by bending the ribs too much you will make straight sides to the basket or have them slant in instead of out4 ,two inches is a good depth for a small basket1 and when you have woven that much1 cut off the ribs1 allowing them to extend about two inches beyond the edge1 as in ,fig4 #chi1 and trim the ends slantingly1 as shown in the same diagram4 ,bend the end of one rib down1 and push it into the basket on the farthest side of the next rib 7,fig4 #chi74 ,do this with the second rib1 and so continue around until the edge is 8bound off40 ,when the ends of the ribs do not slide in easily1 pry open the space with a pair of closed scissors1 turning them slightly4 ,all the baskets shown in ,the ,photographed ,group are woven in exactly this manner from start to finish2 the shaping is done by bending the ribs this way or that1 and by ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cij tightening the weave when narrowing and loosening it when widening4 ,there is a difference1 of course1 in the length of the ribs1 the larger baskets requiring longer ribs and more of them1 but there must always be an even number to start with1 the odd rib being added after the first round of raffia-weaving4 ,it is difficult to handle more than ten ribs at the start1 but where the basket is large or a close weave is desirable you may double the number when the disk for the bottom is almost complete4 ,to do this1 cut a number of the ribs one-half the length of the ones you have started with1 and after trimming the ends as in ,fig4 #chi1 insert one at the right of each of the original ribs1 as shown in ,fig4 #cij1 pushing each well down toward the centre4 ,this will give you an even number once more1 so a third rib must be added to one of the groups1 and should be inserted at the left1 the original rib being between the two new ones 7,fig4 #cij74 ,separate these ribs as you weave until all are of an equal distance apart1 and continue the shaping of the basket4 ,the ,covers are pretty and useful additions to some baskets2 they are woven in the same manner and are shaped according to fancy4 ,the saucer shape is the most common style and requires no sudden bend in the ribs1 but rather tight weaving and an indulgence of the natural inclination to curve from the centre4 ,it is only in adding the rings for the ,fastenings that you need make any change in the weave1 and that is but a slight one4 ,when your cover is almost large enough1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cia bring your reed up to form a small ring on the outside1 crossing one of the ribs1 as shown in ,fig4 #cia2 push the end of the reed through the ring several times1 making a twist as in ,fig4 #cia1 and continue weaving as before4 ,this ring should be about one-fourth of an inch from the edge of the cover4 ,the corresponding ring in the basket is made in the same manner1 and should be placed one-half inch from the edge2 it must be a trifle smaller than the one on the cover1 that it may be slipped through1 and so form a fastening4 ,make a ,hinge by threading a strip of raffia through the basket near the edge1 and tying it on the inside1 then through the lid1 making a stitch across the reeds1 back to the under side of the cover1 bringing it around the loop of raffia to form a twist1 and finally into the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cib basket1 and once more tie on the inside 7,fig4 #cib74 ,you may revel in ,color if you like1 in the pretty work of basket-making4 ,the soft broken colors1 brightened at times by touches of more brilliant tones1 are really beautiful1 while even those which1 alone1 seem crude and glaring1 by some happy accident of combination often produce charming effects4 ,a fine line of black is sometimes effective and looks well next to the whitest of the natural-colored reeds4 ,it is ,a ,law in ,decoration that bands of color should be so placed as to give the idea of additional strength to the object decorated--that is1 on the most exposed parts1 such as the fullest swell of a curve and the base and edge4 ,you will find that this rule is observed in most decorated pottery1 and it is a good one to follow in basket-weaving2 the nearer one comes to embodying it in the work1 the more satisfactory are the results4 ,another style of decoration is to start with a dark color at the base of the basket and gradually work in the different shades up to the lightest color at the edge4 ,one color need not be used in this1 such as red running up to pink1 but gradual blending of one color into another4 ,,chapter ,,xvii ,,an 8,,abe0 ,,lincoln ,,log-,,cabin ,a bright1 gray-eyed little ,kentucky boy1 of whom all have heard and whose memory is honored by the entire nation1 lived years ago in a quaint log-cabin so small that it would now seem to be about the right size for a large play-house4 ,there was but one room1 and that contained only a few pieces of rough home-made furniture4 ,the boy1 with his musical laugh1 was busy and healthy1 making the best of everything and sleeping soundly on the dried leaves piled in one corner of the loft over the room4 ,there were no stairs for the little fellow to ascend1 so he climbed to his primitive couch by means of wooden pegs driven in the side of the wall4 ,he never complained of any hardship1 but always tried to better things2 and after he grew up to manhood he tried to better his country1 and succeeded4 ,imagine this brave boy dressed in the every-day costume of the place and times1 wearing a 'coon-skin cap which partially covered his thick dark hair1 a homespun shirt1 trousers of roughly tanned deerskin1 and on his feet1 not shoes1 but home-made moccasins4 ,thus attired1 he daily trudged by the side of his sister ,nancy1 walking several miles to a school-house1 which was also built of logs1 so arranged that they stuck out and formed little recesses in which the children played hide-and-seek4 ,there were no windows in the building2 the day crept through the open space where a log had been removed to admit light to enable the girls and boys to see to study4 ,the school floor was the bare brown earth1 not even boards2 yet from such modest surroundings came one of the greatest of ,americans4 ,could you have been at the ,world's ,fair in #ahic you might have seen a log-cabin which was the home of this boy after the family had moved to ,illinois4 ,the house was on exhibition at the ,fair1 having been purchased for the purpose by a special association4 ,illustration3 ,an 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ,probably not many ,northern girls have ever seen a genuine log-cabin1 though some may have spent part of their ,summer vacation in recently built log-houses in the mountains1 but these buildings are usually too luxurious and spacious to bear any resemblance to the pioneer structure of logs4 ,the rare human life which has passed through some of these old log-cabins and left its influence upon the world1 will cause the cabins to be remembered long after the more pretentious mansions have been forgotten4 ,it is noble lives which are of real worth1 not inanimate things4 ,naturally you would be glad to see the funny little ,kentucky log-cabin where ,nancy's brother first lived1 but long ago the cabin was torn down2 however1 the logs were saved1 and in #ahie the old house was rebuilt on the original site4 ,the surest way of seeing a log-cabin like the one in which our little friend and his sister lived is for you to erect such a house4 ,then you will know exactly what little 8,abe's0 home was like--for you must have guessed before this that ,nancy's brother was the martyred ,president1 ,abraham ,lincoln4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,making an 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,of course1 you cannot build a log-cabin large enough for grown people to live in4 ,yours will be ,a ,miniature 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,cabin1 and the longest and heaviest logs should be about as large around as a lead-pencil and measure not more than eight ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cic4 inches in length1 the short side logs being five and a quarter inches in length4 ,notch each log at both ends and on both sides 7,fig4 #cic71 except the four foundation logs1 which ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cid4 require notches at each end1 but only on the upper side 7,fig4 #cid74 ,when erecting the house fit the cross logs together at the notches 7,fig4 #cie71 in order to make the walls ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cie4 firm and to avoid wide spaces between the logs4 ,let the elevation or height of the house be four inches 7,fig4 #cif74 ,in building the roof use end logs graduated in length 7,fig4 #cig74 ,these gabled ends should raise the house two inches through the centre4 ,before ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cif4 adding the roof1 slide in two extra side logs1 each half an inch or so longer than the side logs proper2 place one at each end of the top of the house along the inside of the last logs on top of the side walls 7,fig4 #cih1 ,f ,e74 ,the longer logs are used to extend the roof back and front beyond the building1 causing it to project as do ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cig4 the roofs on real houses4 ,to produce a like result on the sides1 have the front and back logs of the roof longer than those built in the front and back of the house1 the difference being the same increase in measurement as in the sides of the roof 7,fig4 #cif1 ,a ,b and ,c ,d74 ,cut a piece of paper two and one-quarter inches long and one and one-quarter inches wide to indicate the door2 fasten it by the four corners to the centre of the front of the house immediately above the foundation log4 ,cut another piece of paper the size of the window--one inch long and three-quarters of an inch wide--and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cih4 paste it also on the front of the house midway between the door and the end of the house1 allowing it to come a little lower than the top of the door 7,fig4 #cif74 ,with paint-brush and white paint mark the logs along the edge of the paper door and window2 then carefully take down the house1 placing the logs in eight different piles3 the front of the roof in one place1 back of roof in another1 first end of roof in the third pile1 and second end in the fourth4 ,tie each group of logs separately and label4 ,proceed in like manner with the four sides of the house proper1 first removing the pieces of paper4 ,cut the logs marked with the white paint on the inside of the lines to make openings for the door and window1 then rub off the remaining paint from the logs4 ,now your material is ,ready for ,building and you must find some land upon which to erect the house4 ,fortunately log-cabins need no cellars1 so digging will be unnecessary1 and the ground need not be deep4 ,a piece of bookbinder's stiff pasteboard or a light-weight wooden board seventeen by twenty-three inches or thereabouts will prove the best kind of a ground plot and1 after space is reserved for the house1 will allow for a large yard4 ,mark the location for the house a little to one side of the centre and near the back of the lot1 as shown in illustration of ,an 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cii4 ,have ready some strong glue and begin the building of the cabin4 ,glue down the four foundation logs to the board1 being cautious to lay them straight and even2 then proceed as when first erecting the building1 only this time glue each log to the lower ones at the notched ends1 using putty in place of mortar between the lengths of the logs4 ,now1 do not say you have no putty4 ,if you cannot get it1 use plaster-of-paris2 if you have no plaster-of-paris1 use clay2 and if there is no clay use mud4 ,the ends of the logs bordering the window and doorway must be held level and kept from falling together by chips glued in between them 7,fig4 #cii74 ,be sure to have the four sides of the building plumb4 ,do not let the walls lean one way or another4 ,this item must be borne in mind constantly while building4 ,when the ,house is ,up1 with the exception of the roof1 measure the two sides of the door and window and cut a thin1 flat piece of wood--an old ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djj4 cigar-box will do--in the desired width and length for jambs4 ,glue the pieces in place4 ,fig4 #djj shows the first jamb on one side of the doorway4 ,when all the jambs are fastened on measure the space of the doorway and cut a door of the thin wood according to the measurements4 ,be sure it fits1 and see that it moves easily back and forth4 ,the door cannot have a knob1 because during those early times there were no door-knobs in this country--people used door-latches1 mostly of wood1 with a string hanging down on the outside for friends to pull and thereby lift the inside latch1 causing the door to open4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dja4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djb4 ,if the household did not wish visitors the string was pulled inside the room2 then no one outside could open the door1 as there would not be anything to catch hold of4 ,this explains the old saying1 8,the latch-string hangs on the outside of the door40 ,bore a hole through the little cabin door with the red-hot end of a hair-pin1 for the latch-string2 move the hair-pin around and around in order to burn the hole large enough to admit the threading through of a string4 ,dampen one end of a short string1 twist it to a point and pass it through the hole to the other side1 turn the door over and make a knot in the end of the string large enough to prevent it ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djc4 coming through when the string is pulled from the outside4 ,fig4 #dja shows the inside knot and ,fig4 #djb the outside string4 ,hang the ,door by means of a cloth hinge2 glue a half inch wide strip of muslin lengthwise along one edge of the inside of the door 7,fig4 #djc71 leaving the other half of the muslin to be glued on the inside of the doorjamb that the door sill may be on the outside 7,fig4 #djd74 ,after the door has been satisfactorily secured in its proper place build on the roof4 ,as a substitute ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djd4 for clapboards or shingles glue birch-bark over the rafters to serve as a covering1 first bending the bark through the centre to fit the roof1 as a sheet of writing-paper is folded4 ,when the roof is on1 fasten over it ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dje4 lengthwise slender poles at wide intervals1 that the roof may resemble the original clapboard style4 ,in real houses these poles were laid across to hold the rough clapboards in position and have them 8break joints10 which means that the clapboards1 which resemble very long1 large shingles1 are placed in rows in such a way that the centres of the solid bottom edges of those in the upper rows overlap and cross the spaces between the clapboards in the lower rows1 just as ordinary shingles are put on houses to-day4 ,the ,chimney must be at one end and on the outside of the house4 ,begin at the ground1 and in log-cabin fashion build the lower part up about an inch and a half of logs4 ,this portion in a real log-cabin opens on the inside of the room and constitutes part of the framework of the fireplace1 but in this tiny house it will not be necessary to carry out the interior in detail4 ,having securely glued the lower part of the chimney and plastered it between the logs1 get some burnt matches or split a number of sticks into very slender lengths for the remainder of the chimney4 ,these are not to be notched4 ,use them to graduate the chimney up a short distance until the opening is small enough for the chimney proper4 ,make the rest uniform in size and extend it up an inch and a quarter higher than the top of the house 7,fig4 #dje74 ,if the chimney was a real one it would have to be plastered thick inside with mud1 and between the logs and sticks1 but as it will not be used for fire or smoke1 glue will answer at the corners and putty or some other substitute for the cracks1 as in the illustration of ,a ,fac-simile ,miniature 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ,illustration3 ,a ,fac-simile ,miniature 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ,the different materials needed for the cabin and grounds can be readily obtained4 ,almost any kind of fairly smooth twigs will make line logs1 but try to have them uniform in size4 ,you ,can ,find ,plenty of ,moss for foliage in the woods or swamps1 on old stumps of trees and weather-beaten fences1 and a few varieties are to be had in the open fields2 that growing in pine woods or rocky places is generally satisfactory4 ,gather the moss wherever you can find it and obtain as many varieties as possible4 ,look also for the beautiful lichens1 varying in color and form2 detach them carefully and bring the curious little plants home in a box separate from the moss4 ,the dainty lichens do not need preparation for use1 but the moss does4 ,place it top down on paper near the fire and dry quickly without scorching4 ,after it is dry shake off all impurities1 such as dead leaves1 grass1 sand1 and rotten wood4 ,moss that grows in swamps should be carefully washed soon after being obtained1 as the roots are difficult to clean when they become dry4 ,as soon as the moss has been thoroughly dried1 put it away in a dark place until you are ready to use it4 ,to obtain ,the ,bark for ,roof and ,canoe1 hunt up a birch-tree--one that has been dead a short time is best--and with a sharp knife peel off the pieces needed4 ,the bark should be of a rich dark reddish-brown on the inside4 ,cut it with an old pair of scissors into the desired shape and size2 then place the pieces between two smooth boards to dry4 ,put weights or stones of convenient size upon the upper board1 and very soon the bark will be flattened out and ready for use4 ,the trees are small1 branching twigs4 ,search for those which resemble most closely little trees4 ,examine carefully the structure of real trees1 stand under the branches and gaze up into the foliage2 in most varieties1 you can see exactly how the tree grows4 ,try to remember its appearance2 where and how the limbs stand out and the manner in which they branch off2 then select your twigs accordingly4 ,little 8,abe0 was obliged to take a long walk to the spring for drinking water1 but since the size of our lot does not permit placing a spring at sufficient distance from the cabin to copy exactly the environment of the ,lincoln homestead1 we will introduce ,a ,pretty ,little ,lake or ,pond and an old-fashioned country well-sweep as water supplies4 ,hunt up a piece of broken looking-glass4 ,this will make ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djf4 an excellent substitute for a miniature lake of real water1 reflecting the beautiful green shore1 the overhanging trees1 and the graceful little craft which we will moor to its shore4 ,if the mirror is the requisite size1 its shape does not matter4 ,place the glass near the front of the board at the left-hand side4 ,move it further back1 then forward1 a little to this side and that1 until you find the precise spot best suited for the lake4 ,experimenting in this way1 you will gain unconsciously a slight insight into the art of landscape gardening1 and when you have an opportunity you will find yourself studying the arrangement and beauty of grounds laid out by professional landscape gardeners4 ,you will notice in what direction the water lies from the house1 the arrangement of the trees1 if they are many or few1 in groups or scattered1 the surface of the land1 and various other details that appeal to the close observer4 ,having located the place for the lake1 lay the broken mirror on it and glue a strip of paper1 half of it to the edge of the glass and half to the board4 ,fig4 #djf shows the method1 the dotted line giving the extreme edge of the glass under the paper4 ,cover the paper with a light coat of glue and sprinkle clean1 fine1 dry sand over it while the glue is wet that the sand may stick fast and conceal the paper4 ,with a lead-pencil draw two parallel lines as a boundary for ,the ,walk from the house to the front edge of the board and1 recollecting the old saying1 8,a curved line for beauty1 a straight line for duty10 make the path curve in some such way as seen in ,fig4 #djg4 ,extend the walk almost diagonally across to the right hand of the board4 ,if the first lines do not give a satisfactory path1 try again and again until you have the walk to suit2 then1 if possible1 obtain sand of a yellowish color and with the aid of glue make a sandy walk4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dji4 ,the best place for ,a ,well is toward the right hand of the land beyond the house1 between it and the front edge of the board4 ,decide upon the exact location and over this draw a square measuring one and three-quarters inches each way as a guide in building the wall4 ,you will need some small stones for the well1 but real stones are not necessary and you may use instead irregular broken pieces of cork4 ,these can be made to resemble ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daj4 hard stones by being first coated all over with glue1 then covered with sand of a dark reddish hue4 ,build the square according to and immediately outside the lines in order to keep the inside space of the well large enough to allow the free lowering of the bucket4 ,make the walls even and straight1 gluing the foundation stones securely to the ground4 ,when the first layer of stones is in place fit in others for a second row on top of the first1 breaking joints2 cement the two rows together with putty4 ,keep on building until the walls are an inch and a half high1 reserving the flattest stones for the top 7,fig4 #djh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daa4 ,cut a forked stick five inches long and push the end in a button-mould 7,fig4 #dji72 glue the button-mould down tight to the board at the right-hand side six inches from the well2 then make a straight1 slender pole five inches long from a twig1 and a well-sweep from a heavier twig4 ,the well-sweep should be fourteen inches long and much heavier at one end than at the other4 ,on the light end of the sweep attach the slender pole1 which has previously had a hole burned through the lower end with the red-hot end of a hairpin4 ,glue a small strip of brown muslin from one stick to the other1 not allowing the ends of the stick to meet 7,fig4 #daj74 ,wrap and glue the sides of the cloth around the two poles1 forming in this way a hinge1 which will allow the slender pole to hang straight down from the sweep 7,fig4 #daa74 ,tie an ,acorn ,bucket ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dab4 7,fig4 #dab7 on the end of the pole1 pass a string under the handle of the bucket and through the hole in the poles then fasten securely4 ,pierce one of the forked ends of the stick 7,fig4 #dji71 with a pin1 measure seven and a half inches from the smaller1 light end of the sweep1 and insert the pole sweep at this point between the forked ends shown in ,fig4 #dac4 ,push the pin entirely through the sweep and the second fork of the support1 where it will act as a hinge4 ,try moving the sweep up and down to see if it works all right4 ,should the bucket drop into the well and remain there when your hand is removed from the pole1 it shows that the heavy end of the sweep is too light4 ,remedy this by increasing the weight4 ,tack and glue a small box on the end 7,fig4 #dad71 resting the pole exactly on the centre of the inside bottom of the box4 ,fill the box with small stones until the weight is sufficient to keep that end on the ground1 glue the stones in tight 7,fig4 #dac74 ,now try the sweep again2 pull the pendant pole down1 bringing the bucket into the well just as the real ones are worked4 ,you can pretend that the well is very deep1 containing the clearest and coldest of drinking water1 and that the acorn bucket is in reality the original 8,old ,oaken ,bucket40 ,that famous bucket actually hung from just such a sweep as you have made1 only1 of course1 a very much larger and stronger one4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dac4 ,let some of ,the ,trees be nearly as tall again as the cabin2 others may be smaller4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dad4 ,select your twigs and push the end of each into a large-sized button-mould4 ,if the hole in the mould is too small1 enlarge it4 ,have a few very small twigs for shrubs2 stand the trees and shrubs around the grounds as you think they will look best4 ,try placing them in different parts of the grounds--perhaps a large tree partially back of the house would look well4 ,when all are satisfactorily arranged mark the different spots1 then take each tree and bush separately and cause the bare branches to burst forth into beautiful green foliage4 ,to do this1 bring out your box of moss and carefully select the variety which most nearly resembles foliage4 ,use different kinds of moss for different trees1 if you have a variety4 ,pick the dainty moss apart fibre by fibre and glue the pieces one at a time on the branches1 making the foliage thicker in some places than in others2 place the lightest-colored moss on the outside limbs of the trees1 leaving the darker for the inner branches4 ,fig4 #dae shows a bare tree and ,fig4 #daf the same in full leaf4 ,when the trees and shrubs are ready glue them by their button-mould stands to the board4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dae4 ,next the ,grass-seed ,must be ,sown or the sod planted that the ground may be clothed in emerald green4 ,select a quantity of fine short moss and glue it down all over the entire bare land2 then step back a short distance and view the work4 ,you will be surprised at the realistic effect produced4 ,bring the grass well down1 but unevenly1 around the shores of the lake and scatter stones of various size here and there near its edge4 ,take a few pieces of the vine-like moss and trail it up the side of the cabin1 running the vine high under the eaves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daf4 ,the ,fence must be one of the picturesque zigzag rail enclosures sometimes called 8,old ,virginia0 fences and again 8snake0 fences4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dag4 ,they are peculiar to ,america and are made of split logs4 ,when ,lincoln was a boy he excelled in splitting rails and made more and cut them faster than any of the other boys4 ,the rails you require1 however1 are so small that a girl as well as a boy can easily make them4 ,cut the logs four and one-half inches long and split each one lengthwise 7,fig4 #dag74 ,make enough rails to lay a fence around three sides of the grounds4 ,the back edge of the land can be hedged in with bushes and trees4 ,build the fence by first placing stones--one or more1 according to the size--in two rows1 those in each being about four inches apart4 ,the circles in ,fig4 #dah give the position of the stones1 and the dotted line that of the rails4 ,begin the fence by laying the first rail on two of the stones1 the next rail across to the third stone1 and so on4 ,make the fence several rails high2 then cross two upright rails at each corner and build on the top rails 7,fig4 #dai74 ,glue the stones to the ground and the rails one on top of the other as you build4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dah4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dai4 ,leave an open space at the path for a gateway1 but instead of an ordinary gate you can make ,a ,little ,turnstile which will twist around just like a real one4 ,choose a thick short log and shave it off level on the top2 then take two thin flat sticks about two and one-half inches long2 round off the corners and1 crossing them at the centres1 glue the two together 7,fig4 #dbj74 ,when dry work a pin through ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dba4 both at the centre and push the pin down1 not too tight1 in the top of the log 7,fig4 #dba74 ,enlarge the hole in a good-sized button-mould and fasten in the turnstile4 ,scrape away enough sand at the centre of the gateway to allow the button-mould to be glued to the bare board2 then brush a little glue over the mould and around its edges and sprinkle with sand4 ,the bright-colored lichens come in well as flowers to give the ,finishing ,touches4 ,little tufts can be glued at the base of the cabin and chimney4 ,the variety with the coral-red tops might be planted here and there along the edge of the walk1 and other kinds could be fastened sparingly on a few rocks at the base of the well-sweep and wherever they would add to the beauty and effect of the whole4 ,but be careful about using too many simply because you happen to have them4 ,study the effect of the entire scene and do not overcrowd it4 ,the ,birch-bark ,canoe4 ,cut the boat from the pattern 7,fig4 #dbb72 sew up the two ends and1 if necessary1 bend out the sides until the canoe is of the desired shape 7,fig4 #dbc74 ,moor the craft to the edge of the shore with the aid of a little glue4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbb4 ,or you might put the canoe out on the water2 glue it in place and seat two little jointed dolls in the boat1 one dressed as a girl and the other as a boy4 ,the boy should have glued to his hands a little wooden paddle whittled from a piece of thin1 flat wood4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbc4 ,when people lived in log-cabins they burned wood in the great fireplaces and always kept a generous ,wood-pile near at hand4 ,a tiny one at the side toward the back of the grounds will1 therefore1 be in keeping with the cabin4 ,burn two holes through each end of a short flat piece of wood and stick a slender pole in each hole1 fasten them in tight with glue1 then burn two holes in another piece of wood for two similar poles4 ,place the two pairs of stakes about three inches apart1 and cut your wood and pile it up evenly between them4 ,the stakes are to hold the wood in place 7,fig4 #dbd74 ,a ,sawbuck can be made of four flat pieces of wood and one round piece4 ,shut your eyes1 think hard1 and you will remember how a real sawbuck looks2 how the cross-piece is nearer the top than the bottom and how each side-piece forms an awkward-looking ,x1 the cross of the letter being above the centre4 ,you can make it without diagrams4 ,look at the sawbuck near the wood-pile in ,fig4 #dbd and try4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbd4 ,find a tiny doll1 dress it like a child and glue it in an upright position on the walk4 ,have another doll 7neither of these should be jointed7 dressed in a way to represent the little one's mother1 standing by the well drawing water1 and your charming old-fashioned log-cabin home will be finished4 ,see illustration of ,an 8,abe0 ,lincoln ,log-cabin4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,you might be drawing the simple designs4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,,chapter ,,xviii ,,queer ,,things ,,on ,,paper ,,and ,,blackboard ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,put ,,them ,,there ,look at a piece of blank paper or1 better still1 stand before an unmarked blackboard and try to imagine pictured on its surface whatever you would like to see there4 ,it might be a comical little turtle1 a rose1 or perhaps a graceful swan4 ,if you knew exactly the true shape and proportion of the objects you could draw them1 but as soon as you attempt the sketch you realize that you cannot remember just how these creatures are formed1 and consequently you are unable to depict them4 ,do not be discouraged1 for there is a way in which you may do the work easily and that is by reducing the realistic drawing to a few leading lines1 and the girls who are able to sketch even a small number of simple objects in this way have resources within themselves both for diversion and development1 worth much more than they are apt to understand4 ,if you would like to put on paper or board ,a ,funny ,little ,pig as it stands with its ears bent forward and nose in air1 draw a horizontal line 7,fig4 #dbe74 ,on the right-hand end of this extend down a short vertical line 7,fig4 #dbf72 on the left draw another vertical line parallel to but longer than the first 7,fig4 #dbg74 ,draw a bottom horizontal line not quite as long as the top one 7,fig4 #dbh72 then connect the two loose ends by a slanting line 7,fig4 #dbi74 ,make the letter ,v inverted and slightly tipped for the ear 7,fig4 #dcj72 put a dash in front of the ear parallel with the top line for the eye1 and a little loop at the back for a tail 7,fig4 #dca74 ,add two short straight lines to serve as legs on the far side of the pig1 making them touch but not pass the bottom line 7,fig4 #dcb74 ,next put in the other two legs on the near side of the animal1 extending them up a trifle beyond the bottom line and down a little lower than those on the far side 7,fig4 #dcc74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dca4 ,there6 the pig is all attention1 listening to the welcome sound of the children's call and ready to start for his dinner6 ,now make the little animal as he appears when satisfied and trotting off contentedly4 ,draw the body as for the first pig1 but turn it upside down 7,fig4 #dcd71 then add the eye1 ear1 tail1 and legs4 ,slant the eye with the head line and point the ear downward toward the left 7,fig4 #dce74 ,in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcb4 these lines forming the two animals you have produced expressions2 in the first1 expectation2 in the second1 contentment1 and you have also suggested character1 by giving the principal distinctive lines of the pig4 ,when you see a picture of a pig1 or the live creature1 try to find the lines which you have drawn4 ,to do this1 first ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcc4 get an idea of the general line forming the back1 omitting all the little ups and downs and curves--in other words1 all detail4 ,then proceed in the same way with lines forming the rest of the animal4 ,do not allow yourself to be confused by the amount of detail2 keep to the principal parts and you will gain some idea of the form of the object4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dce4 ,in the same way look at the governing lines of ,a ,hen and you will discover that if a triangle be drawn with the straight line1 or base1 uppermost and the point down at the bottom1 it will give the characteristic outline of the hen by adding simple outlines of head1 tail1 and feet4 ,but the leading lines are not necessarily straight and angular2 they are often entirely of curves--the kind of curves boys and girls delight to cut in the ice while skating1 and which ,old ,ocean marks upon the sand in summer1 using brushes ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcg4 made of waves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dch4 ,fig4 #dci4 ,fig4 #ddj4 ,fig4 #dda4 ,fig4 #ddb4 ,did you ever notice how many beautiful curves exist in ,the ,queen of ,flowers1 the ,rose1 the national flower of ,england8 ,examine the blossom and endeavor to take in its beauty4 ,a question often asked in one of the games of children is this3 8,which would you rather have1 a gold rose or a gold lily80 and the bewildered young prisoner scarce can choose1 so impressed is she with the desirability of possessing1 if only in imagination1 both rose and lily1 little dreaming that once a year a rose of the purest gold is actually made and given by the ,pope to an ,empress1 ,queen or royal princess belonging to the ,roman ,catholic ,church4 ,the rose you can make will not be of the precious metal1 but of chalk or lead from a pencil1 and you need not wait to present it to a royal personage1 but may give it to whom you please4 ,begin with a circle 7,fig4 #dcf74 ,draw it as perfect as possible1 and within its border place one curved petal 7,fig4 #dcg71 another 7,fig4 #dch71 a third 7,fig4 #dci71 a fourth 7,fig4 #ddj71 and two more 7,fig4 #dda74 ,fill the circle up with petals as in ,fig4 #ddb1 then on the outside of the circle make six more 7,fig4 #ddc72 to these add four on the outer edge 7,fig4 #ddd74 ,now you may go over all the lines1 making them somewhat irregular1 as in ,fig4 #ddd4 ,draw a stem to ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddd the rose1 add a few thorns and on the right-hand side of the stem attach a branch of green ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddc4 leaves according to the copy4 ,the easiest way to sketch in the leaves is to first draw the mid rib or central line which reaches from the point of the topmost leaf to its juncture with the stem of the rose4 ,when that line is made draw two more1 branching out on each side of it4 ,these lines form the skeleton of the leaves1 and all one has to do to finish them is to commence at the tip of each line and draw a curve to its base1 first on one side1 then on the other1 to form the leaf4 ,is not that easy8 ,should the work be incorrect the first time1 do it over again and again4 ,only little animals are born with a knowledge of all they are required to know2 people must learn everything1 even how to walk4 ,remember that the women and men who seem so skilled and wise had to learn by repeated trials1 just as you are doing now4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dde4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dej4 ,rub the marks off the blackboard or get a fresh piece of paper and we will put a face on it--one that1 after you have once drawn it1 you can almost sketch with your eyes shut1 so simple is the work4 ,possibly you do not know that the general outline of ,a ,head is egg-shaped4 ,make an egg-shaped outline1 using the large part for the top like a balloon 7,fig4 #dde74 ,draw two curves on the egg for the eyebrows just above the centre of the face 7,fig4 #ddf72 make two smaller curves under the eyebrows and exactly in the centre of the face for eyes 7,fig4 #ddg72 another curve midway down between the eyes and the bottom of the chin for the nose 7,fig4 #ddh71 and a last one below the nose to form the mouth4 ,see how supplicating the face looks6 ,you know how he feels--the boy wants to go to the circus 7,fig4 #ddi74 ,reverse the order of the lines and the expression will be entirely different4 ,turn the curves which form the features the other way by bending them downward instead of upward 7,fig4 #dej74 ,the boy is now thinking of the lesson he did not learn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dea4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dec4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ded4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #def4 ,the ,three ,blind ,mice who ran so fast when the butcher's wife went after them can also be drawn in a simple manner4 ,make a curve 7,fig4 #dea7 and draw a straight line from end to end 7,fig4 #deb72 add ears 7,fig4 #dec71 eye and whiskers 7,fig4 #ded71 a tail 7,fig4 #dee71 and the legs and feet 7,fig4 #def74 ,draw three mice all alike in a row4 ,again1 make ,fig4 #deb to form the body of ,a ,fish4 ,sketch in the gills 7,fig4 #deg71 the eye and pectoral fin 7,fig4 #deh71 the dorsal fin 7,fig4 #dei71 and tail 7,fig4 #dfj72 then make the scales by first drawing parallel curved slanting lines over the body of the fish 7,fig4 #dfa7 and crossing them with others 7,fig4 #dfb74 ,indicate the water with a few short lines 7,fig4 #dfb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dei4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfa4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfb4 ,turtles are slow creatures1 but they are interesting travelling about with their houses on their backs4 ,did you ever have one for a pet8 ,they are very quiet1 not at all troublesome1 and make fine pets for girls4 ,it may be that you have never seen a geographic turtle4 ,we will draw one1 and that will impress it on your mind4 ,take the same ,fig4 #deb to form its back1 mark as in ,fig4 #dfc1 then give the turtle a head1 in form something like that of a snake4 ,draw the eyes and mouth distinctly and add the feet and tail 7,fig4 #dfd74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfd4 ,here is something easier to draw than any of the other objects4 ,make a ,duck without raising the pencil from the paper4 ,commence at the left-hand starting-point and draw a line sidewise1 running ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dff4 it slightly downward 7,fig4 #dfe74 ,turn the line up and cross it over1 making a loop at the right-hand end 7,fig4 #dff74 ,continue the line to the other side and turn it up into another loop under the starting-point 7,fig4 #dfg74 ,keep on crossing from side to side1 looping the line each time ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfh4 until you have made ,fig4 #dfh2 then draw the line up and around the loops as in ,fig4 #dfi to form the wing4 ,next make similar loops1 according to ,fig4 #dgj1 for the tail4 ,at the last loop draw the line across under the duck's wing1 stretching it up in front 7,fig4 #dga74 ,this ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgj4 gives the lower portion of the head and beak4 ,continue the line to make the upper part of the head 7,fig4 #dgb74 ,one more trial and you will probably be able to draw the bird rapidly without once raising the pencil or chalk from the surface of the paper or blackboard4 ,let the duck swim in the water by drawing a few swirling lines around it as in ,fig4 #dgc4 ,young people often have an intense enthusiasm at different seasons for different sports4 ,at one time it may be hoop rolling1 when every girl must have a hoop1 even if it ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dga4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgb4 be one from a barrel4 ,again1 pin-wheels claim attention1 and the stores are besieged for bright-hued paper and all the girls and boys work hard over the pretty whirling toys1 talking of the many colors1 sizes1 and number of their ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgc4 special designs4 ,somewhat after this fashion the grown people in ,holland had at one time a craze1 not for a toy but a flower--the brilliantly colored tulip--and these older girls and boys often spent many dollars for one plant1 vying with each other in their endeavors to obtain rare varieties4 ,though often gorgeous in color ,the ,tulip is very simple in outline4 ,in one stroke draw ,fig4 #dgd1 make a corresponding curve on the other side 7,fig4 #dge71 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dge4 forming an oval standing on end2 this is one petal4 ,at the right-hand side1 from near the top of the petal1 run a short1 slanting curved line upward and outward 7,fig4 #dgf7 and connect the end of this line with the bottom of the oval by a reverse curve1 making the petal point outward at the top 7,fig4 #dgg74 ,duplicate the petal on the left-hand side1 making three visible petals 7,fig4 #dgh71 most of the other three being hidden on the far side of the flower4 ,form the tops of the back petals by drawing three ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgg4 little tent-like points1 one on each side and one back of the central petal 7,fig4 #dgi1 ,a1 ,b1 ,c74 ,add the stem by drawing two straight lines down from the bottom of the oval 7,fig4 #dhj74 ,a short distance from the flower add two long1 pointed leaves on the stem1 curving them somewhat after the manner of the side petals 7,fig4 #dha74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dha4 ,there are other flowers whose outlines may be drawn in this simple manner4 ,try the ,common ,white ,field ,daisy with its golden centre4 ,first draw a small circle to represent the centre1 and as the texture of its surface is slightly rough or velvety1 differing in this respect from the surface of the white petals1 indicate the difference by covering the centre with tiny dots4 ,from the edge of the centre sketch in the petals of the flower by drawing1 for the sides of each one1 two long1 curved lines which start from the round dotted centre and end by meeting at the outermost tips4 ,make a number of petals extending entirely around the circumference of the centre4 ,let them radiate out in all directions as the spokes stand out from the hub of a wheel1 being careful to have the petals about the same length1 that the daisy may be circular in form and not uneven4 ,always make the designs large in size1 drawing the lines in with free1 easy sweeps of the wrist and arm4 ,never allow your work to become cramped2 move the pencil or chalk deliberately and think what you are going to do before starting4 ,satisfy yourself as to where you are to begin and where you are going to stop2 then do your best4 ,the duck of fancy loops 7,fig4 #dgc7 does not portray the characteristic lines of the bird4 ,such was not the intention2 it is merely given for the fun of twisting the lines into the form of a duck1 so that you may be able to say1 8,i can draw a duck without taking the pencil from the paper4 ,watch me60 ,then you draw it for the benefit of your friends4 ,if you can get a blackboard or a piece of blackboard cloth and tack it over layers of paper on the wall1 you might give ,a ,little ,parlor ,entertainment by drawing the simple designs you have learned1 and perhaps others you can work out for yourself as you stand before your friends4 ,there is a certain fascination in watching anyone sketch and seeing lines which appear to be without meaning develop into familiar objects4 ,try the idea with a few friends or the members of your family4 ,as you sketch the objects tell in an easy1 natural manner anything and everything you know about them4 ,and before you are aware of the fact you will be giving others a delightful half-hour1 besides enjoying it yourself4 ,,chapter ,,xix ,,home-,,made ,,musical ,,instruments ,girls1 do you know that music lies hidden all around you1 needing only the right touch to bring it forth8 ,that everything is said to have its keynote1 from a big bridge to a little wooden bench1 and that when the keynote is struck the object will vibrate perceptibly8 ,a ,blank ,piece of ,paper does not suggest music in any form1 and yet ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhb4 you can draw many and various notes from it4 ,cut a strip of writing-paper like ,fig4 #dhb and whittle two pieces of wood according to ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhd4 ,figs4 #dhc and #dhd2 make the wood a trifle wider than the paper4 ,place the paper between the bits of wood 7,fig4 #dhe7 and1 holding the instrument tight between your teeth1 blow through it2 keep on ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhe4 blowing until it whistles like the wind4 ,of course you should have a number of different instruments in the orchestra you intend to organize1 so that each girl may play on her own special instrument4 ,for the next one1 try ,a ,harp4 ,harps were valued highly in ancient ,egypt1 and later in other countries1 some of which still retain them4 ,modern ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhf4 musicians1 like ,meyerbeer1 ,gounod1 ,berlioz1 ,liszt1 and ,wagner1 understanding the worth of the harp1 introduced it in their music4 ,our instrument may not be as graceful in form1 but you can have more real fun with it than you could with any of the big1 costly affairs4 ,get some elastic bands and a deep1 empty cigar-box2 drive slender nails at intervals along the front and back edges of the box2 then take ordinary elastic bands 7,fig4 #dhf71 and stretch them across the box by slipping each one over two back and two front nails4 ,the elastics must be of various widths2 place the heaviest at one end of the box and graduate up to the lightest at the other 7,fig4 #dhg74 ,with a quill 7,fig4 #dhh7 test the instrument4 ,you can tighten the elastics by looping them around and around one or more of the four pins2 in this way the strings may to a great extent be keyed as you wish4 ,practise on the musical box with the quill toothpick until you can make the elastics sing a tune1 then put the harp carefully aside where it will not be broken1 and hunt up a piece of wood for a modern ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhh4 ,dulcimer4 ,have the wood about an inch thick3 on the top of it1 lengthwise through the centre1 draw a straight line as a guide4 ,along the line drive common white pins graduated ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhi4 in size1 placing the largest at one end and the smallest at the other 7,fig4 #dhi74 ,if you can only get pins of one size1 graduate their height by sinking some deeper in the wood than others4 ,to do so without danger of bending the pins1 first make shallow holes with a large strong pin by screwing it into the wood2 a hat-pin will answer the purpose4 ,should you happen to have heavy nippers1 the pins may be all of the same height1 and you can pinch off their tops1 causing the row to slant down from one end to the other4 ,all being ready1 touch the pins lightly with the quill toothpick1 running the scale first up1 then down1 the entire length of the pin row4 ,after a few trials you will be able to play some simple airs on the pin keys4 ,doubtless most of you have seen bells of glass which may be rung like those of metal1 but probably you have have never tried bringing ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhi4 ,music ,from ,every-day ,glass ,finger-bowls and drinking-glasses4 ,try it4 ,collect as many different kinds of glasses as you can find1 the thinner the better4 ,place them on a wooden table 7,fig4 #dij7 and with a wooden hammer made by pushing an empty spool on one end of a lead-pencil 7,fig4 #dia7 gently strike first one glass then another to find the different tones4 ,having ascertained these1 make the glasses give forth the simplest chimes of ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dia4 the church bells4 ,but do not stop here2 experiment until you are able1 with various taps1 to bring out more music than you at first imagined possible4 ,let the glasses1 like ,tennyson's happy bells1 8ring out the false1 ring in the true40 ,the same poet in 8,locksley ,hall0 has the speaker ask his comrades to 8sound upon the bugle-horn0 when they want him4 ,few girls will ever try their powers on a real ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dib4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dic4 ,bugle-horn1 but all can readily make a twig sound an alarm4 ,get a piece of ordinary willow-tree 7,fig4 #dib74 ,be sure it is flawless and perfect2 with a sharp knife slice off a slanting piece at one end 7,fig4 #dic71 then cut a notch in top 7,fig4 #did74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #did4 ,gently tap the bark all over with one end of a penknife in order to loosen it from the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dif4 wood4 ,after carefully removing the bark without breaking it1 cut the wood according to the dotted lines in ,fig4 #die1 which will give ,fig4 #dif4 ,the wood is now ready to slip back into the bark1 but before doing so place a pea in the hollow part 7,fig4 #die72 then slide the bark back in place 7,fig4 #dig74 ,now blow the twig and sound the alarm4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dif4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dig4 ,a roast of beef hardly seems promising in a musical way1 and yet the roast1 though it looks so sober and quiet1 can help you with the orchestra4 ,save the smallest two of the long1 flat ,bones 7,fig4 #dih7 and1 after cleaning and drying them1 hold both in your right hand1 one bone between the first and second ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dih4 finger1 the other between the second and third1 so that the convex or outward curved sides lie next each other and the top ends of the bones extend slightly beyond the knuckles4 ,then double up your hand1 holding the first bone securely1 the other loosely1 and in this position give your hand a quick twist and jerking motion1 causing the loose ends of the bones to come together with a click1 click1 clickity1 click4 ,the bones should not be cooked1 as too much heat will crack them4 ,another home-made instrument of music is the ,crystal ,flute1 fashioned of small bottles4 ,any kind of bottle which sounds well when you blow into it will answer the purpose4 ,use coarse darning-cotton to sew the bottles in a row on a strip of pasteboard1 commencing with the deepest toned and leading up to the highest toned 7,fig4 #dii74 ,place the flute against your lower lip and blow into the open mouth of the bottle4 ,continue blowing as you move the instrument along1 sounding each bottle in turn4 ,after a few trials you can manage the crystal flute well enough to have all the bottles join in the grand chorus of the musical jubilee you intend to give with the home-made instruments4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,the ,dance of the ,dolls4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dii4 ,a little ingenuity will enable you to made a fine fiddle1 strings and all1 of a common field cornstalk1 and a good flute may be manufactured from a section of an ordinary pumpkin vine4 ,naturally you must think a little over the matter before you will be able to solve the problem4 ,take some hollow door-keys of different sizes and use them to play on2 they are well worth trying1 because a hollow door-key1 when blown into1 will give much the same sound as a bottle4 ,you might add the keys to your collection of instruments4 ,even an ,ordinary ,comb can do duty as a musical instrument4 ,over one side of the comb lay a piece of common white tissue-paper2 then hold this queer instrument to your lips1 allowing the paper to come between the comb and your mouth2 blow against the paper with lips gently parted somewhat as one blows on a horn or rather on a harmonica4 ,should the comb not respond at once1 try again2 when the secret is once learned1 there is no limit to the tunes which may be played4 ,for giving a queer whistling noise there is scarcely anything better than an ordinary broad ,blade of ,grass laid lengthwise between the entire length of the two thumbs1 one end of the grass extending beyond the tops of the thumbs and the other below at the wrist line4 ,certain tribes of people are experts in forming ,sea-shells into musical instruments1 but for you the shell need not be altered4 ,take it as it is1 and holding the pretty thing to your ear1 listen while the shell tells of the far-away blue ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejj4 sea1 which1 singing gently1 imparts to her children1 the shells1 power to transmit the sound of murmuring waves to those who will listen to the voice4 ,the ,musical ,fountain is one of the prettiest and most interesting experiments and is a very simple one4 ,remember1 you must use a goblet for the purpose1 not a tumbler1 as the latter will not work well4 ,choose a goblet of very thin glass1 fill it almost full of water1 dip the end of your finger in water and rub the edge of the glass quickly around and around until it rings with a humming sound4 ,you will soon find the surface of the water shivering and wrinkling up its face in tiny waves1 then it will become greatly agitated1 sending up wee streams and drops of water4 ,wet your finger again and keep on with the circular motion until a little fountain of fine spray shoots up into the air1 accompanied by the musical sound from the glass 7,fig4 #ejj74 ,,chapter ,,xx ,,what ,,to ,,make ,,of ,,empty ,,spools ,gather up all the spools you can find1 big1 little1 thick and thin2 no matter how many1 you can use them all4 ,there is no end of fun to be had with these always-on-hand1 easily found toys2 they may be made into almost everything4 ,tell your mother that you can build ,the ,parthenon if she will give you enough spools1 and see her smile at the very idea4 ,but say you are in earnest and ask her not to look until you call 8,ready40 ,then go to work and surprise her with a miniature representation of one of the most beautiful temples ever built4 ,begin by standing four spools in a row for the first side of the building1 allowing about the width of a spool between each two4 ,place eight in a row for the second1 four for the third1 and eight for the fourth side4 ,have the spools all of the same size1 that the walls may be alike and perfectly even1 because1 as you know1 the walls are to be formed of columns1 not as many as in the original1 but enough to give an idea of the ,greek temple4 ,build up the spools three deep into pillars2 then lay a piece of pasteboard on the top of the columns for a ceiling4 ,bend another piece of pasteboard lengthwise through the centre for the roof1 and stand it tent-like on top of the ceiling4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eja4 ,you can measure the correct size of the ceiling by laying a piece of pasteboard down flat on the floor along the eight-columned side of the ,parthenon to obtain the length1 and placing it flat on the floor across the four-columned side to mark the width4 ,make the roof the same length and a little wider than the ceiling to allow for the height of the bend through the centre4 ,now let your mother see ,the ,little ,greek ,temple 7,fig4 #eja7 and tell her that she must imagine a space immediately beneath the roof filled in with the most beautiful statuary she can think of1 that the spools are white marble columns and she should see1 in fancy1 another row of stately columns inside the ones you have built4 ,your mother will be greatly interested and can tell you all about the real ,parthenon1 and probably will hunt up a picture of the temple that you may see just how near you came to making the little model look like the wonderful ,parthenon1 on the ,acropolis1 in ,athens4 ,after admiring the building for a while1 pretend that a left-over spool ,is a ,venetian ,shell shot from a cannon1 and toss it gently against the roof at one end of the temple2 then see the columns totter and fall1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejb4 leaving only a portion of the ,parthenon standing1 in the same way that the real marble columns fell when the original structure was shattered and practically destroyed by the soldiers4 ,take all the spools from the ruins1 put away the ceiling and roof for future use1 and make the spools into ,a ,set of ,furniture4 ,use four for the legs of a bedstead1 place them in position and lay a piece of stiff white paper1 bent up at one end1 on ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejc4 top of the spools4 ,the bed will then be ready for the doll 7,fig4 #ejb74 ,a table can be made in a moment's time4 ,choose a large spool 7,fig4 #ejc7 and place a round ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejd4 piece of paper 7,fig4 #ejd7 on the top 7,fig4 #eje74 ,for chairs use ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eje4 spools with bent pieces of paper for seat and back4 ,make the bureau of six spools close together in two rows of three spools each and cut the top of a piece of paper with a high extension in the centre which you must bend upright for a mirror4 ,the wash-stand can be four spools quite close together covered with a piece of paper4 ,a piano is easily made1 but you must think it out for yourself4 ,use a small spool for the piano stool4 ,the ,lamp 7,fig4 #ejf7 is a spool with a little roil of white paper shoved into the hole and a circular piece of paper crimped ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejf4 around the edge for a shade4 ,unless you need the spools to use again in other ways you might paste the paper on tight and make a lamp which will not come apart1 and you could also glue the top on the table and the seats on the chairs4 ,this is not necessary1 however1 for if you are careful and do not knock against the furniture1 it will remain secure4 ,when enough furniture has been manufactured ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejg4 for the patient little dolls who have been waiting all this time1 give them a present of ,a ,wagon in which they can enjoy the fresh air4 ,cut ,fig4 #ejg from heavy paper or card-board that will fold without breaking4 ,bend all the dotted lines and cut all the heavy lines in the pattern4 ,push a burnt match1 or a wooden toothpick1 through one hub1 then through an empty spool and the second hub4 ,the spool forms the wheels4 ,screw a small pin cautiously through each of the two projecting ends ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejh4 of the match1 piercing the wood and leaving the head and point of the pin standing out 7,fig4 #ejh74 ,tie a knot in the end of a string to prevent its sliding out and thread it through the hole in the dash-board 7,fig4 #ejh74 ,help the dolls into the vehicle and take them for a ride4 ,next build ,a ,memorial ,arch 7,fig4 #eji7 something like the one which was erected in ,new ,york ,city4 ,commence with two groups of spools a short ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eji4 distance apart2 have three in each group1 two in the back and one in the front4 ,build up columns four spools high2 then lay a strip of pasteboard across from one to the other4 ,on top of the pasteboard place two more groups of smaller spools a little nearer together than the first groups4 ,make these columns two spools high and crown each with a single spool decorated with a bright-colored paper flag fastened on a slender stick pushed down in the spool4 ,at the base of the arch add three more spools on each side 7,o and ,o1 ,fig4 #eji71 and the famous structure will be completed4 ,this is not exactly like the original1 but for a spool arch it is fine1 and a spool procession will feel honored to march through it4 ,you might make bridge piers of spools and use a strip of pasteboard to form the several spans2 then the procession ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eaj4 could cross the river safely and march on the other side4 ,did you ever ,blow ,bubbles with a ,spool --beautiful bubbles1 which float and glide in the air with all the charm of clay-pipe bubbles8 ,mix strong soapsuds1 dip one end of a large spool in the water2 wet the spool1 then blow4 ,if the bubble refuses to appear1 dip the spool in the water again1 put your head down to the spool and blow a few bubbles while the spool is in the water1 then quickly raise it and try again4 ,nine times out of ten you will succeed1 and a bubble will swell out from the spool as in ,fig4 #eaj4 ,these wooden bubble-blowers last a long time1 with no danger of breaking when accidentally dropped on the floor1 and you may always find enough to provide each of your playmates with one when you meet for a trial of skill in bubble-blowing4 ,after you tire of this sport try the ,pretty ,winged ,creatures4 ,cut a butterfly 7,fig4 #eaa7 from bright-colored tissue-paper or thin writing-paper1 bend at dotted line and paste ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eaa4 on the large end of a very small cork4 ,fit the small end of the cork in top of the hole ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eab4 of an empty spool 7,fig4 #eab74 ,then blow through the spool and see the butterfly ascend rapidly to the ceiling and float down again4 ,if you could make several different colored butterflies1 you might invite some young friends to help you fill the room with the pretty winged creatures4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eac4 ,take another empty spool and stick a common wire hairpin partially into the hole1 bend the hairpin slightly down against the edge of the hole1 do the same with three more hair-pins1 and you will have a spool with a funnel-like opening of hair-pins at the top 7,fig4 #eac74 ,in the funnel place a small1 light-weight ball made of a crushed bit of bright paper wound around with thread4 ,raise the spool to your lips and blow gently 7,fig4 #ead74 ,the ball will rise and fall in mid-air1 in the same way that you have seen one of rubber dance at the top of a small fountain or jet of water4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ead4 ,spools may do duty as ,cannon1 and from them sticks be made to fly quite a distance4 ,select a large-sized spool1 cut the rim off one end1 cut two dents1 one on each side of the shaved end of the spool1 and then tie over this end a piece of black cotton elastic4 ,on each side tack a large button-mould2 these serve for wheels and also cover the fastening of the elastic4 ,paint the cannon black1 and it is ready for use4 ,insert a stick1 pull it back with the elastic1 and fire2 the stick will shoot swiftly through the air4 ,there are many other toys1 besides useful articles1 which can be made of empty spools4 ,find out by experimenting what they are1 so you may have the triumph of originality1 of making things which differ from articles made by others4 ,the empty spools do not cost money1 nor does the pasteboard from old pasteboard boxes1 yet they may furnish more genuine enjoyment than could be derived from the most expensive toys4 ,,chapter ,,xxi ,,christmas ,,decorations ,when the air is cold and frosty1 and people move quickly through the streets1 stopping to loiter only in front of the shop windows2 when groups of merry girls hurry along on their way to school1 their cheeks1 glowing rosy under the brisk greetings of a northwest wind2 when the evergreens displayed for sale upon the sidewalks send forth a spicy odor which ascends like incense and the very atmosphere seems pulsating with pleasurable excitement1 there is no need of a calendar to tell us that the holidays are close at hand4 ,as surely as a cloudless sky betokens a fine day1 so surely do these signs indicate that ,christmas will soon be with us4 ,purse-strings1 even if kept tightly drawn the rest of the year1 are loosened now1 and money is spent freely and ungrudgingly1 not only for gifts1 but also for ,christmas greens with which to decorate and beautify the home4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,some of the ,portires are ,woven in this ,style4 ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eae4 ,stars1 wreaths1 and ropes of evergreen and holly will soon adorn the interior of almost every house4 ,there are always plenty of willing hands ready and eager to help1 but there should be a head to devise a plan of decoration and to direct and superintend the carrying out of the idea2 for there is no necessity for festooning a room and hanging up stars and wreaths in the same way year after year4 ,a great variety of new designs may be made4 ,for instance1 ,fig4 #eae shows a beautiful and ,effective ,portire composed simply of ropes of evergreen fastened to the curtain pole by looping one end of a rope over the pole1 bringing it down and tying it securely to the same rope just under the pole4 ,each piece is fastened on separately and hangs loosely down4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebb4 ,fig4 #ebj is a ,star and ,shepherds ,crook grouped to form a pretty wall decoration1 the design symbolizing the star of ,bethlehem and the shepherds who1 watching their flocks by night1 heard the angel chorus 8,peace on earth1 good-will toward men40 ,make the star of five flat sticks 7laths will do71 two and a half feet long1 and put them together as shown in ,fig4 #eba2 then cover the frame with holly so that ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eba4 none of the wood is visible4 ,make the crook of a broomstick1 to which fasten with strong twine1 or flexible wire1 a piece of rather stiff wire bent in the shape of ,fig4 #ebb4 ,wrap evergreen closely around the wire and stick until every bit is covered and it looks like one piece4 ,then place the crook behind the star and wire or tie it in place4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eah4 ,fig #eaf4 ,fig4 #eaf is ,a ,silver ,star on a background of evergreen1 the rays being made of strips of tinsel which is sold for decorating ,christmas-trees4 ,the frame for the background is made like ,fig4 #eag1 and should be about two feet square4 ,over this frame stretch ropes of evergreen1 close together1 and fasten with tacks at each end4 ,cut the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eag4 star from card-board1 cover it with crumpled tin-foil and fasten to the centre of the frame with a small nail4 ,sew tinsel threads on the points of the star before it is secured to the background2 then when the star is in place spread out the tinsel in straight rays and fasten it to the frame as shown in illustration 7,fig4 #eaf74 ,fig4 #eah is a design for ,a ,sconce upon which one or more candles may be placed4 ,the tin which forms the back of the sconce reflects the light and produces quite a brilliant effect4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eai4 ,nail a block of wood one and one-half inches square to a piece of tin seven inches wide and fourteen inches long 7,fig4 #eai74 ,silver or gild a number of pine cones and hang them from the lower edge of the block2 then tack evergreen around the three sides as shown in illustration 7,fig4 #eah74 ,fasten the sconce to the wall with small nails driven through each corner of the tin and place on the bracket a candlestick containing a lighted candle4 ,illustration3 ,home-made ,christmas ,tree ,decorations4 ,illustration3 ,fig4#ebc4 ,one of the most quickly made ,festoons for a ,christmas ,tree1 and one which has never been thought of until now1 is of tin-foil1 the common kind of foil to be found at the florist's4 ,it also comes around cakes of chocolate1 rolls of cream-cheese1 and large packages of tea4 ,you can make the trimming any length desired by pasting strips o f the tin-foil together1 but1 before joining the pieces1 fold one at a time and cut slashes on each side nearly across to the opposite edge as in ,fig4 #ebc4 ,unfolded1 the strip resembles ,fig4 #ebd2 pulled at each end it opens and lengthens out into ,fig4 #ebe4 ,this decoration catches the light and glistens beautifully1 but it must be handled ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebe4 carefully and not laid down after it is stretched open4 ,as soon as ready hang the strips upon the tree1 where they will be ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebd4 safe4 ,the best plan is to make these loopings after the other decorations are finished and on the tree4 ,when the pieces are cut they are more easily handled if but a few are put together at a time before they are pulled open2 then the decoration will appear in perfect shape and look like polished shining silver hanging in delicate1 graceful festoons4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebf4 ,another effective trimming made of tin-foil is in the form of ,fringe ,ruching4 ,fig4 #ebf shows fringe partially cut2 use three layers of the foil and cut them into fringe2 then take a strong1 coarse string and twist the tin-foil fringe around and around it1 forming a rope of silvery fringe 7,fig4 #ebg74 ,an ornament that delights children1 the idea of which comes from ,germany1 is a jolly little black ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebg4 ,chimney ,sweep1 with his funny broom held high in air4 ,he wears a peaked white hat and carries a bag filled with goodies4 ,he is made entirely of prunes 7,fig4 #ebh7--one for the head1 two for the body1 one for each arm1 one for each hand1 two for each leg and one for each foot4 ,the prunes are ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebh4 strung together with a coarse needle and thread4 ,if he is too limber1 give him a backbone by running a slender stick through the back of the head and body4 ,make him a paper hat shaped like a wide-mouthed horn1 and cut out a paper face and paste it on the little man's head2 then tie the sheer white bag across his shoulders1 fasten it at the side with a pin and fill the bag with sweets2 the broom can be fashioned of a wooden toothpick with a bunch of broom-straws bound upon one end4 ,the happy child who receives the chimney sweep from the tree may devour the prunes when tired of the toy4 ,home-made ,fancy ,cakes cut in odd shapes make fine decorations and will be eaten with delight by the young people4 ,select a simple recipe1 roll the dough out flat and cut into the shapes of men1 women1 animals1 and birds4 ,when baked1 ornament the cakes with icing put on in thin1 slender lines2 in most instances outline the figures in white sugar4 ,yellow is a color which stands out well in the midst of the dark green foliage of the fir1 and ,oranges may be used to supply it4 ,a few can be hung to the tree by means of ribbons2 others may be made into pretty little ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebi4 baskets and filled with the candied sections of orange4 ,tie a piece of tape or any kind of band around an orange as a guide for cutting the rind evenly2 stick two pins on each side to designate the location and width of the handles2 then1 with the small blade of a knife carefully cut ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecj4 the handle1 keeping it the same width all the way from side to side4 ,next cut the rind along the edge of the tape 7,fig4 #ebi74 ,remove the skin1 in bits if necessary1 to avoid tearing the handle or edge of the basket4 ,work the inside juicy fruit free from the remaining rind and take it out of the basket 7,fig4 #ecj74 ,if there is difficulty in doing this1 cut the fruit out in pieces4 ,pass a narrow ribbon under the basket and up over the handle1 tie the ends2 then bind them around under and over ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eca4 the middle of the handle1 finishing with a bow-knot on top4 ,the ribbon strengthens the handle1 without it the weight of the basket when hung on the tree would cause it to break from the handle and fall4 ,fill the orange basket1 with sections of the fruit1 which have received a brittle coating by being dipped in clear1 hot1 home-made sugar candy 7,fig4 #eca74 ,make a number of pretty1 ,fancy ,boxes of pasteboard cut in different shapes and covered with various colored paper4 ,one in imitation of a large stick of peppermint candy may be made of a strip of stiff white paper ten or twelve inches long and three and one-half inches wide2 unruled writing-paper will do4 ,paste the two lengthwise edges together1 forming a cylinder4 ,around this paste a long1 narrow strip of bright-red paper1 wrapping it spirally around the white tube4 ,slash two circular pieces of paper around the edges so that the disks may fit into the ends of the roll when the slashed portions are bent forward4 ,fix one of the round pieces in the bottom of the box with mucilage4 ,when dry fill the box with small bits of candy or kernels of nuts2 then glue a loop of narrow ribbon or one of red worsted at the top1 fasten in the round cover1 and hang the box on the tree4 ,be sure to save some of the prettiest paper for ,cornucopias ,cut them according to the dark portion of ,fig4 #ecb1 and make the white-paper lining extend higher than the outside4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecc4 ,glue the two papers together1 inserting a narrow ribbon for a handle between outside and inside papers4 ,let the colored paper project a quarter of an inch beyond one side of the lining in order that the edge ,a may fit neatly over the lining ,b 7,fig4 #ecb71 avoiding unnecessary bulkiness where the two sides join4 ,ornament the cornucopias in different ways1 according to fancy and the material you happen to have for the purpose4 ,fig4 #ecc shows a gold-paper cornucopia decorated with white beading on a scarlet ground and a fancy picture in a red and white embossed frame4 ,you can also make little bright-colored cheese-cloth ,christmas ,stockings by cutting them out and sewing the edges together with far apart button-hole stitches of gay worsted4 ,when finished fill them with sugar-plums or small cakes4 ,bobbinet ,bags made small and button-holed in the same way1 with drawstrings of worsted1 look well on the tree when filled with nuts or pop-corn1 and little bird's-nests of egg-shells covered with moss and filled with eggs of sugar are charming4 ,holly-leaved ,festoons of gold paper with scarlet-paper berries will make the tree very gay4 ,cut the gilt paper into a number of squares ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecd4 7,fig4 #ecd71 fold each piece through the centre 7,fig4 #ece71 and fold again1 forming a small square 7,fig4 #ecf74 ,crease this diagonally through the centre and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ece4 cut according to the dotted lines of ,fig4 #ecg1 clipping off the point ,c to make a hole in the centre of the design4 ,open out the paper1 and it will be a conventionalized group of ,christmas holly leaves 7,fig4 #ech74 ,fold smaller squares of red paper in the same manner and cut the design shown by ,illustration3 #ge ,illustration3 #aej the dotted lines of ,fig4 #eci1 unfold and the paper will be a formal pattern of red berries 7,fig4 #edj74 ,now lay the berries 7,fig4 #edj7 out flat on the leaves 7,fig4 #ech71 adjust the two together2 then lift the berries1 put a little glue on the edge of the hole and fasten the berries on the leaves1 pasting them together at the centres only4 ,fasten another layer of leaves on the other side of the berries1 also at the centre1 putting the berries between the leaves4 ,to the tips of the large leaves on the last group 7,d1 ,e1 ,f1 and ,g--,fig4 #ech7 fasten the tips of corresponding ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eci4 leaves on another bunch2 at the centre of these glue more berries1 then leaves1 with their four tips pasted to four ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eda4 other leaf tips1 and so on1 following1 in order1 leaves1 berries1 leaves with points pasted to points of other leaves1 then berries again 7,fig4 #eda71 making the rope of golden holly as long as needed4 ,tie a strong string to a small circle of gilded card-board and run it through the holes in the festoon4 ,you can close the holly and berry garland up flat against the card-board ring by shoving the leaves and berries together down the string1 as an accordion shuts flat when one side is pushed toward the other4 ,in this way the trimming may be kept in good order and packed safely to serve again next year4 ,pop-corn ,balls look tempting on a ,christmas tree4 ,they are easy to make1 and taste very good indeed4 ,have the fire clear and hot1 with no flames1 and put in the popper at one time only enough corn to cover the bottom a single kernel deep2 shake the popper constantly while the corn is over the fire until it has all popped4 ,then boil one-quarter of ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edb4 a cupful of molasses with a little sugar until it hardens in water1 remove from the fire before it turns brittle and pour it over two quarts of corn4 ,mix well with your hands1 make into balls about the size of lemons1 suspend the sweet1 white ornaments from the twigs1 and use the remaining corn for a different decoration4 ,string a lot of the flower-like kernels with a large needle and strong thread1 loop the strands from branch to branch1 and the snowy ropes will lighten up the foliage beautifully 7,fig4 #edb74 ,strings of ,red ,cranberries with knots of narrow red satin ribbon tied here and there on the strands1 make a fine ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edc4 decoration4 ,peanuts wrapped in yellow1 red1 white1 light blue1 and pale-green fringed tissue-paper 7,fig4 #edc7 and tied on pendent lengths of string1 three or four to each 7,fig4 #edd71 and attached at varying lengths to the limbs of the tree are a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edd4 splendid decoration1 for these peanut kisses give quite a gala appearance to the tree4 ,do not forget to have some form of ,jewelry for the ,tree bracelets or necklaces--not of gleaming precious stones nor yet of gold or silver1 but of toothsome nut kernels and delicious1 dark rich raisins4 ,with needle and strong thread string first a peanut1 then a raisin1 a peanut1 a raisin1 an almond1 a raisin1 a filbert1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ede4 a raisin1 and so on1 using as many kinds of nuts as you deem best 7,fig4 #ede74 ,the girl or boy receiving this necklace will be charmed and later may devour the queer beads one by one as they are pulled from the string4 ,a simple decoration is made of ,colored ,paper ,chains the first link being formed of a narrow strip of paper pasted together into a ring2 the next link is a piece of paper passed through the first ring before the two ends are joined4 ,each succeeding link of the chain is made in a similar manner4 ,rosy apples are acceptable as ornaments and are always to be found on the tree in ,germany1 the land that first introduced the ,christmas tree to other countries4 ,there is one style of ornamental gift which in ,germany must hang on the tree until ,new ,year's ,day--the ,gilded ,english ,walnut 7,fig4 #edf74 ,the preparation of these can be made a delightful frolic if there are several young persons in the secret4 ,illustration3 #abe ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edg4 ,crack open the nuts so there will be two perfect half shells to each 7,fig4 #edg74 ,inside the empty nut place a motto or device which will tell the fortune1 or part of it1 of the recipient of the gift4 ,ideas will come to you as the work goes on4 ,for a hint to help a little at the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edi4 start1 cut two hearts of red paper and fasten them together with a dart made of a pin and piece of white paper 7,fig4 #edh74 ,this denotes that the girl or boy who gets it will be the first to marry4 ,fig4 #edi1 the water-color brush1 means that the happy lad or lassie to whose lot it falls will be an artist4 ,fig4 #eej signifies ability to appreciate music4 ,fig4 #eea ensures ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eej4 plenty of worldly goods4 ,one suggestion gives rise to another1 and you will think of more than enough for all the empty nutshells4 ,after the 8fortune0 is placed within the nut1 glue the halves firmly together4 ,when dry1 work a tack in the end where the stem grew1 twisting it slowly that the shell may not split or break4 ,when the tack seems firmly in place1 gild the entire nut1 including the tack2 tie a strong string on this and hang the 8fortune0 on the tree4 ,as ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eea4 all the nuts look exactly alike1 no one can tell which is which--not even those who made them will know who receives the different 8fortunes0 until the nuts are opened and the secrets revealed4 ,most of the ideas given are for a daytime ,christmas tree where lights are not used4 ,if candles are employed1 no paper festoons can be placed on the tree4 ,lights are always dangerous1 and the tree may be quite brilliant without them4 ,toys and useful little articles1 such as you can make as presents for all the members of the family1 big and little1 and for friends1 will surely add to the interest and appearance of the tree4 ,,chapter ,,xxii ,,christmas ,,devices 8,christmas gift6 ,christmas gift6 ,ah1 ,i've caught you6 ,hand over my present60 ,with a gay laugh the children exchange this salutation1 without a thought of the request ever being granted1 but simply for the fun of being the first to call out the ,christmas greeting4 ,sometimes the forfeit is paid1 usually with a handful of nuts or candy1 a pretty trifle or anything the captive happens to have convenient at the moment4 ,the giver enjoys the fun fully as much as the recipient1 and with a hop1 skip1 and jump departs in hopes of likewise finding a fellow-playmate or some member of the family off guard1 that she may1 in turn1 be the first to wish a 8,merry ,christmas0 and claim a gift4 ,an ,all-day ,christmas ,pie is a charming device for delivering gifts intended for one person1 and the fun and expectancy last the entire day4 ,cover the outside of a new tin pan with plaited white tissue-paper1 and paste the paper along the top and over the bottom edges4 ,decide on the number of gifts you intend the pie to contain1 and cut a corresponding number of slits in the circular piece of white tissue-paper which is to form the top crust 7,fig4 #eeb74 ,wrap each present in a bright-colored piece of tissue-paper1 and tie with a narrow ribbon ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeb4 of like hue 7,fig4 #eec72 be sure to fasten the knot on top of the package securely1 so there will be no possibility of its slipping from the parcel when it is jerked out of its bed of bran4 ,fill the pan with bran or sawdust1 arrange the gifts on top in the order you wish1 then put more bran over the parcels1 heaping it in the centre2 thread each ribbon through its respective slit in the cover and bring the cover ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eec4 cautiously down over the pudding without tearing4 ,gather the edge a little at a time with your fingers1 and paste it down over the sides 7,fig4 #eed74 ,paste a double-edged fringe of white tissue-paper around the top edge of the pie4 ,to do this1 fold several ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eed4 slips of paper1 as in ,fig4 #eee2 fold again through the centre and cut in a fringe 7,fig4 #eef74 ,open the fringe1 gather it in the centre with thread and needle1 and at short distances sew on tiny bells2 then fasten the fringe in place 7,fig4 #eeg74 ,puncture a hole with a large needle in the centre of the top of the pie1 and insert a twig of holly4 ,cut as many small squares of writing-paper as you have ribbons1 label each with the hour when the present ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eef4 is to be drawn1 slip them on the ribbons near the ends1 and below each tie a little silver bell1 as shown in illustration 7,fig4 #eeg74 ,if there are to be only three packages1 let one be drawn in the morning1 another at noon1 and the last in the evening4 ,if more1 distribute the gifts as evenly as possible through the day4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeg4 ,the ,magic ,fireplace is another means of delivering the ,christmas gifts1 and the delight of the children when they see their presents come tumbling down the chimney in a way they have only dreamed of1 will repay the thought expended in preparing the surprise4 ,illustration ,the ,magic ,christmas ,fireplace4 ,two wooden packing boxes1 one about four feet square and a foot and a half deep1 the other somewhat smaller but of nearly the same depth1 form the framework of the fireplace4 ,stand the large box on its side--the longest side if the box is not exactly square--and the smaller box within it as shown by ,fig4 #eeh4 ,remove the top pieces of both boxes 7,a ,b1 ,fig4 #eeh71 and over the top of the small box tack a piece of doubled light-weight wrapping paper4 ,at each end of this false cover fasten securely a piece of strong twine1 then puncture two small holes near the centre of the paper and pass the ends of the twine through them1 drawing it down as shown by letters ,c ,d1 ,fig4 #eei4 ,saw the board1 which was taken from the top of the small box1 into two pieces1 and place them in a slanting position reaching from the top edge of the small box to the upper corners of the large one 7letters ,e ,f1 ,fig4 #efj74 ,the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeh4 boards are kept from slipping by small nails driven half way into the edge of the small box4 ,cover the spaces at the sides and top1 between the two boxes1 with heavy brown wrapping paper1 tacking it smoothly down along the edges4 ,this paper should be marked to represent bricks4 ,pile a few sticks of charred wood on the inside hearth ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eei4 and1 to make it appear that they are still smouldering1 tack red tinsel paper upon them here and there4 ,into the receptacle at the top of the mantel 7letter ,g1 ,fig4 #efj7 place all the presents1 resting them upon the paper top of the small box4 ,things ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efj4 that are easily broken should be covered with soft wrappings1 for in the grand climax1 when the toys roll pell-mell down into the fireplace1 the fragile articles might come to grief4 ,when the last package has been stowed away1 replace the top of the large box4 ,decorate the completed fireplace with evergreen1 and bring the two strings1 ,c and ,d1 which hang down upon the hearth1 outside1 looping them back over tacks at either side of the fireplace1 as shown in ,fig4 #efj4 ,at the appointed time the group of eager children will stand and gaze with awe at the wonderful and mysterious fireplace1 which1 like a fairy house1 has shot up in a night4 ,two persons1 one on either side1 must grasp the strings tightly1 and simultaneously give a pull4 ,with a ripping1 tearing sound the paper gives way and whiz6 bump6 bang6 the toys come tumbling down1 rolling and bounding out on the floor4 ,because it is ,christmas we find ourselves longing to render little services1 to make others happy and cause their eyes to brighten and sparkle with pleasure1 for this is the season of giving as well as receiving1 and the privilege belongs to all4 ,if there is a little convalescent in your family or among your acquaintances1 one who will not be allowed to share the ,christmas dinner1 prepare for her a ,christmas ,tray ,you can make it very attractive4 ,have a ,christmas tree for a centre-piece 7,fig4 #efa71 a very modest yet charming little affair--only a wee tree fashioned from a branch of boxwood1 beautified with homemade toys and decorations cut from gilt and bright-colored papers4 ,use a large-sized button-mould for the tree stand2 push the end of the stem into the hole in the centre of the mould1 and the tree will stand alone4 ,should you have no boxwood1 take any green twig and turn it into a miniature ,christmas tree by trimming off the ends of the branches until the little tree somewhat resembles a cone in shape4 ,it will require only a few moments to ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efa4 make the tree1 and the sick child will exclaim with pleasure at the sight of it4 ,a house with ,santa ,claus climbing down the chimney 7,fig4 #efb7 is1 in reality1 a piece of prosaic bread and butter transformed4 ,after spreading the bread with butter1 cut out the door with a sharp1 small-bladed knife2 then the two windows1 and the chimney4 ,procure a jolly little paper ,santa ,claus and fasten him in place by making an incision in the top of the chimney and inserting one leg of the figure2 serve this on as pretty a plate as you can find1 preferably a decorated one4 ,a ,christmas pie is another form of bread and butter4 ,cut the shape out with a large-sized tin biscuit-cutter1 and after buttering the bread mark it into wedge-shaped pieces4 ,cut a slice or two 7,fig4 #efc71 leaving the rest to be cut by the child4 ,if permissible1 a little white sugar sprinkled over the top of the pie will enhance its appearance4 ,layer ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efb4 jelly cake is made of two round pieces of bread and butter1 spread lightly1 with a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efc4 layer of chicken jelly placed between and over the top of the cake4 ,odd designs are always attractive to children and may be introduced in ,serving ,toast ,make the toast very carefully1 allowing the bread to turn only a light brown on both sides1 and keep it hot between two hot plates4 ,toast should be eaten immediately after it comes from the fire2 it loses its delicacy ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efd4 ,illustration3 #aej by being scorched or served warm or stale instead of fresh and hot4 ,after the rest of the meal is ready on the tray and the two plates are heated1 set several tin cake-cutters in the oven to heat2 then make the toast with a fork1 not a toaster1 one piece at a time1 and as each is done1 cut it while hot into queer forms with the warm cake-cutters4 ,arrange the pieces on one of the hot plates and cover them with the other4 ,the child will be entertained by the fanciful shapes 7,figs4 #efd1 #efe1 #eff71 and eat them with a relish4 ,in place of the family roast1 a lamb chop will probably have to do duty as the ,pice ,de ,rsistance ,select the best cut and broil the chop skilfully over a clear fire4 ,let it be well done but not burned2 sprinkle with a ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efg4 little salt and pepper4 ,have ready some fringed tissue-paper and wind it around the end of the chop2 decorate with a pretty sprig of ,christmas green tied with a narrow ribbon 7,fig4 #efg74 ,eggs of blanc-mange 7,fig4 #efh7 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efh4 are made by using empty eggshells as moulds4 ,the shells must be wet on the inside when the blanc-mange is poured into them to harden4 ,if it is best for the patient to have only a little blanc-mange1 mould in small shells and serve one or two4 ,illustration ,jelly is acceptable and can be given in most cases of illness4 ,instead of using a regular mould pour the liquid jelly into a wineglass1 and if the white of an egg has previously been beaten up with the jelly1 it will rise in a white foam at the top of the glass2 after the jelly has hardened the resemblance will be so close it will be difficult to believe the glass does not contain wine 7,fig4 #efi74 ,the child will enjoy this little make-believe4 ,if fresh ,apples ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egj4 are allowed1 cut them as ,southern people cut their watermelons 7,fig4 #egj74 ,slide the knife-blade in the side of the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ega4 apple1 and cut downward1 making a slanting outward incision about an inch and a half long2 draw out the knife1 insert it again at the top of the first cut and make another slit in the opposite direction1 the two slits forming the letter ,a without its cross piece4 ,again take out the knife and1 commencing at the bottom of the second cut1 bring the knife upward and outward1 as in the right side of the letter ,v2 continue cutting these points until the last one meets the first1 being careful to push the knife to the centre of the fruit at each cut4 ,when finished pull the two halves of the apple apart4 ,plum pudding the child cannot have1 but a fine baked apple will answer the purpose and may be made almost as attractive4 ,select a baking apple free from all flaws1 wash it well and 8bake to a turn02 serve steaming hot1 with a sprig of holly in the top 7,fig4 #ega74 ,,chapter ,,xxiii ,,picture ,,writing ,,and ,,sign ,,language ,the next best thing to seeing one's friends is hearing from them1 and the more interesting the letter the greater the enjoyment1 particularly when the communication is intended to be passed around the entire home circle4 ,there is a delightful way in which to express yourself differently from ordinary writing1 a method used by the early ,egyptians1 called picture writing4 ,the ,egyptian pictures were not at all like those made by modern artists2 their representations were crude and unfinished1 yet they answered very well for the people and the times4 ,you have advantages over those ancient people inasmuch as you need not even attempt to draw the designs4 ,all that is necessary for you to do is merely to look over the newspaper and magazine advertisements1 select the prints needed1 and after cutting out and pasting them on a sheet of paper1 with a few connecting words between1 you will have produced an odd1 interesting letter1 and the work will be pure fun4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egb4 ,fig4 #egb gives an idea of such a letter1 supposed to have been written on ,thanksgiving4 ,try to read it4 ,for fear you might not quite catch the meaning1 here it is interpreted for you3 ,dear ,grandmother1 ,aunts1 ,uncles1 and ,cousins3 ,i send you greetings4 ,i know there will be a cooking of tarts1 turkey1 puddings1 and lots of good things4 ,i like sweetmeats and fruit best4 ,please use the camera and send me a picture of the family while at dinner1 and of my cousins standing in a row4 ,wishing you a jolly time1 8,as ever1 your 0,,hopeful ,,one4 ,this is intended only as a suggestion2 if you can write your letter entirely with pictures1 without the aid of words1 it will be much better4 ,there is another method you might employ2 take the well-known ,symbols and compose your missive of these4 ,such as the dove1 meaning peace1 gentleness2 anchor1 hope2 ark1 refuge2 key1 explanation2 chain1 bondage2 star1 promise2 lamb1 innocence2 scales1 justice2 horn of plenty1 prosperity2 heart1 love2 shepherd's crook1 protection1 and hour-glass1 time4 ,the list is much longer1 but enough has been given to explain the scheme2 other designs may be added as needed1 but use only those whose significance is well established and commonly understood4 ,flower ,writing makes a charming letter1 the blossoms being placed in rows according to their meaning as given in the language of flowers4 ,compose a sentence of white clover1 oats1 and balm1 and it will read3 8,i promise 7white clover7 music 7oats7 and social intercourse 7balm740 ,this might form part of an invitation to your house-party4 ,illustration3 ,come ,illustration3 to dinner ,illustration3 go out in a boat ,illustration3 and return4 ,illustration3 to my house ,illustration3 we will make footsteps ,illustration3 and fish ,fig4 #egc4 ,illustration3 to-day ,illustration3 for the water ,illustration3 then have a swim ,for a regular ,indian ,powwow letter you must do as the red man does and write in ,indian signs1 which are usually rudely drawn figures meaning much to our copper-colored brother1 but often requiring ingenuity on the part of the white man to translate4 ,some of the best examples are to be seen on sandstone in ,dakota ,county1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egd4 ,neb41 where there are hundreds of sketches4 ,one of the most distinguished of ,indian artists or historians is said to have been ,lone ,dog1 of ,yankton1 ,dak41 who made most of his pictures on skins4 ,neither stones nor skins will answer your purpose2 ordinary paper is more convenient and will be as fully appreciated if you use thought and care in drawing and composing your message4 ,make simple1 rude pictures of different objects1 borrowing the ,indian's idea but adapting it to your needs4 ,fig4 #egc gives an example of a girl's powwow letter4 ,you may invent as many designs as you choose1 that will be part of the fun of ,indian writing4 ,fig4 #egd shows some of the signs needed4 ,a ,letter of ,colors is something entirely new2 it should be composed of thoughts embodied in colors1 without alphabet1 words1 or pictures--nothing but brush strokes of delicate pinks1 tender greens1 soft grays1 deep orange1 rich purples1 and all the many and varied tones1 tints1 shades1 and hues known to man4 ,the following example1 being fully interpreted1 will initiate you in color meanings and composition3 ,light ,scarlet4 ,my ,dear ,friend3 ,light tone of ,drab4 ,blue4 ,red brown4 yellow4 you have thought the truth ,my interest in ,i am glad out ,scarlet red4 ,myrtle green4 ,orange4 ,different tones and friendship ,nature is gaining of yellow4 for strength4 ,i travel miles ,variety of color flecks in rows4 for the flowers4 ,yellow pink4 ,your enthusiastic ,scarlet4 ,friend4 ,the name signed at the close of the letter need be the only writing4 ,a list is given of the meaning of some of the colors1 but you will probably need more2 work out the extra combinations for yourself4 ,the system being once understood it will not be a difficult task4 ,rich red--,love or loved one4 ,red brown--,interest in or for4 ,orange--,strength1 force4 ,indigo--,wisdom4 ,blue--,truth4 ,green--,life1 freshness1 youth4 ,yellow pink--,enthusiasm4 ,blue pink--,politeness4 ,gray--,doubts1 fears4 ,white--,intelligence1 light1 innocence4 ,black--,ignorance1 darkness1 night4 ,bright yellow--,joy1 gladness1 sunlight1 day4 ,drab--,thought4 ,scarlet--,friendship4 ,myrtle green--,nature4 ,different tones of yellow grouped together--,travel1 motion4 ,brown in solid squares--,rocks4 ,blue and green in horizontal lines--,water4 ,brown and green in horizontal lines--,summer4 ,brown and black in horizontal lines--,winter4 ,color dashes in wedge shape1 variety denoted by colors used--,birds4 ,pink--,acquaintance4 ,mingled flecks in a row of any color or colors with green denotes one or more variety of flowers4 ,green in long perpendicular dashes--,trees4 ,tints may include the personal pronouns ,i1 my1 me1 or mine4 ,shades may include the pronoun you or your4 ,,part ,,ii ,,what ,a ,,girl ,,can ,,do ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,illustration3 ,,galatea ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,,chapter ,,xxiv ,,statuary ,,tableaux ,in the first place the statues must be white--not nearly white1 but very white--flesh1 hair1 and costume2 then the background must be black1 a dead1 lustreless black4 ,given these two requisites any figure1 or group of figures1 will look like statuary2 and when care and pains are taken in the posing and draping and the proper light is thrown on them1 the living1 breathing1 warm flesh and blood so closely resembles the cold1 lifeless marble1 it is difficult to realize one is not looking at statues carved by the hand of man4 ,the ,stage ,arrange the background on the stage in the form of a three-fold screen1 with sides slanting outward to the front4 ,when possible1 the top of this space should also be covered with the black material1 slanting up to the front2 in this way the statues are entirely boxed in1 the only opening being the front of the stage4 ,that is1 the only apparent opening1 for between the back and side panels a space about one foot wide must be left for side-lights1 and on this account the back should extend at least one foot beyond each side-panel4 ,the ,lights ,a strong calcium light directly in front of the stage1 though some distance from it1 is best for amateur tableaux1 and the side-lights at the back need be used only when it is imperative that no shadows shall be cast on the background1 as in the case of the armless statues4 ,with the cross-lights thrown behind the statue1 the black-covered arms melt into the black background with no shadows to betray their presence4 ,tall piano lamps are best for this purpose4 ,again1 the front light may be placed nearer one side of the audience-room1 and a pleasing effect of light and shade on the statuary itself be produced4 ,pedestals ,place a platform about one foot high1 and of a size to hold the largest group1 in the centre of the stage1 and leave it there as a base for all other pedestals4 ,packing boxes of various sizes1 chosen to suit the statues1 make excellent pedestals1 and these1 as well as the platform1 must be smoothly covered with white cotton cloth4 ,illustration3 ,the costume for almost any statue ,costumes4 ,pure white ,canton flannel is the best material to use1 as it drapes most beautifully and takes the true sculptor's folds4 ,it should not1 however1 be too heavy in weight1 else it will be stiff and unmanageable4 ,the ,greek or classical costume is almost the only kind you will need1 and it is made simply of two breadths of the canton flannel sewed together and fastened at the shoulders2 the slits for the arms being left open nearly to the waist4 ,under this is worn a sleeveless waist of the same material4 ,a cord tied around and just under the bust1 and the dress pulled up to bag over gives one style of costume2 tied around the waist and bagging down far below it1 gives another1 and both under the bust and around the waist1 still another4 ,the dress should be long enough to allow of all this pulling up1 and if too long when the statue is mounted on her pedestal1 it can be turned up underneath2 no hem is necessary on these garments4 ,an extra piece of drapery is almost always a part of the costume1 and is used for wrapping around the figure to give the narrow effect at ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ege4 the feet2 this should be about two yards long and of two breadths of the material sewed together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egf4 ,make the sandals of white insoles or two pieces of heavy card-board1 cut to fit the bottom of the foot1 extending half an inch beyond all around4 ,cover the card-board with white material 7,fig4 #ege71 and sew together as in ,fig4 #egf4 ,fig4 #egg shows a simple and modified form of sandal4 ,cut the side and back pieces from the white material like ,fig4 #egh1 and sew them to the soles as in the ,fig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egg4 #egg4 ,also sew white tape to the points of toe and heel pieces1 as shown in the diagram1 leaving free the two ends at the ankle for tying4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egh4 ,mop-rope1 the loosely twisted rope used for floor-mops1 is the material from which to fashion imitation ,marble ,locks4 ,make a tightly fitting white cap to entirely cover the hair1 as a foundation for the wig4 ,in order to have the parting of the hair directly in the middle of the head1 put the cap on and1 with a lead-pencil1 mark the desired line4 ,the rope must be then untwined and the middle of each strand laid across the top and stitched down along the pencil line1 half the length falling on one side1 half on the other4 ,after this the wig can be donned1 the hair arranged and pinned in place according to taste or the fashion selected1 and then stitched securely to the cap4 ,when the hair is done up high and a side or back view is shown1 it is necessary to sew the ends of the rope along the bottom edge of the cap at the sides and back1 as the locks are drawn up from there4 ,a narrow border of raw cotton sewed entirely around the edge of the cap so that it will extend a trifle over the forehead and neck1 does away with the dark edge of hair which it is1 otherwise1 almost impossible to hide4 ,when only a front view is desired1 the back of the cap need not be covered with the rope4 ,men's and children's wigs are made on the same principle1 be their hair long or short4 ,the face1 arms1 neck1 and hands must be as white as it is possible to make them4 ,face powder applied in the ordinary way will not give the required whiteness1 and it is easily rubbed off4 ,here is a professional actor's recipe which is perfectly harmless and will make the ,flesh ,like ,marble3 ,take one ounce of white-zinc powder and three ounces of glycerine and rose-water--two-thirds glycerine1 one-third rose-water4 ,shake the glycerine and rose-water together1 mixing them well1 then add the ounce of white-zinc powder and shake again until thoroughly mixed4 ,apply with a sponge and let it dry1 then smooth it with your hand and powder with any pure face powder4 ,to ,remove ,first wash with warm water1 then rub with cold-cream4 ,wipe the cream off with a soft linen cloth1 after which powder the skin to prevent chapping4 ,always allow plenty of time for making the flesh absolutely white1 as this can not be done in a hurry4 ,subjects for ,tableaux ,it is a wise plan to choose a subject already presented by some sculptor and copy his work as closely as possible1 for the artist has given much thought and study to the posing of his figures and the lines of his drapery1 and one can be sure the artistic effect will be good2 or a subject may be found in some painting which will be suitable for statuary1 and this also will have the advantage of having been designed by an artist4 ,most of the tableaux should be selected in this way1 but a few variations1 where a surprise for the audience is prepared1 or seemingly impossible effects are produced1 gives piquancy and charm to the entertainment4 ,the ,armless ,bust ,the effect of armless or mutilated statues which1 to the audience1 appear almost miraculous1 may be produced by simply covering the parts of the body1 supposed to be missing1 with dull black cloth4 ,everyone knows that by covering one of the front teeth with a piece of black sticking-plaster the perfect effect of a lost tooth is given1 and it is on the same principle that limbs are cut off or figures decapitated in statuary tableaux4 ,the illustration of the armless bust shows how the arms are made to disappear by drawing over them a pair of black ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egi4 ,illustration3 ,,in ,,this ,,manner ,,make ,,the ,,armless ,,bust4 stockings1 or long1 narrow bags4 ,in this tableau the side-lights must be used to prevent any shadow from being cast upon the background2 the lights must shine behind the statue1 not on it4 ,the pedestal is made of a packing box1 with the top cut out to admit the figure1 as shown in the diagram 7,fig4 #egi74 ,a fine color effect is produced when this pedestal is covered with dark red material1 upon which rests1 to all appearances1 the pure white marble bust4 ,in covering the top of the pedestal cut the cloth to extend around over the opening at the back1 and it can be fastened down after the bust is ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehj4 in place4 ,for this statue the front light must not be too strong and its full force should be concentrated on the head and bust1 leaving the arms in shadow4 ,another quite wonderful effect is that of the ,portrait ,medallion ,to produce this set a frame up near the front of the stage1 over which is tightly stretched the black material of the background4 ,in the centre sew a piece of white cloth cut in an elliptical shape1 about two and a half feet long by two feet wide 7,fig4 #ehj74 ,make a laurel wreath of white paper leaves fastened on wire stems and tie at the bottom a bow of white ribbon4 ,sew or pin the wreath upon the black ,illustration3 ,portrait ,medallion4 background1 near enough to allow its inner leaves to lap over the white4 ,cut in the medallion1 and through the background1 a hole the shape of1 but smaller than1 the head and bust4 ,this should be experimented with on other material before the medallion is cut1 so that no mistake be made4 ,the medallion must be placed at a height easily reached by the standing figure of the person posing for the portrait4 ,the head is thrust through the hole1 then turned to present a profile view1 while the shoulder is held back that it may not protrude too far through the opening4 ,the illustration shows the effect of this tableau4 ,an ,egyptian ,statue is an innovation in statuary tableaux which will receive a warm welcome1 but1 like the others1 it must be well carried out to be a success4 ,the figure and everything pertaining to it must be of one color1 not white this time1 but gray1 all gray1 to represent stone4 ,study the pictures of old ,egyptian statues2 notice the costumes1 and copy one carefully in gray canton flannel4 ,gray stockings must be worn and gray sandals1 or the sandals may be omitted4 ,paint the face1 arms1 and neck with gray pastel1 rubbing it on lavishly2 this has been used without any harmful effect and is easily washed off with warm water and pure soap4 ,cover the hair with the typical ,egyptian headdress 7,fig4 #eha71 made of a square of the gray material4 ,make ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bha4--,side ,view4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bha4--;,front ,view4 a seat for the statue of a box which should be only wide enough to be comfortable and of a height to allow of a footstool under the feet4 ,nail a board the width of the box to the back to form a back for the seat and let it be high enough to extend a few inches above the statue's head when she is seated4 ,cover the chair and footstool with the gray canton flannel4 ,the ,egyptian statue must be stiff and formal1 seated on her chair as in ,fig4 #eha1 with hands on knees and feet together4 ,the entire absence of graceful curves of body or drapery makes a charming contrast to the other statues4 ,in statuary tableaux the eyes must be kept closed1 except in the tableau of ,galatea1 and the eyelids should be as white as the rest of the face4 ,the eyelids of the ,egyptian statue must1 of course1 be gray4 ,pygmalion and ,galatea ,this tableau includes the sculptor as well as the statue1 and requires a little acting on the part of the statue--herein lies the surprise4 ,the tableau illustrates the old story of the ,greek sculptor ,pygmalion1 who fell in love with the statue he had made1 and prayed to the gods to endow it with life4 ,his ,illustration3 ,first ,position4 ,illustration3 ,second ,position4 prayer is granted and the statue1 ,galatea1 gradually awakens4 ,when the curtain is drawn aside1 ,pygmalion1 dressed in ,greek costume of brilliant colors 7to contrast with the white statue71 is seen kneeling with arms extended at the feet of ,galatea1 who stands in the pose shown in 8first position0 of the illustration4 ,pygmalion maintains his position without moving while ,galatea awakens4 ,standing1 as in 8first position10 with bent head1 closed eyes and clasped hands1 the right foot a little in advance of the other1 the weight of the body resting principally upon the left1 ,galatea slowly1 very slowly1 unclasps her hands and gradually separates them4 ,the left hand moves out from her side while the right hand1 at the same time1 is lifted outward and upward to her throat1 8second position40 ,keeping the left arm extended a little from her side1 the hand slightly raised and fingers bent1 she continues to raise her right hand until it covers her eyes1 at the same time swinging her body around1 bearing the weight heavily on the left foot1 until the 8third position0 is assumed4 ,holding ,illustration3 ,third ,position4 ,illustration3 ,fourth ,position4 this pose for an instant1 she turns slowly back again1 lifting her hand until it shades her eyes2 she then raises her chin and bends slightly forward as she opens her eyes and beholds ,pygmalion4 ,this is the 8fourth position40 ,again she pauses for an instant1 then by slow degrees the left arm is raised while the right one is lowered and the hands are held out in welcome1 as in the 8fifth and last position40 ,at no time must the arms form parallel lines2 even at the last the extended arms should be bent very slightly outward at the elbows4 ,the two sharp angles1 formed by bending the elbows in the same direction at the same moment1 should be especially avoided4 ,at all times during the awakening ,galatea must be so posed that her movements might1 at any moment1 be stopped and she would ,illustration3 ,fifth ,position4 be found standing in a graceful and charming position4 ,success in this can only be obtained1 and little awkwardnesses avoided1 by practice before a large mirror1 where every movement and every curve of the body may be seen4 ,no quick or sudden motion must mar the beautifully slow awakening2 all should be as gradual as the unfolding of the petals of a rose until the climax is reached1 where ,galatea extends her arms to the waiting and expectant ,pygmalion and the curtain is dropped4 ,there is no doubt of the success of the tableau when this little bit of silent acting is well done1 and it makes an excellent winding-up piece to an evening's entertainment4 ,,chapter ,,xxv ,,witchery ,assured of their welcome1 laughter1 jollity1 and mystery all attend the ,halloween frolics which are given up to sports with kale1 apples1 nuts1 mirror1 etc4 ,these ordinarily commonplace articles are claimed1 on this eventful eve1 to be touched with magic1 endowed with the power of prophecy and enabled to tell of wonderful adventure or fortune which will befall any one who puts their virtues to the test4 ,and it is ,halloween1 of all the nights in the year1 that is best loved by the sprightly little fairies1 gnomes1 and elves1 who delight in sallying forth from their homes under stones and in old hollow trees to play pranks on us poor mortals4 ,the witches also are out1 flying through the air to their annual dance1 on their queer steeds1 either cats or broomsticks4 ,james ,hogg's poem1 8,the ,witch of ,fife10 gives a comical description of the witch who flew out of the lum 7chimney7 and left her husband1 who soon followed with his coat 8waflling in the wynde40 ,the witches' rides would not be apt to injure old broomsticks1 but should you happen to see any cats the morning after ,halloween1 notice how tired the poor creatures look after carrying the witches all night6 ,that is why the ,scotch lads and lassies pity the pussies4 ,of course1 there are really no fairies1 genii1 or witches2 they are all only 8make-believe40 ,nor are we to put any faith in ,halloween ,fortunes1 for these are merely tried to furnish sport for the time and to make us merry2 a hearty laugh of itself is good fortune4 ,often it is the best kind of medicine4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehb4 ,whether you will be ,rich or ,poor can be ascertained with three saucers4 ,fill one with salt1 which1 being white1 stands for silver2 another with cornmeal1 signifying gold1 its color being yellow2 while the third remains empty 7,fig4 #ehb74 ,if you dip your left hand into the cornmeal1 you will be very wealthy2 if into the salt1 you will be comfortable1 but lack the luxuries of life2 if into the empty saucer1 you will be obliged to work hard for a living4 ,feather ,tests ,to foretell the complexion of your future mate1 select three of the softest and fluffiest feathers you can obtain4 ,if none is handy1 take a pillow and rip open the end seam about an inch or so1 making the hole scarcely large enough to admit of your pulling out a few feathers with the thumb and forefinger4 ,the little opening can be sewed up again in a moment's time4 ,on the bottom end of each downy messenger fasten a small piece of paper2 a drop of paste or mucilage will be sufficient to gum all three in place4 ,write the word 8,blond0 on one paper2 on another1 8,brunette10 and on the last1 8,medium40 ,label the papers before gluing them on the feathers 7,fig4 #ehc74 ,with your right hand daintily hold up one feather1 by its top1 in front of you1 and gently send it flying with a puff of breath4 ,do the same with the next1 and also with the last one2 the feather landing nearest to you denotes the complexion of your true love4 ,to make the test sure1 try the charm three times1 but be careful not to use too much force when blowing the feathers4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehc4 ,for the ,touchstone ,charm seven small1 clean stones are required--six of the common grayish color1 the seventh white4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehd4 ,all should be as nearly as possible the same in shape and size 7,fig4 #ehd74 ,after being blindfolded and having the position of the stones changed on the platter1 describe a circle in the air three times with your left hand1 at the last bringing the forefinger down on one of the stones4 ,try the charm three times4 ,should you touch the white one twice your life will be full of light and happiness2 if the gray twice falls to your share there will be shadows with the light4 ,new ,friends ,old friends are treasures and cannot be too highly valued1 but new ones also frequently prove to be added joys in our lives4 ,to determine how many new friends you will find in the ensuing year1 count the number of buttons on the dress or coat of the first person the fairies send to you after twelve o'clock at noon on ,october #cast4 ,should someone enter whose clothing shows no buttons1 you will be obliged to rest contented with the friends you now possess1 as no more will be added to the list until the expiration of a year4 ,naming the ,bedposts ,before going to sleep on the last night of ,october name each of the four bedposts1 the first being 8,art02 the second1 8,science02 the third1 8,literature02 and the fourth1 8,business40 ,the post you see first upon awakening will denote the pursuit in which you will delight4 ,should your eyes first rest upon the post called 8,art10 many beautiful things are in store for you4 ,if the 8,science0 post is first seen1 you will rejoice in deep learning1 etc4 ,be sure not to get the posts confused2 remember the order in which they have been named4 ,witch ,writing ,should you wish to know how any one of your friends may feel toward you1 here is the test4 ,write your name out in full 7,fig4 #ehe--we will suppose the name to be yours74 ,under your name write that of a friend 7,fig4 #ehf71 then carefully cancel all letters in the coupled names which are ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehe4 the same 7,fig4 #ehg74 ,let us go over the first two names that we may thoroughly understand how it is done4 ,take the first letter in the first name--,k2 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehf4 ,fig4 #ehf4 you will not find the same letter in either ,mary or ,hallon4 ,take the next letter--a2 there it is in ,mary and in ,hallon4 ,we will cross out all the a's4 ,there are no t's in the lower name1 so we go on to the next letter--h--which is an initial in ,hallon and again occurs in ,smith4 ,cancel them all4 ,there are no e's1 but we find r and n in the other name4 ,mark them both4 ,i is not repeated in the lower name1 and in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehh4 ,smith we find only m 7h being previously cancelled71 which is the first letter in ,mary4 ,cross them out1 then repeat aloud these potent words3 8,friendship--,love--,indifference--,hat e10 giving each cancelled letter one word in the magic order 7,fig4 #ehh74 ,in this way you find that the girls love each other4 ,try your name with a number of others4 ,the results constantly vary4 ,couple two friends' names together and put them to the test4 ,home or ,travel ,apple-seeds1 too1 will act as charms4 ,stick one on each eyelid and name one 8,home0 and the other 8,travel40 ,if the seed named 8,travel0 stays on longer than the other1 you will go on a journey before the year expires4 ,if 8,home0 clings better1 you will remain at home4 ,again1 take all the apple-seeds1 place them on the back of your outspread left hand and with your loosely clenched right hand strike the palm of the left4 ,this will cause some1 if not all1 of the seeds to fall4 ,those left on your hand show the number of ,letters you will receive in the coming fortnight4 ,should all the seeds drop1 you must wait patiently for your mail4 ,your ,fate ,gather up all the seeds and make them do duty again4 ,there must be twelve of the little brown charms4 ,put them carefully to one side while you cut twelve slips of blank paper exactly alike and on one side of each write the name of a friend4 ,turn them all over with the blanks uppermost and mix them so you will not know which is which2 then holding the seeds in your left hand repeat this verse3 8,one ,i love1 ,two ,i love1 ,three ,i love1 ,i say2 ,four ,i love with all my heart and ,five ,i cast away4 ,six he loves1 ,seven she loves1 ,eight they both love2 ,nine he comes1 ,ten he tarries1 ,eleven he courts and ,twelve he marries40 ,stop at each line to place a seed on one of the papers1 and then turn the slip over to discover the name of the one you love or cast away1 as it happens4 ,continue matching each apple-seed with a piece of named paper1 as you count1 until all twelve seeds and papers are used4 ,it is both surprising and interesting to have one's fate forecast in this way4 8,bobby0 ,burns's well-known poem 8,halloween0 tells of many charms and spells to be tried on 8,witch ,night40 ,dreams mean much on ,halloween1 but certain ceremonies must be carefully followed in order to insure the spell4 ,before going to sleep for the night have someone bring you a small piece of dry bread4 ,no word should be spoken after this2 silence must invariably prevail4 ,eat the bread slowly1 at the same time making a wish and thinking of the pleasantest things imaginable4 ,then smilingly drop off to sleep1 and your dreams in the land of ,morpheus will be sweet and peaceful1 and your wish will come true if the charm works in the way it should4 ,here is an old verse on ,shooting ,stars which has been handed down for generations3 8,if ,i a shooting star can see ,and before it falls count one1 two1 three1 ,i'll find my love in the nearest tree1 ,for ,i hunt him and he hunts me40 ,watch for the star and when it comes1 if your courage does not fail1 look up a tree4 ,though you may possibly not find the desired sweetheart1 you can make a wish on the shooting star1 at the same time repeating these lines3 8,star1 star1 bright star light1 ,first star ,i have seen to-night1 ,i wish ,i may1 ,i wish ,i might1 ,have the wish ,i wish to-night40 ,an entertainment suitable for any season of the year is called the ,ghost ,ideas ,it is intended only for the older girls1 not being adapted to little ones4 ,the ghosts are jolly1 bright1 realistic beings1 full of fun1 who1 being invited to your house1 enter heartily into the frolic1 each doing her best to make the entertainment a success4 ,all the prominent past century ghosts must be included in the party4 ,artistic1 dramatic1 historic1 literary1 and political ghosts should be present1 also the spirit of customs1 ideas1 events1 and things belonging to the past century4 ,summon your fellow-ghosts to haunt your house three hours before midnight1 appearing in costumes appropriate to their earthly existence4 ,tell them that not a word must be spoken until the company is relieved from the spell of silence and state in your invitation that all ghosts are expected to promptly signify their acceptance in writing1 otherwise they will not be admitted to the haunt4 ,when the ghosts have assembled each character should be announced as she enters the reception-room1 where the hostess and one or two other spirits of the occasion await the arrivals4 ,the announcement must be made in clear1 well-enunciated tones1 and always be prefaced by the words 8,the ,ghost40 ,guests after their introduction are allowed to speak and they should talk and act as nearly as possible like the spirits they represent4 ,the event will then be a success if carefully planned1 and you will have given to your friends a novel and delightful treat4 ,fortune's ,wheel is a midsummer game for little folks4 ,such a beautiful1 long day for a holiday1 and no one remembers to keep it now1 although many1 many years ago ,midsummer ,day1 the longest day in the year1 was looked forward to with as much pleasure as we find in the anticipation of ,christmas4 ,the people had strange beliefs in those days1 and they thought a being called ,fortune would send them gifts on this holiday if they went through certain performances to gain her good-will4 ,now suppose we make believe1 for a time1 there is such a person as ,fortune1 and one of you shall play her part1 and we will have a game of 8,fortune's ,wheel10 which will be very appropriate and interesting for ,june #bast4 ,at one end of the lawn we will mark off as many spaces1 six feet square1 as there are players1 not counting ,fortune4 ,illustration3 ,,fortune',s ,,wheel ,rope or twine tied to the fence at the back1 and to stakes driven into the ground in front1 as seen in the illustration1 will mark the boundaries nicely1 and we will tie some small flags or bright-colored streamers to the tops of the stakes to make them look pretty4 ,these spaces we will call stalls4 ,about ten yards from the stalls1 and directly in front of them1 we must stretch a rope1 tying it to stakes or trees1 so that ,fortune shall be kept within bounds4 ,now bring your rolling-hoop1 and we will turn it into ,fortune's wheel by tacking two tapes across it1 as shown in the diagram4 ,in the centre1 where the tapes cross1 we will tie a little bag1 which is to hold a gift4 ,simple little toys1 bonbons1 and cake1 only one at a time1 however1 are the gifts ,fortune's wheel will carry4 ,come1 little girl1 whoever is to be ,fortune1 whip out your handkerchief and tie up your eyes1 for ,fortune must be always blindfolded2 then stand by the rope1 which will keep you from going too far away4 ,the rest of you scamper off and take your places1 each one in a stall4 ,now1 ,fortune1 walk up and down a little that you may not know exactly where you are2 then1 standing so that you can reach the rope with your hand1 take your wheel and strike it hard1 sending it down toward the other players4 ,whoever catches ,fortune's wheel may have the gift it carries1 but no one must go beyond his stall to reach it4 ,the wheel must enter a stall before it can be caught by the player in that stall1 and when it enters a stall and falls to the ground before being caught1 the player whose stall it is in must change places with ,fortune1 become ,fortune1 and roll the wheel4 ,when the wheel stops before reaching the stalls and does not enter any of them it must be carried back to ,fortune1 who will roll it again4 ,each time before the wheel is started the players in the stalls must change places4 ,when one gift has been won and taken from the bag put another in its place and ,fortune will roll the wheel until all the gifts are gone and the game ended4 ,,chapter ,,xxvi ,,living ,,alphabet ,,characters3 ,all the letters of the alphabet1 half girls1 half boys2 teacher4 ,,costumes3 ,girls dressed entirely in red1 boys in white4 ,teacher wears a pretty ,dolly ,varden costume1 and carries a white switch tied with red ribbon4 ,the back of the stage is decorated with palms and other greens4 ,the overture is played1 which glides into a march as the curtain rises4 ,enter the teacher and letters from the right4 ,the letters march in single file in the order of the alphabet 7alternately a girl and boy7 headed by the teacher1 who keeps time with her switch4 ,after crossing the stage the teacher leaves the procession and stands at the left4 ,the letters turn1 march back to the right behind the advancing line1 turn again1 forming a reversed ,s1 march to the left1 then around the front of the stage to the right1 marching in a circle until a half circle is formed at the back of the stage1 where they halt and remain standing4 ,fig4 #ehi shows the order of march4 ,as the letters enter they carry their shields on their left arms2 as they turn to the right they shift them onto their right arms1 always keeping the face of the shield toward the audience4 ,when standing the shield is held with both hands directly in front so that the letters may be plainly visible4 ,,teacher4 ,attention6 ,present a greeting to our friends6 ,the letters ,a ,e ,l ,s ,t ,u step to the front of the stage and stand in line4 ,,teacher4 ,well1 what do you say8 ,the letters change places and form the word ,,salute4 ,,teacher4 ,very good4 ,retire to your places4 ,the letters step back in line of the alphabet4 ,,teacher4 ,we all know the alphabet is made up of two families4 ,the name of one family is ,vowel1 and the name of the other is ,consonant4 ,the vowels will please step forward4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehi4 ,the letters ,a ,e ,i ,o ,u advance to the front4 ,,teacher4 ,there are two step-sisters which we sometimes call ,vowels4 ,where are they8 ,the letters ,w and ,y join the others4 ,,teacher4 ,that will do4 ,the vowels return to their places4 ,,teacher4 ,consonants come forward6 ,all of the letters except ,a ,e ,i ,o ,u ,w and ,y advance then ,w and ,y join the consonants4 ,,teacher4 ,very well4 ,the letters return to their places4 ,,teacher4 ,we will now have our spelling-class1 and be careful that you spell correctly4 ,the letters for 8,cat0 step forward4 ,illustration ,the letters ,,act run to the front and stand spelling ,,act4 ,,teacher4 ,you are not spelling 8,cat40 ,try again4 ,the letters shift their position to form ,,tac4 ,,teacher4 ,dear me6 ,you haven't got it right yet4 ,i'm surprised6 ,the letters change1 forming the word ,,cat4 ,,teacher4 ,right at last4 ,now spell something that cats love4 ,the letters ,,nip join ,,cat1 spelling ,,catnip4 ,,teacher4 ,can you spell another word8 ,c turns her back1 while the others change places to spell ,,paint4 ,,teacher4 ,another4 ,p turns his back1 and the rest spell ,,antic4 ,,teacher4 ,spell one more word4 ,p remains with his back to the audience1 ,i turns away1 and the others spell ,,cant1 and then return to their places in the alphabet line4 ,illustration ,,teacher4 ,are you ready for your grammar8 ,the letters ,,yes run to the front1 spell ,,yes1 and then retire4 ,,teacher4 ,well1 then1 we will try verbs4 ,verbs signify action4 ,give me a word that denotes action4 ,the letters remain quiet4 ,,teacher4 ,i will illustrate4 ,your sister runs4 ,what does that signify8 ,the letters ,a ,m ,o ,u ,s ,e run out1 spell ,a ,,mouse1 and return4 ,,teacher4 ,we will try conjugating the verb 8to be40 ,it begins3 ,i am1 you are--well8 ,the letters ,,tired walk slowly forward1 spell ,,tired1 and return to their places4 ,,teacher4 ,so am ,i2 we might sit4 ,what do we stand for8 ,here1 for the first time1 the letters speak4 ,a steps forward two steps1 answers immediately1 and steps backward to her place4 ,then ,b does the same1 followed by each letter of the alphabet in turn4 ,a4 ,a stands for ,action1 and that means to run4 ,b4 ,b stands for ,baker and also for ,bun4 ,c4 ,c stands for ,catnip1 the best of all tea4 ,d4 ,d stands for ,darling1 and that stands for me4 ,e4 ,e stands for ,emerald1 a most precious stone4 ,f4 ,f stands for ,fun and my own ,funny-bone4 ,g4 ,g stands for ,gold1 which is yellow and bright4 ,h4 ,h stands for ,hope1 ,heaven1 ,holy and ,height4 ,i4 ,i stands for ,ink1 which is not a good toy4 ,j4 ,j stands for ,jelly and ,jumping and ,joy4 ,k4 ,k stands for ,kitchen with a dear little stove4 ,l4 ,l stands for ,laddie and ,labor and ,love4 ,m4 ,m stands for ,maiden and ,merry and ,may4 ,n4 ,n stands for ,nonsense and ,noddle and ,neigh4 ,o4 ,o stands for ,omelet and ,only and ,off4 ,p4 ,p stands for ,painter and ,palace and ,puff4 ,q4 ,q stands for ,quaker and ,quiet and ,queer4 ,r4 ,r stands for ,rabbit and ,racing and ,rear4 ,s4 ,s stands for ,sampler and ,sewing and ,shears4 ,t4 ,t stands for ,taffy and ,tar-drops and ,tears4 ,u4 ,u stands for ,upper and ,under and ,urn4 ,v4 ,v stands for ,vane1 which the winds always turn4 ,w4 ,w stands for ,winter1 snowy and white4 ,x4 ,x stands for ,xylite1 ,i think ,i am right4 ,y4 ,y stands for ,yes1 but never for no4 ,z4 ,z stands for ,zero1 and now we must go4 ,music4 ,here the march music strikes up1 the pianist playing 8,marching ,through ,georgia40 ,the teacher leads the procession1 and the letters follow1 singing to the air 8,marching ,through ,georgia0 these words3 ,we are going now1 ,alphabet at play1 ,holding in our hands all that's grave or gay2 ,see how we are marching all the letters in array1 ,marching onward to ,dreamland ,,chorus4 ,speak low1 speak low1 we sing a lullaby2 ,speak low1 speak low1 pray children do not cry1 ,though we now must leave you and say a sweet-- ,here the letters ,g ,o ,q ,d ,b ,y leave the ranks and stand at the front of the stage4 ,d places his hand over the quirk of the letter ,q1 making it an ,o1 and they form the word ,,good-,,by4 ,the march has carried the rest of the letters to the back1 where they stand in a semicircle4 ,the music accommodates itself to the movement1 so that the ,,good-,,by comes in at the right time1 then all take up the song again with the words3 ,while we are marching to ,dreamland4 ,curtain4 ,after-word ,the endeavor throughout this little play has been to keep it as simple as possible and quite within the capacity of the children taking part4 ,the girls and boys should be well drilled in the marches1 that they may keep step and perfect time1 also in the song2 and they should know to a certainty what places they are to take in spelling the words4 ,then if1 when speaking1 they enunciate clearly and speak slowly the success of the play is assured4 ,very slowly and clearly each word must be spoken1 otherwise the meaning and point will be lost4 ,the character of the teacher should be taken by a young girl old enough to lead and direct children4 ,the marches may be as elaborate as the manager chooses1 but they should not be too long or intricate4 ,the shields are made of heavy white card-board after the pattern shown in ,fig4 #eij1 and the handles are strips of tin fastened in the middle of the shield4 ,to secure the handle in place1 with a sharp knife cut two horizontal slits about one inch long in the shield near the centre4 ,these must be about five inches apart1 and one directly over the other4 ,then make two more slits of the same size1 one two inches above the top slit1 the other two inches below the bottom slit4 ,pass one end of the tin through the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eij4 lower top slit1 working from the inside of the shield1 and bend the end up1 slipping it back through the upper top slit as if taking a stitch2 then fasten the end by bending it up close to the inner surface of the shield4 ,care must be taken not to tear the card-board during this process4 ,now reverse the order of work1 and passing the other end of this tin through the two lower slits in the shield1 fasten it by bending the end down4 ,the loop of the handle must be sufficiently large to allow a child's hand to slide in and grasp it easily4 ,when the tin is well wrapped in strips of cotton cloth there is no danger of a cut from the sharp edges4 ,large black letters are either painted on the shields or cut from black paper or cloth and pasted on4 ,these letters must be simple and plain in design1 that they may be instantly recognized4 ,all the shields should be of one size1 and as a rule should reach from the shoulder almost to the knee of the bearer4 ,the children1 also1 should be as nearly of one height as possible4 ,,chapter ,,xxvii ,,odd ,,gardens ,summer is coming6 ,don't you see it8 ,don't you feel it8 ,even while the trees are still leafless and the grass-plots still brown we know spring is here1 almost as the plants themselves know it1 by the surging up of new life in our veins4 ,we open wide our windows to let the sweet sunshine in and make ready to welcome the blessed summer so near at hand4 ,what if you cannot leave the city1 as some do1 to enjoy the delights of a summer in the country2 what if you have not even a foot of ground1 you may still have some of the sweets with which summer is so lavish2 you may1 nevertheless1 have your flower-garden4 ,summer will help you grow your plants4 ,the sun is knocking now on your window1 bidding you prepare the ground for summer to make fruitful4 ,a ,country ,garden in the ,city ,a real hanging garden1 with creeping vines and fragrant flowers1 will prove a delight1 and it may be yours though your window is your only garden plot4 ,illustration3 ,a ,country ,garden in the ,city4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eia4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eib4 ,take your tape-measure and find the width of your window4 ,it is about three feet wide1 isn't it8 ,well1 it doesn't matter4 ,whatever the width1 add two feet more and you have the length for your garden4 ,thus1 for a three-foot window you will have a five-foot garden4 ,go to the planing-mill and select a wide board of that length4 ,see that it is without flaws1 and do not be afraid of having it thick1 for it must bear a heavy weight4 ,buy a pair of strong iron brackets1 or very likely at the mill they will give you two three-cornered pieces of board like ,fig4 #eia1 which will answer the purpose as well4 ,with screws fasten these brackets to the board1 about half a foot from each end1 as in ,fig4 #eib4 ,near the back edge of the board1 directly above the two brackets1 screw in good-sized screw-eyes1 as shown by ,a1 ,b1 ,fig4 #eib4 ,measure the distance from the bottom edge of your board to the top of the screw-eye1 as designated by the dotted line ,c in ,fig4 #eic1 and fasten strong hooks in the outer wall on either side of your window at the same distance above the window-sill4 ,be careful about your measurements and have your hooks just as far apart as the screw-eyes4 ,go to a hardware store and get a piece of wire netting1 such as is used for fences1 long enough to go around the front and ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eid4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eic4 side edges of your board4 ,have three strips cut from it1 one eighteen inches wide for your garden fence1 the other two each twelve inches wide and about three feet long for trellises for your vines4 ,fit the fence around the board1 bending it sharply at the corners1 and tack in place along the edge of the board1 using double tacks1 called staple tacks1 for the purpose4 ,paint the board and wire netting dark green1 and1 when dry1 lift it out of the window1 and1 resting the board on the outside window-sill1 slip the screw-eyes on the hooks in the wall1 as in ,fig4 #eib4 ,with two staple tacks fasten the ends of the fence to the wall4 ,now you are ,ready for ,your ,boxes ,get two strong wooden ones from your grocer1 about eight inches deep and of a size to fit the board at either side of your window1 and another to fit between the two end ones4 ,bore several holes in the bottom of each box1 bind the edges where they meet with strips of tin1 as shown by the dark strips in ,fig4 #eid4 ,have the tinsmith cut the tin the required lengths and also bend it to fit your boxes4 ,it will then be easy work to tack it on yourself4 ,binding the boxes in this way makes them strong and prevents their bursting apart1 as they are very apt to do with nothing to stay them4 ,paint the boxes dark green1 like the board1 and on the bottom of each place a layer of charcoal1 next a layer of sand and then fill with earth1 enriched with fertilizer obtained at the drug-store4 ,weave two straight sticks1 about four feet long1 in and out through each piece of wire netting for your trellises4 ,stand a trellis upright in either end box by pushing the end of the sticks deep into the soil4 ,it is a country1 not a city1 garden you want1 is it not8 ,then don't be persuaded into buying geraniums1 fuchsias1 verbenas1 etc4 ,they are very lovely1 but you can have them all winter long1 if you wish4 ,what you are trying for now is ,a ,real ,summer ,garden --one where you plant the seeds and have the excitement of seeing them come up1 then watching them grow1 and finally of discovering the first buds which so soon are to blossom and reward you with their beauty and fragrance for all the care bestowed upon them4 ,have you ever seen the hop-vine8 ,it is very pretty1 with its soft festoons of feathery tassels4 ,the hop-vine1 running up the trellis on one side of the window2 the red bean1 with its scarlet blossoms1 on the other1 will bring a bit of the country to you as little else can4 ,around the front and side edges of the end boxes plant nasturtium seeds1 and midsummer will find a wealth of tangled vines and fragrant flowers which will clamber over1 under1 and through your fence in wild abandon4 ,in the middle box plant bachelor's-buttons 7corn-flowers71 which blossom from ,july to late autumn with white1 blue1 and pink flowers4 ,plant also mignonette for its sweetness1 and1 to complete the country effect1 add lady-slippers4 ,all these flowers are raised from the seed1 except the hop-vine4 ,for this you will have to get the 8sets10 which are the underground stems of the old vines cut into pieces4 ,three or four 8sets0 planted together will give you a nice vine4 ,one of the oddest of odd gardens is ,a ,water ,garden ,this1 too1 may be just outside your window if you are so fortunate as to have a balcony large enough to hold a good-sized tub2 or one corner of your backyard may perhaps be spared for a place in which to rear your water-babies4 ,half of a good1 strong hogshead barrel makes a fine bed for a miniature pond2 a molasses barrel will answer or any kind of tank that will hold water and is at least two feet deep can be used for the purpose4 ,do not choose too shady a spot for your water garden4 ,there are very few plants that are not the better for a little sunshine4 ,an unsheltered corner which must endure the burning heat of the afternoon sun is also undesirable1 but a place which only the morning sun can reach will be suited to almost any water plant4 ,you will need ,soil as well as water for this aquatic garden1 and if you are living in the city it will be a good idea to take a trip to the suburbs1 where you can fill a tin pail with the muddy1 freshwater swamp soil4 ,failing that1 you may procure from a florist some turfy loam and enrich it with a good fertilizer4 ,illustration3 ,water ,garden4 ,fill the bottom of your tank with the soil to the depth of one foot and plant your roots before adding the water4 ,it is a good thing to anchor the plants with stones to prevent them from floating out of place when the water is poured in4 ,for most of your ,water ,plants you will probably have to visit the country1 as there appears to be no way of getting the simpler kinds but by going directly to ,mother ,nature and transplanting them from her garden to yours4 ,before starting on your search make inquiries and learn what you may expect to find in the various localities4 ,water lilies are not found on all ponds1 but they are well worth any amount of travelling1 and secure some you must1 even if several trips have to be taken before they are discovered4 ,there is a water garden in our neighborhood which is a source of great pleasure to its owner4 ,floating on the surface of the water in two great stone tanks are pond lilies of several varieties4 ,as the great buds grow and unfold they are watched closely and with intense interest until they are suddenly found full-blown1 fair and pure1 a floating mass of loveliness4 ,any and every plant which grows in the ponds and swamps may be made to grow in an artificial pond or swamp in your own house or yard4 ,the water arum or arrow-leaf2 the pickerel-weed1 with its spikes of pale-blue flowers2 the sagittaria1 whose flowers are white1 and the water hyacinth are all pretty in the water garden4 ,there are vines that grow readily in water which you can put around the edges of the tank1 allowing them to hang over and partially hide the outside4 ,the ,wandering ,jew is one which is very hardy and will droop in graceful festoons of green4 ,it is not a water plant1 but will thrive in water and should not be planted in the soil at the bottom1 but allowed to send out its roots into the water near the surface4 ,aquatic plants are the simplest of all kinds to transplant1 because the sun does not wilt them when their roots are kept wet4 ,transfer the plants in baskets filled with wet moss1 or make them in packages covered on all sides with several wrappings of wet paper4 ,they can be preserved an indefinite length of time if kept wet4 ,cat-tail seeds will grow in mud2 so will other swamp plants1 and a swamp garden1 kept always wet1 may be an accessory to your water garden4 ,from time to time you must add fresh water to supply the loss by evaporation in the tanks1 but as the growing things keep the water pure it does not need changing4 ,you may arrange smaller and ,simpler ,water ,gardens for the window in glass dishes or bowls1 or even glass jars1 and grow there the small and delicate water plants4 ,only a layer of clean sand is needed for soil1 and some plants do not even require that4 ,the water-milfoil is an ornamental little plant2 the eel-grass which1 growing at the bottom1 sends up its long spiral stems to lift its blossoms above the water1 is interesting1 and the horn-wort and water-purslane do well in narrow quarters4 ,the duck-weed is a surface plant which drops its slender roots into the water without touching soil4 ,besides these there are ,plants ,grown ,artificially in ,water ,a friend of mine tells the story of a morning-glory vine which1 growing in water1 draped her window luxuriantly and even blossomed in a timid way4 ,this plant was taken from the garden when its stem was several inches long and placed in a bottle of water1 where it sent out more roots and grew rapidly4 ,it is possible1 too1 and is a very pretty experiment1 to start the seeds without soil4 ,among the plants in my studio window1 a short time ago1 was a green glass finger-bowl filled nearly to the brim with water4 ,on the surface of the water rested two layers of raw cotton cut to fit the bowl1 and on top of the cotton were scattered a number of morning-glory seeds4 ,they lay quietly on their soft1 floating bed for a few days1 then the seeds began to send out white worm-like shoots1 and shortly there appeared on each a pair of small heart-shaped leaves tightly clasped together at the top by the now empty seed-shell4 ,soon down into the water1 piercing the cotton1 little thread-like roots made their way1 growing thicker in mass and stronger as the young plants shot up in a wonderful growth4 ,we watched them from their birth until they were three or four inches high1 when an accident brought their existence to a close and our experiment to an untimely end4 ,almost any seeds will sprout when treated in this manner1 and in order to keep the water pure during the waiting period it is well to drop into it several small pieces of charcoal4 ,charcoal is a great purifier and its use is advisable in all water gardens4 ,the ,green ,sponge appears quite marvellous to one who sees it for the first time4 ,take a large1 rather coarse sponge1 put it in a glass bowl1 sprinkle it with sand and give it as much water as it will hold1 then scatter all over it flaxseed or mustard seed1 clover seed or buckwheat and place in your window4 ,it will not be long before you have a sponge of living green1 the secret of whose beauty lies in its being kept always wet4 ,vegetables of the tuber variety will grow1 not in the water1 but with water in them4 ,the sweet potato1 which puts forth a pretty vine1 the white potato and the turnip have all proved successful experiments in my window1 and it is said ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eie4 that the carrot and parsnip can be made to grow in the same way2 their tendency1 however1 is to split at the sides1 which allows the water to escape and causes them to dry up4 ,i am told that another way to grow them is to immerse each half way in a bottle of water1 keeping the vegetable suspended by means of a darning-needle thrust through it and resting on the edge of the bottle4 ,in selecting potatoes choose those which have a number of well-developed 8eyes10 and avoid the sweet potatoes which look temptingly clean and smooth4 ,in nearly every case these are kiln-dried1 or dried by artificial means1 and no amount of coaxing will induce them to sprout4 ,take a large potato which will hold considerable water when hollowed out1 cut off one end and clean out the inside to the depth of several inches4 ,puncture holes on opposite sides about half an inch from the edge1 pass one end of a string through each hole and tie1 leaving a loop at the top 7,fig4 #eie71 then fill with water and hang at the side of your window1 where it will not touch the glass nor get the direct rays of the sun4 ,in preparing the turnip remember to turn it upside down1 as it is the root end you are to cut off2 this is pointed and generally ends in a string-like root2 the leaves sprout from the other end and form a pretty foliage4 ,the turnip will not only send out its own leaves1 but vines may be planted inside which will grow down to meet the upward growing leaves of the vegetable4 ,english ivy grows well in water1 and you all know that the ,japanese lily requires only a layer of pebbles in a dish of water to grow and blossom most beautifully4 ,hyacinths in their own peculiar glasses are also raised entirely in water4 ,of other odd gardens which are full of interest there is one called a ,friendship ,garden ,this is composed entirely of plants given by various friends of the owner1 and each plant is called by the name of the giver4 ,devote one flower-bed1 large or small as the case requires1 to your friendship collection1 and set out all your plants there4 ,they will probably form a strange medley2 but so much the better1 it will only make the queer garden the more interesting4 ,roses1 geraniums1 lilies1 fuchsias1 heliotrope1 sweet violets--sheltered from too great heat by the larger plants--verbenas and mignonette may all grow in this odd companionship4 ,endeavor not to crowd them too closely and study the habits of each plant1 that it may be kept from encroaching upon the rights of its neighbor1 if aggressive1 or be crowded out of existence if of a retiring and yielding nature4 ,give all equal care1 and your love for each plant and its giver will also grow and blossom in a way most sweet and marvellous4 ,the ,memory ,garden is in reality a collection of souvenir plants brought from various places one has visited4 ,you may have your memory garden in your window if you like1 for your plants will probably not be large and very likely will do best each in its separate flower-pot with soil adapted to its needs4 ,from various parts of the ,united ,states1 from foreign countries1 from places of historical and geographical interest you can bring mementoes for your garden that will be beautiful reminders of the pleasant scenes and incidents of your travels4 ,,chapter ,,xxviii ,,active ,,games ,weavers and ,weft ,in this game there are two sides1 so that only an equal number can take part4 ,each player is provided with a new1 shallow tin pan1 the parties then separate1 and stand in two lines1 facing each other1 about eight or ten feet apart4 ,the starter at the head of one of the lines fastens one end of a ball of yarn to a door-knob or chair just behind her and1 putting the ball on her pan1 tosses it to the player directly opposite1 who endeavors to catch it on his pan1 and toss it to the person on the other side1 who stands next to the starter4 ,the third player in turn sends it back to the one standing second on the opposite side 7,fig4 #eif74 ,in this order1 going back and forth1 the ball travels down the ranks4 ,when it reaches the end of the line1 it is started back again1 and kept going until the yarn is all unwound4 ,in no case may the ball be touched with the hands4 ,when it falls to the floor1 it must be lifted up with the pan by the player who drops or fails to catch it1 and when the yarn fastens itself to the clothing1 or becomes entwined around the body of a player1 it must not be touched1 no matter how much it may inconvenience the movements4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eif4--,weavers and ,weft4 ,great care should be taken not to break the thread1 anyone doing so is counted out of the game1 she cannot leave her place1 however1 for moving may disturb the yarn attached to others4 ,the ends of the broken yarn must be tied together before the game is resumed4 ,when the yarn is all unwound it is the object of each player to loosen himself from the tangle without breaking the thread4 ,the time must be noted and five minutes only be allowed for the disentanglement4 ,at the end of this time the side which has the greatest number of members free from the meshes of yarn wins the game4 ,the flashing of the bright tin pans1 the struggles of the players to catch the ball and elude the loose thread1 the comically careful movements of those who have become entangled in the yarn1 all tend to make the game a very merry one1 to the lookers-on as well as the participants4 ,hoop ,dance ,some of the games played with wooden hoops are full of fun1 and the constant changing of position of the players forms a very pretty moving picture for the spectator4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hoop ,dance4 ,four boys and four girls make up the set for the 8,hoop ,dance10 and chance allots the partners1 in this way3 ,a stick is placed on the ground and the group1 standing about twelve feet away1 take turns in tossing small stones as near to it as possible4 ,the girl and boy throwing nearest the goal take first position2 the girl and boy throwing second nearest take the second position1 and so on4 ,the four couples stand quite a distance apart1 at least six yards being allowed between those facing each other1 as in ,fig4 #eig4 7,crosses represent boys and circles girls47 ,one of the players is chosen leader1 and it is his duty to call out the different figures of the 8,hoop ,dance40 ,at 8,attention60 all take position and stand ready1 hoop in hand1 to respond to the first call4 ,the leader then prompts1 8,first and second couples cross over right and left40 ,immediately the two boys1 ,b and ,f1 move to the left1 as in ,fig4 #eih1 in order to give space for ,e to roll her hoop between ,a and ,b1 and ,a to pass between ,e and ,f4 ,as the leader prompts the two couples roll their hoops to the opposite sides4 ,then the leader calls1 8,third and fourth couples right and left40 ,they follow the example of the first couple1 the boys ,h and ,d moving to the left to give space for ,c to pass between ,g and ,h1 and ,g to cross between ,c and ,d4 ,the leader next calls1 8,first couples right and left back to places10 and this movement is repeated by the last couples4 ,in the ,second ,figure of the dance the girls of the first couples change places1 as in ,fig4 #eii1 where ,a and ,e roll their hoops diagonally across the intervening space according to the dotted lines4 ,this brings ,a in ,e's place and ,e in ,a's4 ,next the girls change places on the sides2 ,c and ,g cross over to opposite sides4 ,then the leader cries out1 8,girls of first couples return to places10 and ,e and ,a roll their hoops back to first position4 8,the sides do the same40 ,in like manner the boys change1 first ,b and ,f1 then ,d and ,h1 and return to places1 taking great care not to allow their hoops to fall or get beyond their control4 ,the ,third ,figure is 8,hoops all around40 ,at 8,attention60 from the leader each player turns1 facing the back of the next player4 ,arrows point the direction players are to take 7,fig4 #fjj74 ,a turns toward ,b2 ,b faces ,c2 ,c looks at ,d1 and so on4 ,then1 with hoops in position1 at the word 8,hoops all around0 each player follows the companion directly ahead1 rolling his hoop as he goes around the circle1 stopping only when his original place is reached4 ,the ,fourth ,figure ,again the leader calls1 8,attention40 ,this time each player faces his partner1 stepping a little to one side to allow the partner to pass 7,fig4 #eig71 which brings all the girls ,a1 ,c1 ,e1 and ,g1 facing the left and outside the ring1 while ,b1 ,d1 ,f1 and ,h1 the boys1 face the right and are inside the ring4 ,at the call from the leader1 8,grand right and left10 each player carefully rolls his hoop first to one side1 then to the other of those whom he meets on his way around the circle1 beginning with his partner 7,fig4 #eig74 ,the girl ,a passes to the right of her partner ,b1 left of ,d1 right of ,f and left of ,h4 ,all the other players weave in and out in the same way1 as in the ordinary quadrille1 the only difference being that instead of the hands being grasped in passing the hoops are rolled to right and left4 ,this figure concludes the 8,hoop ,dance40 ,should the players be all girls1 let four of them tie handkerchiefs on their left arms to show that1 for the time being1 they represent the sterner sex4 ,the ,game of ,tag never loses its charm4 ,who can resist rushing after a companion at the words 8last tag40 ,no girl with any daring or enterprise can rest content until the compliment be returned4 ,somewhat differing from the original tag1 but none the less attractive1 is the game of the same name played with wooden hoops4 ,hoop ,tag keeps one constantly on the alert4 ,any number may join in this game1 and all1 except one1 must be provided with hoops and sticks4 ,decide who shall be 8,it0 by some counting-out rhyme--such as ,high peg1 low peg1 ,mary and ,ann1 ,tom1 ,dick and ,harry1 ,jim and ,dan1 ,roly ,poly1 cod and trout1 ,stingelium1 ,stangelium1 ,you are out6-- ,this important person has a stick1 but no hoop4 ,from some particular starting-point determine the distance the players may roll their hoops before 8,it0 is permitted to follow4 ,the distance is optional--eight yards or so would do1 the place being designated by a house1 tree or fence1 as the case may be1 and made plain to all by 8,it0 saying1 8,i'll stand here and give you all a chance to reach that tree0--or whatever the object may be--8before ,i follow40 ,at the signal1 8,are you ready8 ,go60 from 8,it10 all except 8,it0 start rolling their hoops in the same direction4 ,as soon as the first player reaches the tree 8,it0 calls out1 8,coming60 and immediately follows4 ,the other players hearing the word 8coming0 scatter in all directions while 8,it0 endeavors to strike someone's hoop with her stick4 ,when she succeeds the captive surrenders the hoop to 8,it10 who scampers away with her prize to join the others4 ,the loser1 instantly becoming 8,it10 starts in pursuit of the nearest hoop4 ,she cannot1 however1 strike the hoop she has just lost until the player has had time to run several yards beyond her reach4 ,the game continues until each player has been 8,it40 ,when at the circus1 has not everyone seen the clown and other members of the sawdust ring jump boldly through a hoop held in the air8 ,they perform the feat with such skill that it looks very simple1 but it is less easy than it appears4 ,the ,circus-hoop ,game though1 is not difficult1 for a wooden hoop takes the part of the clown4 ,the game calls for one extra hoop large enough to allow the remaining hoops to pass through it 7,fig4 #fja47 ,count out to determine who shall be 8,it0 and when that is decided let the other players take their places at a given distance--about fifty feet--from the large hoop1 which is held perfectly still in position by 8,it40 ,the object of the game is that each player1 in turn1 shall roll her hoop through the large one without allowing the ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fja4 rolling hoop to fall on its way to the other side of the large hoop4 ,the first player to miss changes places with 8,it0 and holds the big hoop1 giving her smaller hoop to the first 8,it02 and the latter joins the ranks of the players1 taking the last place in the row4 ,the second to fail surrenders her hoop and in turn becomes 8,it40 ,the game proceeds in this way until only one player remains who has not been obliged1 through failure1 to take the part of 8,it40 ,such a one is victorious and the winner of the game4 ,no player is allowed to be 8,it0 a second time in the same game4 ,the second miss debarring her from any more trials1 she drops from the line to await a new game1 when she will be entitled to the same chance of winning as the others4 ,racing always has its charm1 and wherever there is a group of young girls1 sooner or later there will be a race of some kind4 ,there is no fixed number of players for the ,hoop ,race ,game ,still it is better not to have more than eight4 ,in determining the couples who shall race together1 eight slender sticks or broom-straws are used1 making four pairs of straws1 each pair of a different length4 ,a player holds the straws in her hand1 showing one end of each4 ,they are placed evenly1 all projecting out the same distance from the closed hand 7,fig4 #fjb74 ,when each player has drawn a straw and found her partner1 who has its mate1 the two holding the longest straws roll their hoops from the given starting-point to the goal previously determined4 ,the distance ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjb4 should not be more than three or four hundred feet4 ,the two players having the next two longest straws take second turn4 ,third place belongs to the two holding the next longest straws1 leaving those with the shortest straws last4 ,all who fail to win the first or trial race fall out of the game1 and the four victors again draw straws for places as in the first trial4 ,the two couples race1 and then comes the final test between the last two victors1 the other two having dropped out4 ,the last trial is watched eagerly by the six who are out of the game and stand as spectators on each side of the course1 cheering the players as they race after their hoops4 ,the first to reach the goal in this run is hailed as the champion4 ,when you learn to jump rope you acquire unconsciously at the same time a delightful sense of rhythm in addition to the exercise the sport affords4 ,in the lively ,jumping ,rope ,conquer ,game the players choose a leader and use a long rope which is turned at each end by two of the players4 ,the others1 in turn1 follow the leader1 doing everything she does1 even to the turn of the head and the movement of the hands4 ,when all is ready1 the rope turning evenly and steadily toward the leader1 she runs in and through to the opposite side without jumping1 calling out 8,follow me02 the other players do likewise4 ,then with the rope turning away from her she runs back in1 jumps once and runs out on the opposite side4 ,the others follow4 ,next the leader runs in1 jumps once1 then stoops and picks up a small stone or pebble1 which has previously been placed near the rope1 regaining her position in time to jump over the rope when it next comes to her feet4 ,again she stoops1 lays the pebble back in place1 jumps once and runs out4 ,the others repeat this4 ,the leader runs in1 jumps first on one foot1 on the other1 then on both1 and runs out4 ,the others do likewise4 ,the leader runs in1 calling to one of the followers to join her4 ,they face1 grasp each other's hands and jump4 ,still holding hands they raise them over their heads and jump4 ,the others1 in couples1 follow in like fashion4 ,illustration3 ,jumping ,rope ,conquer ,game4 ,should the leader at any time fail1 she must take an end of the rope1 and the one next in line becomes leader1 while the player relieved from turning goes to the bottom of the line1 her turn coming last4 ,at the first miss of the second leader the player directly following takes the leadership2 each follower becomes leader in turn4 ,when one of the followers misses she takes an end of the rope1 and the player released goes to the bottom of the line to await her turn4 ,the game continues until each player has enjoyed the distinction of being leader4 ,going to ,market is a jumping-rope game played by three or more4 ,two turn the rope1 each taking an end2 they walk along1 turning as they go4 ,the other players run in at the start and jump forward at each turn of the rope1 keeping pace with the rope-turners4 ,as soon as one trips she changes places with the player at the end of the rope4 ,the point of the game is that the entire group shall keep constantly moving forward1 each player being obliged to take an end of the rope when she fails4 ,in the game of ,passing ,by a long rope is necessary and at least four players1 two to turn and two to jump4 ,if more join the game1 they must divide into couples and take turns jumping1 as the sport requires two to enter and jump the rope together4 ,the places are taken as in ,fig4 #fjc4 ,one player is stationed as near as possible to one end of the rope1 and the other player close to the other end on the opposite side4 ,as the rope turns the players ,a and ,b 7,fig4 #fjc7 advance1 jumping toward each other4 ,they meet1 pass and continue on their way toward the opposite end of the rope until they have changed positions1 ,a being in ,b's place and ,b in ,a's4 ,they return to their first positions and run out1 leaving the rope free for the next two to have their turn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjc4 ,one of the liveliest rope games is ,red1 ,white and ,blue ,a long rope is turned by two of the players2 another runs in and jumps once2 they all sing in chorus 8,red1 white and blue10 slowly keeping time with the rope1 which is turned three times high in air above the head of the jumper4 ,the first turn is for red1 the second for white1 and the third for blue4 ,as the turners lower the rope to the ground1 without once stopping in the turning1 the player jumps once1 and again the rope goes up and is turned three times in the air while the chorus is repeated4 ,then1 after another jump1 all chant the words1 8,salt1 pepper1 ,,mustard1 ,,vinegar10 the rope turns very slowly for salt1 faster for pepper1 still faster for mustard and at lightning speed as vinegar is pronounced2 the jumper increasing her speed at each turn of the rope4 ,,chapter ,,xxix ,,expensive ,,games ,,with ,,little ,,or ,,no ,,expense ,everybody plays ,ping ,pong ,young and old alike enjoy the game whose object is merely to strike a small ball backward and forward over a net stretched across a table4 ,if you have never played the game it will seem very simple1 but upon first trial you will probably realize that keeping the ball in motion is not as easy as it appears1 for1 instead of returning over the net in an orderly manner1 the ball shows an uncontrollable inclination to jump down on the floor and hide in some obscure corner1 thereby causing the player to enter reluctantly into a game of hide-and-seek with the tantalizing little object4 ,however1 it requires only slight practice to gain control of the ball1 and the game is then very fascinating4 ,any girl may have a set of ,ping ,pong1 for she can make it at the cost of ,three ,cents ,the only thing in the game necessary to purchase is a celluloid ,illustration3 #age ball1 the price of which is three cents4 ,other implements needed are two rackets1 a net1 and the frame or stakes supporting the net4 ,the racket can be manufactured from a piece of wooden box1 or possibly a shingle ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjf4 which is sound and free from knots4 ,wood about a quarter of an inch thick1 or more1 is best for the purpose4 ,cut a paper pattern first as a guide for the shape of the racket4 ,take a piece of paper twelve and a quarter inches long and six wide2 fold lengthwise through the centre and cut according to dotted lines in ,fig4 #fjd4 ,open the paper pattern and place it over the wood2 with a lead-pencil draw a line completely around it1 then carefully saw or cut out the racket1 and smooth down the rough edges with sand-paper2 make ,illustration3 ,fig #fjg4 ,illustration3 ,fig #fjh4 the second racket in the same manner4 ,the head of the racket should be seven inches long and six wide1 the handle five and a quarter inches long and a trifle over one inch wide 7,fig4 #fje74 ,saw the stakes from the handle of an ordinary hearth-broom1 or from any strong1 slender round stick4 ,make each stake eight inches long and notch it at the top 7,fig4 #fjf74 ,as a support for the stakes use a strip of board three inches wide1 not more than one inch thick1 and about four feet long4 ,if you have no auger to make two holes in the board for the stakes1 burn them through the centre of the ends with the red-hot point of a round poker 7,fig4 #fjg74 ,be careful not to make the holes too large1 have them rather small1 that the stakes when fitted in may be tight and firm4 ,a strip of almost any kind of cloth six inches wide1 hemmed top and bottom and cut long enough to stretch taut entirely across and above the board1 when tied from stake to stake1 may serve as a net4 ,mosquito netting or turkey-red cotton cloth make satisfactory strips2 use whatever material is most convenient4 ,fig4 #fjh shows the net with two narrow tapes sewed at the four corners for tying it to top and bottom of the stakes4 ,stretch the net across the centre of a table1 preferably a dining-room table1 bring forth your rackets and ball1 and practise playing ,ping ,pong with some friend1 each standing at one end of the table 7,fig4 #fji74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fji4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #faj4 ,a retriever is sometimes used for picking up the ball when it falls to the floor1 and1 though not necessary1 will be found very useful1 especially for beginners4 ,get a strong1 slender stick about a yard long and fasten a small hoop of metal or wood on one end by binding the turned-up ends ,illustration3 ,fig4 #faa4 of the hoop securely to the stick 7,fig4 #faj74 ,test the fastening and be sure that it is firm and strong1 and that the hoop does not wobble4 ,then sew a little cloth bag on the hoop 7,fig4 #faa7 and the next time the ball falls to the floor scoop it up with the retriever4 ,the ,rules are similar to lawn tennis1 but there is no second service1 as in lawn tennis4 ,the game of ,ping ,pong is generally for two1 though four players may take part4 ,the double game will afford great amusement if but two rackets are used1 as the player must lay her racket down each time for her partner to use4 ,the player who first strikes the ball across the net is called the server and the other player is called the opponent4 ,the idea of the game is to serve the ball so as to strike the table on the opposite side of the net4 ,the ball is then in play4 ,if it drops into the net1 or does not strike the table1 it counts in favor of the opponent4 ,the opponent to whom the ball is served must endeavor to return the ball over the net so that it will strike upon the table4 ,the ball is thus sent back and forth until one player or the other fails to get it over the net so that it will bounce upon the opposite side of the table4 ,the ball is in play so long as it strikes the table-top and can be taken on the first bounce4 ,striking before the ball bounces is not allowed4 ,when the game is finished the server becomes opponent and the opponent server1 and so on1 alternately4 ,if the ball in play strikes any object above or round the table before it bounces on the table-top itself 7net or post excepted7 it counts against the player4 ,the server wins a stroke if the opponent fails to return the ball or returns the ball in play off the table4 ,the opponent wins a stroke if the server serve a fault1 or fails to return the ball in play1 or returns the ball in play so that it falls off the table4 ,no volleying is allowed2 but as long as the ball touches the table-top it is in play and can be taken at half-volley4 ,the opponent loses a point if he takes the ball on the volley4 ,the player who first wins six games wins a set4 ,the service must be strictly underhand and delivered from behind the end of the table4 ,scoring ,your opponent scores--,if you do not return the ball2 if you strike the ball before it touches the table2 if the ball bounces twice4 ,you score--,if your opponent strike the ball out of play or bounces the ball his side of the net4 ,on either player winning his first stroke1 the score is called #ae for that player2 on either player winning his second stroke1 the score is called #cj for that player2 on either player winning his third stroke1 the score is called #dj for that player1 and the fourth stroke won by either player is scored game for that player1 except when both players have won three strokes 7#dj all72 the score is then called deuce1 and the next stroke won by either player is scored advantage to that player4 ,if the same player wins the next stroke1 he wins the game2 if he loses the next stroke1 the score is again called deuce1 and so on1 until either player wins the two strokes immediately following the score of deuce1 when the game is scored for that player4 ,in naming the score the server is always mentioned first1 for convenience1 as #cj-ae1 signifying #cj for server and #ae for opponent4 ,terms ,used in ,ping ,pong ,let means that the ball1 while being served1 touches the net in passing over1 and the server has the privilege of serving again4 ,if the opponent makes a let stroke it counts1 the same as if the ball had cleared the net4 ,volleying means striking the ball before it bounces4 ,half-volleying means striking the ball just as it bounces4 ,underhand stroke means striking the ball with the head of the racket pointed downward4 ,overhand stroke means striking the ball with the head of the racket pointed upward4 ,all means same score for both players--as #cj all1 meaning #cj for server and #cj for opponent4 ,deuce means a tie4 ,the ,game ,begin by taking plenty of time and serving slowly4 ,remember to strike the ball lightly2 too much force will send it flying to the other end of the room1 which is to be avoided4 ,keep cool and think what you are doing4 ,your mind must be centred entirely upon the game4 ,grasp your racket close to the head1 and when serving keep your racket down2 the ball must not be held above the waistline and must be served beyond the end of the table4 ,the writer once knew1 ,a ,little ,girl who was ,very ,fond of ,playing out of doors1 and when confined to the house by inclement weather1 a bad cold1 or some other disagreeable thing1 was very apt to grow restless and fretful1 complaining always that she did not know what to do4 ,she had any quantity of beautiful toys1 but1 as she said1 she was tired of them all4 ,then it was that the family would induce her to try to make something for herself1 and when once she became interested in her work1 and found that by her own ingenuity she could manufacture1 from odds and ends1 many interesting little toys1 her restlessness vanished1 and she was once more cheerful1 happy1 and contented4 ,at one time she had a book presented to her which gave the patterns and directions for making a few little articles--a very few it seemed to her1 for she speedily did all the work laid out there1 and was again thrown on her own resources for new ideas4 ,a ,make-believe ,sewing-machine ,when she was quite a small child1 too young to be allowed to sew on a real sewing-machine1 she constructed a machine which1 with the aid of her imagination1 did very good work4 ,of course she could not really sew on it1 but neither could she have done so had it been a 8sure-enough0 sewing-machine1 and there was sufficient reality about it to make her play very absorbing4 ,the small wheels on top went round with a whiz and a whirr that filled her soul with delight4 ,there were two wheels1 because they were the remnants of a mechanical toy1 a horse and sulky1 which was once driven by a handsome tin jockey4 ,the horse and jockey were gone1 but the wheels and machinery remained4 ,the key to the clock-like works was likewise missing1 but it was very easy to wind up the spring by turning one of the wheels round and round a number of times4 ,once wound up1 the wheels were bound to go until the machinery ran down again1 and it was while going at full speed that the pretended sewing was done4 ,no1 these two wheels were not all of the sewing-machine by any means4 ,there was the arm made of pasteboard1 with needle attached1 which1 shaken by the vibration of the turning wheels1 moved up and down quite naturally4 ,all this was on top of a small table1 underneath was the treadle made of the back of an old geography laid across a piece of kindling wood4 ,the treadle would sometimes slip out of place with the rapid movement of the little girl's feet1 but that was of no consequence1 since it was only the work of a moment to replace it4 ,the fact that there was no large wheel mattered nothing either1 for the little seamstress felt her feet moving up and down1 saw the wheels whirling on top1 and was satisfied without a wheel that could not be seen anyway4 ,the sewing-machine was such an ambitious idea that it required some imagination to carry it out successfully1 but there were other things this little girl made which were quite complete in themselves1 such as toy houses1 furniture1 and dolls4 ,knowing how thankfully this same little maid received any suggestions which would assist her in the manufacture of her home-made toys1 ,i take it for granted there are other children who will be just as grateful for new ideas and who are just as happy in carrying them out4 ,if you happen to be such a little girl1 you will be glad to learn about this impromptu game of croquet which you can make for yourself in half an hour and enjoy the use of for many a long day4 ,to ,make a ,parlor ,croquet ,set ,diagram ,no4 #fab shows the arches1 of which there must be nine1 all made of wire bent in the shape you see1 with each of the ends thrust into a button-mould4 ,to prevent the wire from slipping out1 fill the holes with beeswax1 and then push the wire in2 this will make the arches quite strong and steady4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fab4 ,the mallets1 as shown1 are made of empty spools1 with long wire nails driven in for handles4 ,the stakes are made of wire nails stuck in button-moulds1 like the one seen at the bottom of diagram ,no4 #fab4 ,you will need two stakes and four mallets4 ,marbles1 all of the same kind1 but with different markings1 take the places of croquet balls4 ,not an expensive set of croquet1 surely4 ,the spools1 wire1 button-moulds1 and nails you will probably find in the house1 and the marbles also1 if you happen to have a small brother2 if not1 you can buy them seven for one cent4 ,how to ,arrange the ,game ,the parlor croquet should be played on a good-sized table covered with a woollen cloth4 ,place the stakes and arches in the position shown in diagram ,no4 #fac4 ,let the stakes stand forty inches apart4 ,place arch ,no4 #a four inches from the starting stake1 arch ,no4 #b four inches from ,no4 #a1 arch ,no4 #c eight inches to the right and one inch in advance of ,no4 #b1 arch ,no4 #d twelve inches in advance of and on a line with ,no4 #b4 ,begin at the other stake and place the arches at the same relative distances4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fac4 ,rules for ,playing ,first--,the object of the game is for each player to send her ball through each arch in turn1 beginning at ,no4 #a and using her mallet for striking her ball4 ,when a ball has passed through arches ,nos4 #a1 #b1 #c1 #d1 #e1 #f1 and #g1 according to their numbers1 it must strike the stake just beyond ,no4 #g1 then returning through arches #g and #f1 it must move on through ,no4 #h1 through ,no4 #d again in the direction opposite to the one taken in its first passage2 then through arches ,nos4 #i1 #b and #a1 striking the stake to 8go out10 and the first player to do this wins the game4 ,second--,to decide who shall open the game1 or be the first to play1 each player in turn shall place her ball 7marble7 directly under the first arch and play for the stake4 ,the one whose ball1 after playing1 stands nearest the stake has the privilege of the first turn1 the next nearest the second turn1 and so on4 ,third--,the first play with each ball shall be made after placing it half way between the starting stake and arch ,no4 #a1 and the player may aim for the arch or any ball which has entered the game1 or may send her ball in any direction she may choose4 ,fourth--,a ball failing to make its first arch must remain where it rests until next turn2 passing through its arch gives the player another play4 ,fifth--,when a ball strikes another the player may croquet or roquet the ball in any direction she wishes1 and then have another play4 ,no ball may croquet or roquet another more than once in one turn unless it passes through an arch or strikes the stake between the croquets4 ,to croquet a ball the player places her ball touching the one it has just struck2 then1 resting her finger on her own ball to hold it steady1 she strikes her ball with her mallet1 sending the other in any desired direction4 ,to roquet a ball the player places her ball touching the one just struck and strikes her ball1 moving them both at the same time4 ,sixth--,a ball rolling off the table must be replaced at the point where it went off two inches from the edge4 ,seventh--,when a ball has passed through all of the arches it becomes a 8rover10 and need not strike the starting stake and go out until the player wishes4 ,a rover has the privilege of croqueting or roqueting any or all of the other balls in each turn1 but may play on each ball only once during one turn4 ,eighth--,the game may be played with partners1 or each may play for herself4 ,when there are partners each side takes a turn alternately4 ,illustration3 ,a ,dash for the ,goal4 ,,chapter ,,xxx ,,basket ,,ball ,with the opening of the basket-ball season the girls are all wide-awake1 interested1 and eager to enter the teams2 there is an exciting dash and life about the game which renders it very fascinating4 ,if you can organize a set of ten players and divide the ,cost of an ,outfit among the girls1 each contributing an equal portion1 the individual expense need not be exorbitant4 ,the price of a good basket ball is four dollars1 and a pair of goal baskets the same amount1 making in all eight dollars1 just eighty cents each1 a small amount when compared with the fun1 health1 and general benefit to be derived from the sport4 ,the expense will be even less if shared by the officials4 ,it is optional whether you play indoors or out of doors2 the game is suited to either place4 ,the size of a ,playing ,ground varies in different localities1 being regulated according to available space1 but it must not exceed #c1ejj square feet4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fad4 ,mark out your field1 making the width less than the length1 according to ,fig4 #fad4 ,if indoors1 use black paint for marking the inch and a half wide boundary lines2 if out in the open air have the lines white1 of the same width as the black1 and made with either whitewash1 chalk1 paint1 or plaster-of-paris4 ,you must have the side boundaries of the field at least three feet from the wall or fence1 and the end boundaries directly below the pole or wall surface against which the basket goals are placed4 ,the inclosed field is divided into three portions 7,fig4 #fad74 ,two more inclosures are necessary1 called foul limits2 make them inside the two end divisions1 ,figs4 #fad4 ,the boundary line of the curved end must be equally six feet distant all around from station line indicated by a short straight line in the centre of the inner end of foul limits in both divisions2 the station line must be fifteen feet from the goal or outer edge of basket2 the space across from the straight lines of the foul limits must measure six feet4 ,mark centre of field with a circle of a foot and half radius 7,fig4 #fad71 or two lines one and a half feet apart4 ,if marked by circle the girls playing centres must stand within it2 if two lines are used they must toe the lines4 ,hang your ,baskets ten feet above the ground on the centre of each extreme end boundary line 7,fig4 #fad1 ,c and ,c74 ,be perfectly sure that the basket goals are firmly fastened in place and rigidly supported either on a strong upright pole1 or on a wall ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fae4 surface4 ,if on poles it is better to have a screen six feet wide and four high as a background1 though this is not absolutely necessary4 ,during practice and ordinary games leave the netting open at the bottom of the basket1 that the ball may fall through the basket to the floor or ground beneath1 it being difficult for girls to get the ball out of the basket when it is closed at the bottom4 ,using a pole to push the ball out is not always attended with satisfactory results1 and the effort consumes valuable time and strength4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbf4 ,the baskets are called the goals2 usually they are hammock nets of cord1 sometimes metal chain links2 they are always suspended from metal rings eighteen inches in diameter 7inside74 ,the back part of the metal ring is fastened to an iron bar which extends six inches from the pole or wall to which it is attached 7,fig4 #fae74 ,the ,ball is round and hollow1 composed of two layers1 an inside rubber bladder and an outside cover of leather4 ,the rubber is tightly inflated and the cover so laced that it cannot be caught or held by the lacing4 ,the ball measures from thirty to thirty-two inches in circumference and weighs from eighteen to twenty ounces 7,fig4 #faf74 ,the usual ,set of ,players is ten1 making five on each side1 though the game is occasionally played with more4 ,the set sometimes numbers as many as twenty members1 ten on each side2 but such teams are rare1 and generally undesirable4 ,large teams crowd the field to such a degree that very little skill is required to reach the goal1 and action to a great extent is rendered almost impossible4 ,each side chooses its own ,captain who must be one of the five girls constituting the side4 ,there are always two captains in a game1 and they should be selected with care1 as much depends upon their proper qualifications for holding the office4 ,in addition to other duties1 the captains toss for the choice of goals1 are active players in the game1 represent their respective sides1 and are entitled to call the attention of the officials to any violation of the rules which they may think has occurred2 it is their further duty to furnish the scorer with lists of their sides1 giving the positions of the players4 ,the captain appoints the forwards1 guards1 and centre4 ,the game calls for nine more girls2 these do not take active part in the play1 but hold positions as officials4 ,the officials with a set of ten players necessitate nineteen girls for the usual game4 ,the nine ,officials are one referee1 two umpires1 a scorer1 a time-keeper1 and four linesmen4 ,always choose your ,referee at least four days before the game4 ,she must be absolutely neutral and perfectly impartial2 to her belongs the honor of holding the most important office in the game4 ,it is the referee's duty to see that the regulations respecting the ball1 goal1 and grounds are adhered to4 ,by mutual agreement of the captains1 the referee may allow alterations in the rules regarding time and grounds1 but not as regards goal1 ball1 or team4 ,before the commencement of the game she must ascertain the time for beginning1 or any other arrangements that have been made by the captains4 ,the referee must watch the ball constantly1 following it wherever it goes4 ,she must know at all times the whereabouts of the ball1 as her office constitutes her judge of it1 and she must decide when the ball is in play1 to whom it belongs1 and when a goal has been made4 ,every time the ball is put in play the referee tosses it up1 she alone having the right to do so4 ,the referee calls time1 when necessary1 by blowing a whistle1 and she must always call a foul when any player addresses an officer4 ,no player is allowed to talk to the officials1 though anyone may speak to the captain and the captain can address the officers2 in that way only are the players able to communicate with the officers4 ,the referee decides all questions not definitely falling to the umpires and linesmen1 scorer and time-keeper1 but is powerless to alter a decision of the umpire or linesmen regarding matters under their jurisdiction4 ,the referee instructs the team when to play1 and either side refusing to begin the game within three minutes after the whistle sounds forfeits the game4 ,the referee's term of office expires at the conclusion of the game1 and her decision awarding the game must be given then1 as she no longer has power to act as referee4 ,the referee must disqualify members when they are guilty of shouldering1 tripping1 striking1 kicking1 hacking1 or of intentional or unnecessary roughness of any kind4 ,these constitute fouls1 and the referee overlooks the first offence1 but not the second4 ,when a player is disqualified she must drop from the game and a substitute take her place4 ,a foul is a violation of the rules1 whether committed unintentionally1 ignorantly1 or otherwise2 the only guide an officer has is the cold fact that a foul has been made4 ,each team chooses its own ,umpire who must be a thoroughly competent and impartial girl4 ,the umpires call all fouls except cases coming under the authority of the referee2 when the fouls are made by players crossing the field lines1 linesmen judge them4 ,each umpire makes her own decision independently of the other1 but a foul called by one umpire cannot be questioned by the other4 ,the umpire calls time by blowing a whistle when stating a foul and indicating the offender2 she reports to the scorer the player at fault and the nature of the foul4 ,the referee appoints the ,scorer who must keep the score4 ,she must be perfectly neutral4 ,it is the scorer's duty to notify the referee when a player should be disqualified for any kind of roughness4 ,the referee appoints the ,time-keeper who must be exact about the time1 noting when the game starts1 and blowing her whistle at the expiration of the actual playing time in each half previously agreed upon by captains and referee4 ,the time-keeper must take out time when called upon to do so by the referee4 ,the captain is privileged to ask the referee to call time for an injured player or when a difference has occurred between the captain and an official4 ,the half game is generally fifteen minutes1 making the entire game thirty minutes1 not counting the intermission4 ,the playing time may be shortened to ten minutes for each half or lengthened to twenty for each half4 ,the referee only may order time deducted for necessary stoppages1 should any occur during the game4 ,the four ,linesmen are appointed by the referee2 two for each side4 ,these four girls usually stand at the four corners of the centre division1 and it is their duty to report if any of the players step on or cross over the dividing lines4 ,such offences are counted fouls4 ,when the ball happens to be thrown outside the field boundary lines the players are allowed to rush after it1 but are not allowed to go beyond the dividing lines when in the field4 ,all the girls should be in their ,places on the ,field ready to begin the game at the appointed signal4 ,fig4 #fag will assist you in gaining a clear understanding of the different positions occupied by the various members of the team when in position to commence play4 ,the object of the game is to throw the ball into the opponent's basket1 and this is best accomplished by the girls being coupled with opponents and stationed at various places all over the field4 ,in ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fag4 ,fig4 #fag the girls on one side are represented by circles1 those on the other side by crosses4 ,we will suppose that the two captains have tossed for goals1 and that to the circles has fallen the goal ,g and to the crosses the goal ,h4 ,in the centre of the field are grouped three girls1 one player from each side1 and the referee1 who is here indicated by a triangle4 ,the referee stands with the ball in her hands1 facing the other two girls1 having her back turned toward the side of the field 7,fig4 #fag74 ,it is optional on which side of the centres the referee is stationed4 ,the two players stand facing each other with their sides turned toward the referee1 and each has her back toward her own goal 7,fig4 #fah74 ,these two players1 circle and cross1 are known as ,centres ,there are always two centres in a game1 and it is their duty to jump quickly for the ball as it leaves the hands of the referee1 who opens the game by tossing the ball vertically in the air immediately between and not more than two feet ,illustration3 ,circle ,centre4 ,triangle ,referee4 ,cross ,centre4--,fig4 #fah4 from the centres4 ,fig4 #fah shows the referee ready to toss the ball4 ,each centre endeavors to catch the ball and pass it to one of the forwards on her own side1 with the hope that it may1 sooner or later1 land in her opponent's basket2 at the same time she tries to prevent the ball from being passed by the opponent's guards across the centre of the field toward her basket4 ,the centres must confine their play within the central space2 they cannot step across the dividing lines running from side to side of the central division of the field4 ,in each of the end divisions are stationed two girls called forwards and two others known as guards2 their duties are implied by their titles4 ,the forwards endeavor to forward the ball to their opponents' basket1 and the guards guard their own goals1 striving to prevent the opponent forwards throwing the ball into their basket4 ,in ,fig4 #fag the circle ,forwards are in the end near their opponents' basket ,h1 that they may have a better opportunity of sending the ball into it1 and the cross forwards are on the other end of the field near the circle's basket trying to engineer the ball into that goal4 ,you will notice that the guards on each end protect their own basket4 ,standing by each cross forward is a circle ,guard who endeavors to prevent an opponent from succeeding in her efforts for the goal1 and on the cross end of the field the two cross guards are trying to protect their basket from the circle forwards4 ,the stars in ,fig4 #fag stand for the four linesmen1 who must be continually on the qui vive and report if a girl steps over the dividing lines4 ,each umpire watches both sides2 generally one umpire walks about just outside the field boundary line on one side of the field1 and the other walks just outside the boundary on the other side of the field4 ,it is optional which side they take1 but they should not both be stationed on the same side4 ,fig4 #fag shows the circle umpire on the right hand1 and the cross umpire on the left hand of the field4 ,the umpires are designated by circle and cross1 with rays extending all around them4 ,the time-keeper stands outside of the field1 that she may not interfere with the action of the players2 other than that restriction1 she may move as she pleases4 ,in ,fig4 #fag the time-keeper is denoted by a round black spot4 ,the scorer must also keep out of the field proper and have her mind on her portion of the work4 ,in ,fig4 #fag the scorer is designated by a square4 ,when all stand ready the ,game begins4 ,the referee tosses up the ball1 and every one of the players on the field eagerly watches the two centres as they strive to catch the ball4 ,the centre1 gaining the advantage1 endeavors to toss it to a girl on her own side1 while the other centre does all in her power to prevent the ball from reaching its destination1 often running in front of the victorious centre1 blocking the way and still further interfering by throwing up her arms4 ,if the first centre succeeds in tossing the ball to one of the forwards on her side1 that forward immediately strives to get the ball in the opponent's basket1 but is constantly followed and opposed by the opponent guard1 who endeavors to frustrate the play4 ,should the forward decide that the chances for gaining the goal are better if she throws the ball to another girl on her side1 she does so with the hope that the other forward will succeed in caging the ball4 ,if1 however1 the last forward be baffled1 she tosses the ball either to her own centre1 back to the first forward1 or over across the field to one of her own guards1 anywhere the rule permits in order to keep the ball from the hands of the opponents4 ,if one of the opponent forwards succeeds in capturing the ball she tries either indirectly1 with the aid of others on her side1 or directly1 by her own exertions1 to cage the ball in the basket of the opposite side4 ,the centre catching the ball from the referee is privileged to throw it to any player on her own side1 either forwards or guards1 at one end or the other of the field1 her action depending upon circumstances4 ,sometimes it is more advantageous to toss the ball in one direction1 again it is better to throw it in another4 ,therein lies the secret of good playing1 the ability to see opportunities in time to profit by them and quickness and accuracy in measuring distances1 so that the ball may land where the player intends to send it1 not falling short or getting too far4 ,the opponent centre constantly follows the centre having the ball1 and is ever at her side trying to obtain the ball or prevent it from reaching its destination4 ,the forward catching the ball after it has been advanced to her by her own centre or by guards from the other end of the field1 or obtaining it from an opponent1 generally throws for the basket1 and she must be able to make the goal under many difficulties and from various positions4 ,should the ball miss the basket the forward will have no time for regrets1 it being necessary for her to turn her immediate attention to regaining possession of the ball or to preventing it from falling into the hands of the opposing guard4 ,the forward must have a cool head1 must be calm1 and able to decide and judge quickly2 she must take the situation in at a glance and make the most of any1 even the slightest1 opportunity of forwarding the interest of her side4 ,the guard's principal duty is to prevent opponents from getting the ball into the basket belonging to the guard's team1 and when possible to obtain the ball and throw it to the centre on her side1 or across to her own forwards4 ,the guard's position requires that she be very skilful and constantly on the watch to defend her goal4 ,the players are on the field in couples1 but the two standing together are always opponents2 a player is never stationed by one of her own side4 ,the game is thus in part played in couples1 that is1 the two placed together pay especial attention to each other and are1 for the time being1 each the particular opponent of the other1 trying to foil all efforts of the other to gain any advantages in the game1 at the same time endeavoring to assist the players on her own side4 ,the inner divisions for fouls1 ,fig4 #fad1 are ignored except when a foul has been made2 then the side opposed to the one committing the foul has a free throw for the basket and the foul court is in use4 ,the player having the free throw stands on the line in the centre of the circle of the foul division 7,fig4 #fad71 and must be allowed to take time to aim well and throw for the basket4 ,no other player is permitted to stand in or pass through the limits of this court while the player with the ball is trying for the goal4 ,the object in marking the inclosure is to prevent any other girl approaching nearer than six feet to the player throwing for the basket4 ,the foul court must be absolutely free from all obstruction during a free throw1 nor shall the player having a free throw step from the station line until the ball has entered or missed the goal4 ,when a player is given the privilege of a free throw1 the ball cannot be tossed to any other player2 it must be thrown for the basket4 ,should this rule be violated1 the goal will not count if made1 and the referee takes the ball and tosses it up in the centre as at the beginning of the game4 ,if by chance the free player is interfered with in any way1 and she fails to make the goal1 she can try again1 and then1 in case the ball does not land in the basket1 the ball is in play and the game continues4 ,the ball may be thrown or batted with the flat part of the hand in any direction1 either with one or both hands4 ,while in the field a girl cannot carry the ball nor hold it longer than three seconds2 she must play it from the spot where she catches it1 unless she happens to be running4 ,if while running she catches the ball1 she must stop as soon as possible2 should she fail to do so1 in the opinion of the umpire1 the umpire may call a foul4 ,when the player captures the ball she either throws it at once or stops running as soon as possible4 ,allowance is made in such cases1 but the player cannot consume time by turning around without making progress in the game4 ,a player cannot bound the ball on the floor more than three times1 and never lower than the height of the knee2 however1 this does not interfere with her throwing for a goal twice or more in succession4 ,the player who has the ball is the only one in the field who may be intentionally blocked in her way2 all other players must be free from intentional interference4 ,the foul which disqualifies a player counts against her side4 ,the ball is ,out of ,bounds when it completely crosses the boundary line of the field4 ,should it bounce or roll back again the game continues1 except if the whistle of the referee is blown2 then the ball is put in play as if it had not returned to the field4 ,the time allowed for a game is always divided2 when the first part has been played1 time is called for a rest by the whistle of the time-keeper4 ,generally the intermission lasts ten minutes1 sometimes longer1 the game being resumed after the recess4 ,while resting the players wrap themselves up to keep from taking cold1 and are not permitted to drink cold water4 ,after each goal the referee puts the ball in play in the centre of the field2 this she must also do at the commencement of the game and at the beginning of the second half of the game4 ,at the end of the first half the sides change goals1 except in case of a tie1 when the game continues without changing goals until either side has made two additional points4 ,these points may be made either from field or from fouls4 ,the game is won by the side scoring the greater number of points during the entire game4 ,if the goal 7in case of uprights7 is moved by an opponent when the ball is on its edge1 one point is scored by the side throwing the ball4 ,the game is decided by the winning of the most points in the actual playing time4 ,when there are two fouls at once on opposite sides1 each side has a free throw for the basket2 afterward the ball is put in play from the centre by the referee4 ,whenever it becomes necessary for the referee to call 8time10 because of illness or accident to a player1 play must be resumed in five minutes4 ,if the injured player is unable to resume play ,a ,substitute may take her place1 or the game may start at once without her4 ,if a substitute takes her place she cannot play again during that game4 ,rules ,a goal made from the field counts two points2 made from a foul1 one point4 ,if a player by mistake should throw the ball in her own basket1 it counts for the opponents4 ,after time has been called the referee puts the ball in play by tossing it up in such a manner that it will drop near the spot where it was when time was called1 unless it was held out of bounds4 ,in this case play is resumed at the whistle of the referee as if time has not been called4 ,the two opponents nearest this spot when time was called vie with each other to obtain the ball after play is resumed4 ,they are indicated by the umpire4 ,when the ball is held by two or more players for any length of time the referee blows her whistle1 stops the play and throws the ball up from where it was held4 ,whenever the ball is put in play the players who are to first touch the ball must not stand further than two feet from the spot where the ball is to fall4 ,when the ball goes out of bounds and remains there1 it must be returned by the player first touching it4 ,there can be no interference with her returning it2 that is1 no portion of the person of an opponent may be outside of the field of play4 ,the ball cannot be touched by an opponent until it has crossed the line4 ,if either of these rules is violated1 the ball is to be returned to the player who had it and the ball again put in play at the original place4 ,the player holding the ball may throw it in any direction into the field of play from any spot 7outside of bounds7 on a line drawn at right angles to the boundary line at the point where the ball crossed it4 ,the ball must be thrown into the field of play4 ,when either of these rules is violated the ball goes to the opponents at the same spot4 ,the ball must be thrown to some player and disposed of before the player who passed it can again play it4 ,when a player obtains possession of the ball outside the limits of the field she is allowed five seconds to hold it2 if the ball is held longer it goes to the opponents4 ,in case of doubt in the mind of the referee as to which player first touched the ball1 she tosses it up into the field of play at the spot where it went out4 ,when the ball is batted1 rolled or passed from the field of play1 in order to claim exemption from interference it must be given to the opponents at the point where it left the field of play4 ,when it is passed to a player out of bounds the ball is given to the other side4 ,carrying the ball from the field of play is a foul4 ,when the centres are jumping for the ball and one of them bats it to out of bounds1 it is in play and goes to the other side4 ,a goal scored by a player while any part of her person touches the ground out of bounds shall not count4 ,in such a case the ball is put in play in the centre of the field4 ,if a player throws for the goal and the whistle of the referee1 umpire1 or time-keeper sounds while the ball is in the air1 and the throw results in a goal1 it is a count4 ,when the umpire's whistle sounds simultaneously with either the referee's or time-keeper's1 the umpire's takes precedence4 ,a goal scored before the whistle can be blown for a foul made by the side scoring1 does not count2 but if a player while throwing for the goal is fouled by an opponent and succeeds in scoring1 both count4 ,two hands on a ball are necessary to secure it4 ,in case of doubt in the mind of the referee as to which player first put her two hands on the ball1 she shall toss it up at the spot where it was held by the players4 ,in no case may a player remove the ball from the hands of an opposing player1 either by snatching or batting4 ,the ball may not be held longer than three seconds4 ,the ball may not be 8juggled02 i4e41 tossed into the air and caught again to evade holding4 ,crossing field lines with any part of the body constitutes a foul4 ,no player may lean over or reach over another player4 ,no player may hand the ball to another player4 ,the ball must be thrown to another player4 ,general ,fouls ,players addressing officers4 ,kicking or striking ball4 ,carrying ball4 ,bounding ball more than three times1 lower than the knee4 ,holding longer than three seconds4 ,delaying game4 ,tackling1 holding1 pushing opponents4 ,snatching or batting ball from hands of opponent4 ,juggling4 ,crossing or stepping on the field lines4 ,leaning or reaching over another player4 ,fouls for ,which ,players ,may be ,disqualified4 ,roughness4 ,striking4 ,kicking4 ,shouldering4 ,tripping4 ,hacking4 ,unnecessarily rough play4 ,should any question come up not covered by these rules the officers may decide the matter in accordance with the spirit of the game4 ,these official rules are intended especially for girls' basket ball as played in most of the well-known colleges1 ,vassar1 ,bryn ,mawr1 ,smith1 ,wellesley1 etc41 and by the majority of schools except in and around ,new ,york1 in which section both girls and boys play the boys' game4 ,this differs from the girls' in having greater freedom and consequently more action1 players being allowed to run to any part where they think they can be of most use within the extreme limits of the field4 ,the dividing lines from side to side of the field are omitted1 and the girls must be equal to greater exertion and more violent action for the boys' game4 ,the girls' game is considered the safest and best for them1 being adapted for girls2 yet some champion players prophesy that ere long the boys' game will be the one generally played by both girls and boys4 ,if girls enter into the boys' game they must keep in training that their strength may equal the demands4 ,they must not shed one tear when occasionally hurt1 though such accidents need not occur if all rudeness is avoided4 ,should one girl unintentionally run against another during the game1 precious moments cannot be wasted in apologies1 there being no time for either excuses or tears4 ,while the sport is going on the player's mind should be all earnestness and determination1 too intent upon the game to allow thoughts for other things4 ,girls will soon acquire greater moral and physical courage by playing basket ball1 and sufficient nerve to keep back the tears4 ,their self-control will be vastly improved and their endurance1 strength1 quickness of action1 and judgment rapidly strengthened4 ,all these qualities are essential1 not only in basket ball1 but in helping one to understand the art of living4 ,players should wear tennis ,slippers in order to avoid slipping1 sliding1 and injuring one another with heavy heels1 should one player accidentally step on the toes of another4 ,the ,gymnasium ,suit of short1 full1 divided skirt1 gathered zouave fashion at the knee1 and a loose woollen blouse or sweater1 forms a comfortable1 sensible uniform for basket ball4 ,if desired a knee-length skirt of stout material may take the place of the divided skirt1 but never attempt to play in a long dress or tight clothing4 ,,chapter ,,xxxi ,,some ,,of ,,our ,,out-,,door ,,neighbors ,,and ,,where ,,to ,,look ,,for ,,them ,the word grows broader and is more and more filled with meaning as we begin to understand that 8neighbor0 may embrace in its kindliness not alone the whole human race1 but all the animal creation with which we come in contact4 ,these denizens of the woods and fields are indeed our neighbors1 and so also are the queer folk whose lives are partly or wholly spent in the water4 ,when we learn to look for them we will find life full of the beauty1 the music1 and the good-will of our little friends and neighbors4 ,few of these out-door acquaintances force themselves upon us2 they are not at all sure of their welcome1 so we must keep our eyes and ears open that we may learn their haunts and meet them at least half way4 ,while strolling in the country it is pleasant to walk along laughing and singing as we go1 but we must refrain if we really wish to come near any of the bright-eyed1 suspicious little creatures4 ,they can only be approached very quietly1 for wild things understand an unusual noise only as a danger signal1 and will start in alarm at the least sound or sudden motion1 and be up and off before we are conscious of their presence4 ,a little book for ,observation ,notes divided off into spaces1 each space having a heading1 as in ,fig4 #fai1 will be of great value in identifying the animals1 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fai4 birds1 and insects you may meet1 and in keeping such records1 your interest will deepen and your love for ,nature and all her children greatly increase4 ,carry the book with you1 and make the notes on the spot4 ,do not wait until you reach home1 depending upon your memory2 it may sometimes play you false4 ,write nothing under the heading of 8,identification0 until you are quite sure you recognize the creature you are studying2 for this one entry it will be best to wait until you can consult a reliable book on the subject1 and then carefully compare your notes with what the naturalist gives as facts4 ,if your stroll leads you through the woods listen for the chatter of ,the ,squirrel ,this saucy rodent belongs to a large family1 with many branches and ramifications1 and squirrels of some kind are to be found in almost any wooded spot4 ,the scolding remonstrance to your invasion of his domain will probably reach you before you catch a glimpse of him2 but sit down and wait quietly1 ,mr4 ,squirrel will soon appear1 and very likely his little wife will follow him4 ,cautious1 alert1 yet really unafraid1 they will approach nearer and nearer1 until they are quite close enough for you to mark their peculiarities and decide to which branch of their family they belong4 ,you may even pass the compliments of the day with your little host if you speak gently and softly4 ,they are not timid animals1 and will quickly make friends with anyone who treats them kindly4 ,in ,daytona1 ,fla41 where they are absolutely undisturbed1 the squirrels are very numerous1 filling the great moss-laden trees1 scampering over the lawns and fences and even eating from the hands of those who will regularly feed them1 all the while living in entire freedom1 without restraint of any kind4 ,wherever you may find the squirrels1 their nest is probably close by1 hidden in a hole in one of the trees4 ,be careful how you thrust your hand into such an opening1 however1 for squirrels have sharp teeth and may resent such undue familiarity4 ,about the first of ,april the nest will be filled with a promising family of little ones from four to six in number1 and if you can take such a family under your supervision and 8grow up with them10 as it were1 you will be amply repaid by the amusement the merry little creatures will afford and by the opportunity to observe1 with the privilege of an intimate friend1 their house-keeping and manner of life4 ,you will know ,the ,red ,squirrel by his color1 during the summer it is a red-brown with a white vest bordered on the sides with a dark line4 ,he changes his coat twice a year1 and his winter garment is duller and not nearly so red1 while the vest is gray without the dark border4 ,when you find a squirrel's nest in the crotch of a tree instead of in a hole you may be pretty sure it belongs to the gray squirrel1 which is said to be the most easily tamed of all its family4 ,do not mistake ,the ,chipmunk for a squirrel1 although he does resemble one and his lively chatter seems to be in the same language4 ,he is1 in fact1 sometimes called a ground squirrel1 but in reality he is only a distant cousin4 ,you will not be so apt to find him in the interior of the woods as in more open places2 his favorite promenade is the top of a stone wall or rail fence4 ,he is a little fellow with a flat1 bushy tail and well-developed cheek pouches1 which he fills with seeds and nuts until his cheeks are puffed out equal to a boy's when he eats an apple4 ,the tawny little chipmunk of the ,eastern ,states has two white stripes and five narrow black ones down its back4 ,in the ,west there are other varieties1 the little black and white striped fellow of the ,rocky ,mountains being the prettiest and tamest4 ,the chipmunk is an engaging little creature1 tamer even than the squirrel1 and he will often come close to the house and sometimes enter it in search of food2 it is the dogs that generally drive him away1 for no dog1 however well behaved1 can resist chasing a chipmunk4 ,he is easy game1 for he seldom climbs a tree1 and unless he can find refuge in his hole or under the wood-pile his life is soon the forfeit4 ,do not look in a tree for the chipmunk's nest1 you will not find it there1 but perhaps at the foot of the very pine under which you are standing1 or beneath the large rock which lies in your path there is a small hole opening into a little hollow1 and in this underground chamber is the soft1 warm nest and the store of food which the chipmunk has providently laid by4 ,here it sleeps through the cold winter months1 waking only to eat a few nuts1 seeds1 or grains of corn1 soon to drowse again1 and remain asleep until spring has come once more4 ,when you see a small1 brown1 long-bodied animal1 not much larger than a rat1 running swiftly along the ground1 you may be pretty sure it is our neighbor ,the ,weasel ,his home is probably near the river or the borders of the meadow1 but he hunts his game with such intelligence and persistence it is possible to meet him almost anywhere4 ,we frequently hear this little animal spoken of1 not always with praise1 and it is strange he so seldom crosses our path1 for he does not stand in much fear of his human neighbors4 ,the weasel is very quick and active1 and also quite inquisitive2 it lives on frogs1 birds1 eggs1 and mice1 and the farmers complain that it seeks larger game in their poultry yards4 ,mr4 ,dan ,beard tells an interesting story of a walk in the woods where he found a weasel asleep in a deserted crow's nest at the top of a tall tree4 ,it is possible the little brown intruder might have been able to explain just why the nest was empty of all save himself4 ,the sharpness and cunning of the weasel's character is shown in its face4 ,a low forehead1 pointed nose1 eyes small and penetrating plainly denote these qualities1 yet it is a most interesting little animal and well worth all the study and observation you can give it4 ,a very small neighbor to be found on the borders of the woods or a shady road is the pretty1 harmless ,salamander ,seldom more than two and one-half inches long1 this little creature is slender and daintily made1 with a tail quite the length of its head and body4 ,its skin is smooth1 not scaled like the lizard's1 and is generally brilliant in color4 ,one variety is bright red1 darker on the back1 where it has spots of a brighter red encircled with dark rings4 ,i have found many of them in ,pike ,county1 ,pa41 and always in damp places1 though never in the water4 ,there is another kind that lives in the water1 but my little red friends1 while loving dampness1 remain always on land4 ,you will generally find them under stones or logs1 and after a shower they are also to be met in the open1 though they do not travel far from their haunts4 ,take one up in your hand and examine the delicate forefeet1 so much like fairy hands4 ,they will cling to your finger in the most winning fashion and you may examine the little animal at leisure1 for it is clean and harmless4 ,if you wish to keep the salamander for further study1 place it in a perforated box with damp moss or even damp blotting-paper1 and remember to keep it moist1 otherwise it will simply dry up4 ,i know whereof ,i speak1 for a friend who was with me in the mountains1 wishing to carry two of the salamanders home with her1 placed them in a box without moisture of any kind and when we lifted the lid the next morning the poor little creatures were dead and as dry as two sticks4 ,the salamander feeds on small insects1 but ,i have never seen them eat in captivity4 ,that they may be safely transported and established in new homes has been proved1 for a gentleman from ,seattle1 ,wash41 who was visiting at our ,pike ,county1 ,pa41 camp1 became so deeply interested in these creatures he took a pail of them across the continent1 and at last accounts they were living in his garden1 to all appearances quite as comfortably as in their native woods4 ,on the trunks of some of the great trees you are passing you may possibly see a number of queer1 semi-transparent shells4 ,these are the cast-off armor of ,the ,cicadas ,locusts you will probably call them1 but that name rightly belongs to quite another insect4 ,perfect in every detail1 even to the great bulging eyes1 the cicada's little coat of mail clings to the tree with its six pairs of claws like a live creature1 and only a split down its back shows its emptiness and tells how the cicada crept from the old into a newer and fuller life4 ,the shells one usually finds belong to quite a large black and green insect1 one of the more common species of cicada4 ,this is called the dog-day harvest fly1 and requires but two years to develop1 while the smaller red and black variety is known as the 8seventeen year locust10 because it spends seventeen years of its life underground before it reaches maturity4 ,all this while it bears the name of nymph4 ,a pretty name for the young insect1 isn't it8 ,the nymph began life as an egg which its mother deposited1 with a number of others1 in a slit she made in a twig of a tree4 ,for six weeks it lay snugly in its narrow bed1 then came forth a tiny white creature1 with little legs which carried it about in a lively manner4 ,its mouth was simply a hollow tube which would change into jaws later on4 ,for a while the nymph was happy in its new-found life1 then ,illustration3 ,cicada and ,shell4 suddenly a longing for quiet seemed to come over it and it dropped to the ground1 there to bury itself in the earth1 which was to be its home for many years4 ,down in the mysterious darkness1 in that busy world where so much we do not understand is going on1 the little nymph grew very slowly for a year1 nourished by the juices of the roots he found near him and which he sucked up through his tube-like mouth4 ,then he shed his first skin for another1 which gave him greater freedom for further growth4 ,after a time this skin was also discarded1 another and another1 until1 we are told1 six times his garment was changed while yet he was deep in the earth1 with no one to see and admire his new attire4 ,then when seventeen long years were passed and his days of preparation were accomplished1 he dug his way up into a new world at the dictate of a new impulse1 and one evening he emerged to find himself in a goodly company of his kind1 all intent upon reaching a still greater height4 ,the tree under which he had lived so long was his goal1 and up this he made his way for some distance1 then1 forcing his little claws into the bark1 he clung to his place awaiting his final transformation4 ,presently his nymph-skin opened down the back and the cicada1 a nymph no longer1 crawled slowly out4 ,white again as when he first saw the light1 except for two black spots on his back1 soft and helpless he clung anew to the bark4 ,at first his wings were so much a part of his body you would have thought he had none1 but almost immediately they began to unfold and grow1 becoming transparent and firm as he waved them slowly back and forth4 ,during the night his color was marvellously changed from white to black and red1 and the next morning came his season of rejoicing4 ,with all faculties fully alive1 he joined the chorus of the other cicadas and the woods were made to resound with their high1 rasping notes4 ,by the way1 do you know ,how the ,insects ,sing8 ,or1 rather1 they do not sing1 the noise they make is instrumental1 not vocal1 and their instruments are usually carried under their wings1 a part of themselves to be played upon at will1 when and where they choose4 ,the cicada's instrument is a kind of drum1 and1 as if one would not be sufficiently noisy1 he carries two1 one behind each of his hind wings4 ,he has no drum-sticks1 but vibrates his drums until the natural buzzing sound rises almost to a shriek4 ,other insects play on other instruments1 but1 however the sound is made1 each species has a note of its own1 not to be mistaken for that of any other4 ,deep in the forests where the dead leaves and pine-needles cover the ground you will be likely to find the well-known ,indian ,pipe the delight of all children and an object of interest to everyone4 ,this wonderful little ghost flower1 so purely white and so quickly blighted by exposure to sunlight appears to live for its beauty alone4 ,as far as we know it is of absolutely no use1 and does not even provide for itself1 as do other plants4 ,it is a root parasite and draws its nourishment from the roots of the pine upon which it has fastened itself4 ,the stem as well as the blossom is silvery white1 it has no foliage1 and the flower at the end of the stalk bends its head as though ashamed of its idle life1 but it continues to live on the vital juices of the roots and we call it the ,indian ,pipe because it somewhat resembles the long-stemmed ,indian calumet1 or pipe of peace4 ,the botanists1 however1 know it as the ,monotropa ,uniflora4 ,another beautiful inhabitant of the deep woods is the ,moccasin ,flower which arrays itself every summer in its spotted pink or yellow dress1 and stands as proudly erect on its slender stalk as though troops of admirers were to pass its way1 when1 in fact1 it is rarely seen save by those who seek it4 ,as its name suggests1 it resembles an ,indian moccasin in shape1 the hanging pouch forming the toe1 while the heel is clasped by five pointed and twisted petals4 ,over the opening of the pouch there is a little flap1 which has much to do with the fertilization of the flowers4 ,the botanical name of this little orchid is the ,cypripedium1 and some call it lady-slipper1 though it looks not at all like your slipper or mine4 ,as you walk on under the interlacing branches of the close-growing trees1 look about for evidences of the ,engraver ,beetle ,pull the bark from a dead trunk or limb and you will probably find its trade-mark4 ,fig4 #fbj is one pattern1 but there are various others1 among them a spiral ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbj design cut as smoothly as though done with an engraver's chisel4 ,these little workers in wood are but babies1 being the larv of the engraver beetle1 which1 deposited as eggs under the bark of a dead tree1 turn into worm-like creatures and eat their way along the surface of the sap-wood1 tracing the cabalistic designs in their progress4 ,when fully developed the beetle is still a wee thing1 the largest being not over a quarter of an inch in length4 ,some are brown in color and some black4 ,drop your eyes now and look for ,footprints in the soft earth4 ,you will frequently find them around ponds and the margin of brooks4 ,they make a most interesting study1 and will soon enable you to learn which of your forest neighbors has visited the spot before you4 ,a small1 delicate impression1 much like that of a dainty little hand1 will show that ,the ',coon has been along1 and this is all you are likely to see of him unless you take a moonlight stroll1 for ,master ',coon shuns daylight1 and is about only at night4 ,being a pretty and an intelligent little animal1 he is sometimes tamed and even allowed the freedom of the house1 like a dog or cat1 but 'coons are as mischievous as monkeys1 and very frequently the little hands are used to work disaster among the household gods4 ,when that occurs a chain is used to keep ,master ',coon out of further trouble and consequent punishment4 ,the 'coon's fur is long1 thick1 and of a pepper-and-salt gray4 ,its tail is decorated with rings1 and its broad white face is marked with three radiating black lines across the forehead and black settings to its eyes4 ,though all you find is the footprint of this nocturnal little fellow you may rest assured that somewhere1 just above your head perhaps1 he is snugly curled up in the hollow of a dead limb awaiting the darkness1 when he will sally forth to seek his supper4 ,in the softly creeping twilight1 when the woods become more mysterious1 and one's nerves are almost like the wild things in their quick response to sudden noises1 the night prowlers begin to awake and stir about4 ,before darkness quite settles down is the time to make the acquaintance of the night birds1 nocturnal insects1 and some of the small animals which avoid the garish light of day4 ,though they love darkness better than light these little creatures are just as harmless as the ones you have seen in the genial sunshine4 ,do not be startled1 then1 if a small dark body suddenly sails through the air near you1 but watch it in its flight1 see how it courses downward1 always downward1 on a gradual incline until1 with a short upward curve1 it alights on a low branch or trunk of a tree4 ,from the summit of a tall pine its flight has been1 perhaps1 fifty yards1 yet it has no wings and in the dim light you will see before you only a big-eyed1 satin-coated little squirrel1 and you will have met1 it may for the first time1 your neighbor ,the ,flying ,squirrel ,look closely and notice that he wears a suit of brownish gray1 white underneath1 bordered with black1 which fits him so loosely about the legs and sides that when he stretches out ,illustration3 ,flying ,squirrel4 and flattens himself he may almost be said to be web-legged1 and can sail through the air like a parachute4 ,the natural home of the flying squirrel is a hole in a tree1 where he makes a soft nest1 deep enough to burrow into until completely hidden4 ,but a hole anywhere1 except in the ground1 attracts him4 ,whole families will take up their quarters in an unoccupied house if they can squeeze themselves through some crack or crevice1 and will frequently refuse to vacate when the rightful owner appears and claims the premises4 ,i have several times made pets of the young flying squirrels1 and they are the prettiest1 most friendly and entertaining little things imaginable1 as tame as kittens and as harmless4 ,they are nocturnal in their habits1 sleeping all day in their woolly nests and scampering about all night1 full of mischief and merry play4 ,if you wake one of the baby squirrels from its nap and take the drowsy little thing in your hands you will love it immediately2 it is so soft1 so babyish1 so unresisting4 ,a rare but most beautiful dweller in the woods is the ,luna ,moth named for the moon and sometimes called the 8queen of night40 ,one evening just at dusk it was my good fortune to find a luna moth clinging to a forest tree by the roadside4 ,it had but recently emerged from its chrysalis and was slowly moving its delicate wings back and forth1 drying them in the warm night air and strengthening them for flight4 ,the ,tropa luna1 as the scientists call it1 is one of the giant silk-worm moths4 ,it has the large1 fuzzy body of the moth1 with the feather-like antenn2 but its wings are unusual in shape4 ,nearest the tail they are extended to form long appendages1 which curve gracefully outward4 ,the color is a delicate light green1 the edges of the fore-wings are bordered with a band of purplish brown1 and they are further ornamented with four large eyes4 ,illustration3 ,luna ,moth4 ,look on the ground under the walnut1 hickory1 or other hard-wood trees for the cocoon1 as it is on these trees the larva feeds4 ,when daylight comes again seek the path which leads through ,orchard and ,field and once more you are among the little folk who love the warm1 bright sunshine4 ,the birds leave the shade to sit on the old rail fence and sing joyously4 ,you will see the busy little wren here1 tripping about importantly1 and the song-sparrow1 too1 which loves to perch on the top rail and sing its heart away4 ,hidden deep in the tangled grass or nestled amid the clover you may find the nest of the bobolink4 ,do you know the lines which occur in one of ,saxe ,holm's stories3 8,i wonder what the clover thinks8 ,intimate friend of the bobolinks40 ,when you remember these you will remember to look for the bobolink where you see the red clover4 ,there is a concert going on at this very minute2 do you hear it8 ,the high soprano is taking the lead1 the soft1 gurgling notes of the contralto are coming in1 and now the whole chorus has burst into song and one of the sweetest of ,nature's anthems is being given4 ,you must hear it1 some of you1 for no matter what the season1 in this great land of ours1 somewhere the warm summer sun is shining1 somewhere1 without money and without price1 these beautiful songsters are pouring out their souls in exquisite melody4 ,stop and think what the birds are doing for you2 think of what life would be without them and how near akin they are to all that is joyous and bright within you2 read 8,the ,birds of ,killingworth0 in ,longfellow's 8,tales of a ,wayside ,inn0 and then wear the dead bodies of your little friends on your hats if you can4 ,as you cross the pasture be on the lookout for the ,woodchuck's ,hole ,it is generally on the side of a hill or knoll1 and in front of it is a small pile of earth which the woodchuck has taken out in his excavations4 ,the hole is large enough for a small dog to enter1 and leads to several tunnels1 some of them twenty or twenty-five feet long4 ,if you remain quietly near for awhile perhaps you will be rewarded by seeing the woodchuck1 or ground-hog1 as he is sometimes called1 peep cautiously out of his front door and then come boldly forth to look about and see what is going on in the outer world4 ,make a sudden noise and he will sit up on his haunches with hanging forefeet1 like a begging dog1 and then dart into his hole to remain in hiding until it seems safe for him to venture out again4 ,illustration3 ,woodchuck and ,his ,hole4 ,the woodchuck is a snub-nosed little animal1 a trifle larger than a good-sized rabbit4 ,its tail is short and bushy and its hair long1 coarse1 and of a brownish color1 ears low and inconspicuous1 and eyes round and bright4 ,at the approach of winter he retires to his nest1 which is in a chamber at the farthest end of his longest tunnel1 there to sleep or hibernate until spring4 ,a popular legend has it that on the second day of ,february the ground-hog--he is always a ground-hog in this connection--is sure to be up and out to see how high the sun is and investigate the general progress of things4 ,you know the rest of the story2 how he prophesies an early or late spring by his actions on this important day4 ,if he stays out we will have an early spring2 if he goes back we will have winter weather for six weeks longer2 and his going and staying are determined by the sun4 ,this is because the ground-hog is supposed to be absurdly afraid of his shadow1 which he has not seen for so long1 and if the bright sunshine reveals it to him he is said to return ignominiously to his hole1 where he will remain for another six weeks4 ,if1 on the other hand1 the day proves cloudy1 and there are no shadows to alarm him1 he concludes that he has slept quite long enough1 that there will be no more winter1 and that it is high time to be up and about his business4 ,the farmers hunt the woodchuck because of its voracious appetite for green things4 ,they say it takes more than its share of the farm products1 and they make forcible objections4 ,june is the time to find the baby woodchucks1 which in this month play like puppies around the entrance to their home4 ,and now these few remaining pages must be devoted to our small neighbors of ,the ,sea-shore ,to some of them at least2 a volume would not give space for all4 ,it is on rocky coasts or the shores of bays and inlets that you will find most of the creatures which make their home on the borders of the vast and mighty ocean4 ,along a rugged shore like that of ,maine1 where the storms and great breakers carry the water high upon the rocks1 little pools are formed1 and in one of these natural aquariums there is enough life for a summer's study4 ,undisturbed by the rising and falling tide1 the water is transparently clear1 and you can see distinctly all the inhabitants of this little water-world4 ,clinging to the rocky sides are what appear to be silvery pink moss and brilliant aquatic flowers4 ,lying at the bottom or amid the jagged stones are round1 prickly looking balls which resemble chestnut burs1 some of them no larger than a tiny pearl button4 ,so much like vegetables do all these things appear1 it seems hardly possible they are animals2 yet the moss is sometimes called the ,nurse of the ,jelly-fish and some of the small bubble-like bags clinging to its stems1 which give it the silvery appearance1 are full of eggs that will hatch into minute jelly bodies4 ,after various transformations and subdivisions these bodies develop into the wonderfully beautiful and fairy-like jelly-fish which you find swimming in the deep waters of the bay1 some of them trailing long1 filmy1 lace-like skirts or veils as they move4 ,the delicate red1 green1 yellow1 pink1 and lavender blossoms1 which add so much to the beauty of the pool1 are ,sea-anemones ,animals1 too1 every one1 living only on animal food1 which they find and absorb in a peculiar manner4 ,the fringed petals are in reality tentacles that reach out and draw food into the mouth at the centre1 from which it is taken into the stomach just below4 ,how the baby sea-anemones are born1 how they are cared for by their mother1 how they are at first 8foot loose0 and afterward become fixtures on the rocks1 you must study out for yourselves2 the description here is but an introduction at best and must be necessarily brief4 ,the queer-looking green burs1 which you will see moving about if you watch them closely1 are the ,sea ,urchins ,you have1 perhaps1 found some of their beautiful shells on the beach1 empty of all life and bleached quite white by ,illustration3 ,shell of ,sea ,urchin4 the sun4 ,where the green spines grew are regular rows of bead-like projections1 looking like strings of pearls2 but1 lovely and pure as the shells are1 they cannot possibly be as interesting as the real creatures1 full of life1 crawling about at the bottom of the crystal pool on ,illustration3 ,sea ,urchin4 the tips of their prickly looking spines4 ,i have never found a live sea-urchin except in these quiet pools1 probably because they do not like to subject themselves to the buffeting waves1 and when in deep water hide in the crevices of the rocks or bury themselves in the seaweed4 ,unlike the sea-anemone1 they are vegetarians and seldom indulge in animal food4 ,the mouth is underneath the little animal1 where you find the round hole in the shell4 ,starfish too you will probably see crawling over the rocks at the bottom of the pool4 ,although called by that name1 these strange1 five-fingered creatures are no more fish than the sea-urchins1 and their life is not so much of the water as of the ground below4 ,the starfish may swim1 but it greatly prefers gliding about over the slippery stones and sandy bottom1 searching for the small shellfish which form its food4 ,if you will place a starfish in a small fish globe filled with salt water1 or in any clear glass vessel that is large enough1 you can see its numberless feet1 which are little tubes projecting from the under side of the five rays4 ,this wonderful waving mass of tube feet is quite concealed when we look at the animal from above1 and until we have discovered them its rapid movements seem very marvellous4 ,there are barnacles looking like a part of the rock to which they are firmly attached1 tiny crabs darting hither and thither1 various species of small mollusks and numerous other forms of salt-water life to be found in ,nature's beautiful rock aquariums1 but we must leave you to make their acquaintance alone1 while wishing you much joy and happiness in your intercourse with these and all of your little neighbors4 ,,index ,a 8,abe0 ,lincoln log-cabin1 how to build1 #aid ,acorn bucket1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bjg ,acorn made from egg1 #ch ,active games1 #cbb ,all-cotton rugs1 #aeh ,alphabet1 living1 #cjc ,animals1 to make a ,noah's ark1 #afd ,animals1 vegetable1 #aja ,apples1 ,christmas1 #bfi ,apples1 to make flower feast1 #agg ,apple-seed charms1 #big ,arch1 to make spool memorial1 #bdj ,ark1 peanut ,noah's1 #afc ,ark1 to make the1 #agb ,armless bust1 #bhe ,auger-bit1 #h ,b ,ball1 basket1 #cdh ,bamboo pistol1 #add ,bark1 for 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin roof1 #bjc ,basket ball playing-ground1 #cdf ,basket-ball rules1 #cfj ,basket1 corn-husk1 #fj ,basket-weaving1 #ahe ,baskets of green burs1 #ahj1 #aha ,bedposts1 naming the1 #bie ,birch-bark canoe1 #bab ,blackboard drawing1 #bae ,blotting-paper1 for painting monotypes1 #aea ,bobbinet bags1 #bec ,bonbons1 snapping1 #agi ,bones1 #bcb ,books1 to illustrate1 #hb ,boxes1 to make fancy ,christmas1 #beb ,brace1 #dh ,braiding palm grasses and corn-husks1 #fd ,brownie1 to make from egg1 #cd ,bubbles1 spool1 #bda ,bucket1 acorn1 #bjg ,bugle-horn1 #bca ,burs1 baskets made of1 #ahj1 #aha ,bust1 armless1 #bhe ,butterfly ink1 #abb ,butterfly paper1 #ea ,button-mould tops1 #acb ,c ,calendar1 to make a1 #hj ,calumet1 sparkling1 #adj ,camels1 to make ,noah's ark1 #afg ,cannon1 spool1 #bdc ,canoe1 birch-bark1 #bab ,canoe1 birch-bark for1 #bjc ,canopy1 merry-go-round1 to make1 #abg ,captain1 basket ball1 #cdi ,centres1 basket ball1 #ced ,chair1 hooded1 made from packing-box1 #ba ,charms1 apple-seed1 #big ,chicken1 to make ,noah's ark1 #afh ,chimney1 8,abe0 ,lincoln log-cabin1 #bja ,chimney1 pasteboard1 #aab ,chipmunk1 #cfh ,chisel1 #d1 #h ,christmas decoration1 to make1 #bdd ,christmas devices1 #bfj ,christmas pie1 an all-day1 #bfj ,christmas stockings1 #bec ,christmas tray1 #bfe ,church1 pasteboard1 #ajg1 #ajh ,cicadas1 #cga ,circus1 the hoop game1 #cbh ,clothes-press1 portable corner1 #ae ,collections1 #fi ,color basket1 #aib ,color letter1 #bgf ,color schemes for rugs1 #aed ,colored pictures1 #hc ,comb1 musical1 #bcc ,comet1 rushing1 #adc ,cone hanging basket1 #eh ',coon1 #cge ,country garden in city1 #caj ,corn-husk basket1 #fj ,corn-husks1 braiding1 #fd ,cornucopias1 #bec ,costume1 statuary tableaux1 #bhb ,cotton dyes1 #afb ,cotton rugs1 #aeh ,covers1 basket1 #aia ,cranberries1 strings of red1 #bef ,crook1 sheep and shepherd's1 to make1 #bdf ,croquet1 parlor1 #cda2 rules1 #cdc ,crystal flute1 #bcb ,cups1 to make flower feast1 #agh ,d ,daisy1 to draw a1 #bbe ,dance1 flag1 #acj ,dandelion games1 #aha ,dishes made from eggs1 #cf ,doors1 from 8,abe0 ,lincoln log-cabin1 #aii2 how to hang1 #bjj ,dove1 to make from an egg1 #bh ,drawing-class1 home1 #ajg ,dreams1 ,halloween1 #bih ,dressing-table1 to make a1 #aa ,duck1 to draw a1 #bbc ,dulcimer1 to make a1 #bbi ,dyes1 rug1 #afj1 #afb ,e ,easel1 valentine1 #ia ,easter hare1 #cb ,easter lily1 #eb ,easter1 paper1 #de ,egg changed into rooster1 #df ,egg1 possibilities of an ,easter1 #bf ,egg1 slippers made from egg1 #da ,egg1 spinning1 #cj ,egg1 to make brownies from1 #cd ,eggs1 hares made from1 #cc2 fruits1 vegetables1 opera-glasses1 and dishes made from1 #cf2 radish1 #cg2 watermelon1 plum1 acorn1 #ch2 a dainty vase1 a teapot1 #ci2 sugar-bowl1 egg dippers1 #da ,eggs1 paper1 #de ,egyptian statue1 #bhg ,elephant1 to make ,noah's ark1 #afh ,engraver beetle1 #cge ,f ,fastenings1 basket1 #aia ,feather tests1 #bic ,fence1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #baj ,fence1 pin-wheel1 #acg ,festoons1 ,christmas-tree1 #bdh ,festoons1 holly-leaved1 #bed ,file1 #d1 #i ,finger-bowls1 musical1 #bcj ,fire-cracker1 valentine1 #ie ,fireplace1 magic1 #bfc ,fire rug1 #aee ,fish1 to draw1 #bba ,fish1 to make flower feast1 #agf ,flag dance1 #acj ,flower feast1 #age ,flower pad valentine1 #ie ,flower-stand1 to make a piazza1 #ag ,flower writing1 #bgc ,flying squirrel1 #cgg ,fortune wheel1 #cjj ,forwards1 basket ball1 #ced ,fouls1 basket ball1 #cfc ,four-leaved clover valentine1 #ij ,friendship garden1 #cbj ,fringe1 ruching1 #bdi ,fringe1 rug1 #aei ,frog1 swimming1 made from an egg1 #bf ,fruit lanterns1 #aja ,fruit salad1 to make flower feast1 #agg ,fruits made from eggs1 #cf ,furniture1 set of spool1 to make1 #bch ,g ,galatea1 #bhh ,games1 active1 #cbb ,games1 expensive1 with little or no expense1 #ccd ,garden1 friendship1 #cbj2 memory1 #cba ,garden1 real summer1 #cac2 water garden1 #cad2 soil for1 #cae ,gardens1 odd1 #caj ,ghost ideas1 #bii ,gimlet1 #g ,going to market1 #ccb ,gouge1 #d1 #h ,grass-blade1 musical1 #bcd ,greek temple1 to make spool1 #bcg ,guard1 basket ball1 #cee ,guest book1 to make a1 #gh ,h ,halloween fortunes1 #bic ,hammer1 #c1 #e ,hand pin-wheel1 #acf ,hare1 ,easter1 #cb ,hares made from eggs1 #cc ,harp1 to make a1 #bbh ,hatchet1 #f ,head1 to draw a1 #bbj ,heads1 to paint1 #adi ,heart-shaped valentine1 #id ,hen1 to draw1 #bag ,hinges1 basket1 #aib ,home drawing-class1 pasteboard models for1 #ajg ,home-made pyrotechnics1 #ace ,hoop dance1 #cbd ,hoop-race game1 #cbi ,hoop tag1 #cbg ,horses1 fantastic ink1 #abb ,house1 pasteboard1 #aaa ,houses1 #aj ,i ,illustrating1 books1 #hb ,indian pipe1 #cgd ,indian powwow1 #bgd ,ink1 landscapes1 marines1 #aai2 butterfly1 fantastic horses1 #abb2 pair of birds1 #abc ,ink pictures1 #aah ,j ,jelly1 #bfi ,jelly-fish1 #chb ,jewelry1 ,christmas-tree1 #beg ,jumping-rope conquer game1 #ccj ,k ,kaleidoscope in an egg1 #ca ,l ,lake1 to make a1 #bjd ,lamp1 to make spool1 #bci ,landscapes1 ink1 #aai ,lantern1 pumpkin1 #aje1 #ajf ,lanterns1 fruit1 #aja ,lavender sticks1 #fb ,letter of color1 #bgf ,lights for statuary tableaux1 #bhb ,lily1 paper ,easter1 #eb ,linesmen1 basket ball1 #ceb ,living alphabet1 #cjc ,lobsters1 to make ,noah's ark1 #agj ,log-cabin1 8,abe0 ,lincoln1 how to build1 #aid ,luna moth1 #cgg ,m ,magic fireplace1 #bfc ,marble flesh1 to make1 #bhd ,marble locks1 to make1 #bhd ,marines1 ink1 #aai ,mats1 sweet-grass1 #ei ,memorial arch1 to make spool1 #bdj ,memory garden1 #cba ,merry-go-round1 #abe ,mitre-box1 #aj ,moccasin flower1 #cgd ,models1 pasteboard1 #ajg ,monotone monotypes1 #aea ,monotypes1 #adh2 monotone1 #aea2 papers for painting1 #aeb ,morning-glory1 #ahc ,mounting pictures1 #gj ,moving toys1 #abe ,musical instruments1 home-made1 #bbg ,n ,naming the bedposts1 #bie ,net1 ping pong1 #ccf ,noah1 to make1 #aga ,noah's ark1 a peanut1 #afc ,o ,observation notes1 #cff ,odd gardens1 #caj ,officials1 basket ball1 #cej ,opera-glasses made from eggs1 #cf ,original valentines1 #hi ,ostrich1 paper1 #de ,owl1 to make ,noah's ark1 #afi ,p ,palm-grasses1 braiding1 #fd ,paper chains1 colored ,christmas1 #beg ,paper ,easter1 #de ,paper1 musical1 #bbg ,paper1 to prepare for picture mounting1 #gb ,parthenon1 to make spool1 #bcf ,passing by1 #ccb ,pasteboard church1 #ajg2 house1 #aaa2 tower1 #aac2 steeple1 #aac2 chimney1 #aab2 pyramid1 #ajg ,pasteboard models for home drawing-class1 #ajg ,pasteboard pistol1 #add ,peanut1 ,noah's ark1 #afc ,peanuts1 ,christmas1 #bef ,pedestals1 statuary tableaux1 #bhb ,penguin1 paper1 #de ,photograph book1 #hd ,photographs1 #hc ,picture hanging1 #gc ,picture writing1 #bga ,pictures1 mounting1 #fi ,pictures1 quick ink1 #aah ,pie1 an all-day ,christmas1 #bfj ,pice de rsistance1 #bfh ,pig1 blackboard1 #bae ,pineapple1 to make flower feast1 #age ,ping pong1 #ccd ,pin-wheel1 three-story1 red1 white1 and blue1 #ace2 in your hands1 #acf2 on the fence1 #acg ,pistol1 pasteboard or bonbon1 #add ,plane1 #d1 #g ,plants1 ink sketches from1 #abc ,plants1 water1 #caf ,players1 set1 in basket ball1 #cdi ,plum1 made from egg1 #ch ,pop-corn balls1 #bee ,portfolio1 to make a1 #gd ,portire1 to make effective1 #bdf ,portrait medallion1 #bhf ,potato turkey1 #ajb ,printing1 monotypes1 #aej ,prints1 to make a collection of1 #fi ,priscilla rugs1 #aec ,pumpkin lantern1 #aje1 #ajf ,pygmalion1 #bhh ,pyramid1 pasteboard1 #ajg ,pyrotechnics1 home-made1 #ace ,q ,quick ink pictures1 #aah ,r ,rabbit1 paper1 #de ,rabbit1 to make a ,noah's ark1 #afg ,raccoon1 #cge ,racquets1 ping pong1 #cce ,radish made from eggs1 #cg ,rags1 how to cut and sew1 #aeg ,raisin turtle1 #aje ,red1 white1 and blue1 #ccc ,reeds for basket-weaving1 #ahf ,referee1 basket ball1 #cej ,rice-paper1 for printing monotypes1 #aea ,roman candle1 #adb ,roof1 8,abe0 ,lincoln log-cabin1 #bja ,rooster1 made from egg1 #df ,rooster1 paper1 #de ,rose1 to draw a1 #bah ,rugs1 ,priscilla1 #aec2 color schemes for1 #aed2 fire1 #aee2 weight of rags for1 #aef2 cotton and wool1 all-cotton1 #aeh ,rule1 #g ,rules1 basket ball1 #cfj ,rules1 ping pong1 #ccg ,rushing comet1 #adc ,s ,salamander1 #cgj ,santa ,claus1 to make1 #bff ,saucers1 to make flower feast1 #agh ,saw1 #c1 #d1 #f ,sawbuck1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bac ,sconce1 #bdh ,scorer1 basket ball1 #cea ,scoring1 ping pong1 #cch ,screw-driver1 #f ,sea-anemones1 #chb ,sea-shells1 musical1 #bcd ,sea-urchins1 #chc ,sewing-machine1 a make-believe1 #cdj ,shepherd's crook1 to make1 #bdf ,shields1 living alphabet1 #cji ,shoat1 lemon1 #ajc ,sign language1 #bga ,sky-rockets1 #adf ,snap-fire1 #adb ,soil for water garden1 #cae ,sparkling calumet1 #adj ,spiders1 to make ,noah's ark1 #aff ,sponge1 green1 #cah ,spool bubbles1 #bda ,spool cannon1 #bdc ,spools1 what to make of empty1 #bcf ,spring1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bjd ,squirrel1 #cfg2 red1 #cfh ,squirrel1 flying1 #cgg ,starfish1 #chd ,statuary tableaux1 #bha ,steeple1 pasteboard1 #aac ,storks1 to make ,noah's ark1 #agj ,sugar-bowl1 made from egg1 #da ,suit1 basket ball1 #cfd ,sunshine diary1 to make1 #ge ,sweet-grass mats1 #ei ,symbols1 #bgc ,t ,tableaux subjects1 #bhe ,teapot1 made from egg1 #ci ,tea-table1 to make a five o'clock1 #af ,temple1 to make spool1 #bcg ,terms1 ping pong1 #cci ,time-keeper1 basket ball1 #ceb ,toast1 to serve1 #bfg ,tool-chest1 #d ,tool-rack1 #e ,tools1 #d ,tools1 how to use1 #e ,touchstone charm1 #bid ,towel-rack1 to make1 #ad ,tower1 pasteboard1 #aac ,toys1 #abe ,toys1 button-mould1 #acb ,tray1 ,christmas1 #bfe ,trees1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bjh ,try-square1 #d1 #i ,tulip1 to draw a1 #bbd ,turkey1 potato1 #ajb ,turtle1 made from raisin1 #aje ,turtles1 to draw1 #bbb ,u ,umpire1 basket ball1 #cea ,v ,vacation work with ,nature's materials1 #eg ,valentines1 original1 #hi2 four-leaved clover1 #ij2 easel1 #ia2 heart-shaped1 #ic2 fire-cracker1 #id2 pot of flowers1 #ie2 little friend1 #ih ,vase1 a dainty1 made from egg1 #ci ,vegetable animals1 #aja ,vegetables1 growing in water1 #cai ,vegetables1 made from eggs1 #cf ,vines1 ink sketches from1 #abc ,w ,wagon1 to make spool1 #bci ,walk1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bje ,walnuts1 gilded ,english1 #beh ,warps1 rag1 #aei ,wash-stand1 to make a1 #ad ,water garden1 #cad ,watermelon1 made from egg1 #ch ,water plants1 to procure1 #caf ,weasel1 #cfi ,weavers and weft1 #cbb ,weaving materials1 #ahe ,well1 8,abe0 ,lincoln cabin1 #bjf ,wings1 pasteboard1 #aac ,wings1 to make hornet1 #afe ,witch writing1 #bie ,witchery1 #bib ,wood1 choosing the1 #aj ,woodchuck1 #chj ,wood-pile1 8,abe0 ,lincoln1 #bac ,wool dyes1 #afj ,wool rugs1 #aeh ,workshop1 #d ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,,the ,,beard ,,books ,,for ,,young ,,people ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,,the ,,american ,,girl',s ,,handy ,,book ,,how ,,to ,,amuse ,,yourself ,,and ,,others ,by ,,lina and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard ,with nearly #ejj ,illustrations by the ,authors ,one volume1 square #hvo1 #b4jj ------- ,eight new chapters have been added to the forty-two which have carried this famous book to the hearts of all the young people since its first appearance1 and everything that the girls of to-day want to know about their sports1 games1 and winter afternoon and evening work1 is told clearly and simply in this helpful and entertaining volume4 ,the volume is fully and handsomely illustrated from drawings by the authors1 whose designs are in the best sense illustrative of the text4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,first of ,april--,wild ,flowers and ,their ,preservation--,the ,walking ,club--,easter-,egg ,games--,how to ,make a ,lawn ,tennis ,net--,may-,day ,sports--,midsummer-,eve ,games and ,sports--,sea-side ,cottage ,decoration--,a ,girl's ,fourth of ,july--,an ,impression ,album--,picnics1 ,burgoos1 and ,corn-,roasts--,botany as ,applied to ,art--,quiet ,games for ,hot ,weather--,how to ,make a ,hammock--,corn-,husk and ,flower ,dolls--,how to ,make ,fans--,all ,hallow ,eve--,nature's ,fall ,decorations and ,how to ,use ,them--,nutting ,parties--,how to ,draw1 ,paint in ,oil-colors1 and ,model in ,clay and ,wax--,china ,painting--,christmas ,festivities1 and ,home-made ,christmas ,gifts--,amusements and ,games for the ,holidays--,golf--,bicycling--,swimming- -,physical ,culture--,girls' ,clubs--,a ,new ,seashore ,game--,apple ,target ,shooting--,water ,fairies4 ,,louisa ,m4 ,,alcott wrote3 8,i have put it in my list of good and useful books for young people1 as ,i have many requests for advice from my little friends and their anxious mothers4 ,i am most happy to commend your very ingenious and entertaining book40 ,,grace ,,greenwood wrote3 8,it is a treasure which1 once possessed1 no practical girl would willingly part with4 ,it is an invaluable aid in making a home attractive1 comfortable1 artistic1 and refined4 ,the book preaches the gospel of cheerfulness1 industry1 economy1 and comfort40 ,the ,outdoor ,handy ,book ,,for ,,playground1 ,,field ,,and ,,forest ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,with more than #cjj ,illustrations by the ,author4 ,square #hvo1 #b4jj 8,it tells how to play all sorts of games with marbles1 how to make and spin more kinds of tops than most boys ever heard of1 how to make the latest things in plain and fancy kites1 where to dig bait and how to fish1 all about boats and sailing1 and a host of other things which can be done outdoors4 ,the volume is profusely illustrated and will be an unmixed delight to any boy40--,new ,york ,tribune4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,marbles--,tops--,latest ,things in ,kites--,aerial ,fish and ,dragons--,hoops and ,wheels--,how to ,make the ,sucker--,up in the ,air on ,stilts--,bait1 ,live and ,dead--,fishing--,aquatic ,sports--,rigs of ,all ,kinds for ,small ,boats--,shells and ,canoes--,hints for ,collectors--,honey-,bee ,messengers--,a 8,zoo0--,choosing ,up and 8,it0--,counting ,out ,rhymes--,swimming--,games of ,tag--,i ,spy--,leap ,frog--,various ,sports for ,hot ,days--,tip ,cat--,games of ,ball--,mumbly ,peg1 ,hop-,scotch1 and ,jack ,stones--,hints for ,bicyclists--,camping ,out--,boy's ,ballista--8,tally-ho60 and ,other ,cries--,indian ,games for ,boys--,football--,golf1 ,hockey1 and ,shinny--,turtle ,hunting--,skating--,stunning ,muskrats and ,fish--,snowball ,battle and ,snow ,tag--,sleds4 ,from ,,charles ,,dana ,,gibson3 8,it makes a man of a boy and a boy of a man40 8,this book is praiseworthy from end to end1 and will find favor even with those who have long since passed to man's estate40--,the ,nation4 8,it is one of the completest things of the kind ever written1 and with it one can hardly conceive how a boy could be without pleasant and profitable amusement at any time4 ,it treats of directions for every season of the year1 in and out of doors1 and on land and water4 ,one of the best things about it is that it furnishes employment for a boy's ingenuity and mechanical skill4 ,it seems as if this book must be destined to an immense popularity40--,the ,advance4 ,,the ,,american ,,boy',s ,,handy ,,book ,or1 ,what ,to ,do and ,how ,to ,do ,it ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,one volume1 #hvo1 fully ,illustrated by the ,author1 #b4jj ,mr4 ,beard's book tells the active1 inventive1 and practical ,american boy the things he really wants to know2 the thousand things he wants to do1 and the ten thousand ways in which he can do them1 with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every boy can either procure or make4 ,the author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons2 and he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern devices1 besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and practical ideas4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,kite ,time--,war ,kites--,novel ,modes of ,fishing--,home-made ,fishing ,tackle--,how to ,stock1 ,make1 and ,keep a ,fresh-water ,aquarium--,how to ,stock and ,keep a ,marine ,aquarium--,knots1 ,bends1 and ,hitches--,dredge1 ,tangle1 and ,trawl ,fishing--,home-made ,boats--,how to ,rig and ,sail ,small ,boats--,how to ,camp ,out ,without a ,tent--,how to ,rear ,wild ,birds--,home-made ,hunting ,apparatus--,traps and ,trapping--,dogs--,practical ,taxidermy for ,boys--,snow ,houses and ,statuary--,winged ,skaters--,winter ,fishing--,indoor ,amusements--,how to ,make a ,magic ,lantern--,puppet ,shows--,home-made ,masquerade and ,theatrical ,costumes--,with many other subjects of a kindred nature4 8,it is an excellent publication1 and is heartily recommended to parents40--,the ,brooklyn ,eagle4 8,the book has this great advantage over its predecessors1 that most of the games1 tricks1 and other amusements described in it are new4 ,it treats of sports adapted to all seasons of the year2 it is practical1 and it is well illustrated40--,the ,new ,york ,tribune4 8,it tells boys how to make all kinds of things--boats1 traps1 toys1 puzzles1 aquariums1 fishing tackle2 how to tie knots1 splice ropes1 to make bird calls1 sleds1 blow guns1 balloons2 how to rear wild birds1 to train dogs1 and do the thousand and one things that boys take delight in4 ,the book is illustrated in such a way that no mistake can be made2 and the boy who gets a copy of this book will consider himself set up in business40--,the ,indianapolis ,journal4 ,the ,jack of ,all ,trades ,,or1 ,,new ,,ideas ,,for ,,american ,,boys ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,profusely ,illustrated4 ,square #hvo1 #b4jj ------- 8,every boy who is handy with tools of any sort will enjoy this book40 --,youth's ,companion4 8,this book is a capital one to give any boy for a present at ,christmas1 on a birthday1 or indeed at any time40 --,the ,outlook4 8,full of new ideas for active boys who like to use tools and see interesting things growing under their hands40 --,n4 ,y4 ,tribune4 8,a perfect treasure-house of things that delight the soul of a boy and keep him happy and busy40 --,the ,interior4 ,illustration ,,contents ,part ,i4 ,fair ,weather ,ideas ,tree-,top ,club-,houses--,how to ,capture and ,trap ,small ,live ,animals--,the ,back-,yard ,zoo--,a ,back-,yard ,fish-,pond--,pigeon and ,bantam ,coops--,how to ,make a ,back-,yard ,aviary--,a ,boy's ,back-,yard ,workshop--,how to ,build an ,underground ,club-,house--,a ,boys' ,club-,house on the ,water--,how to ,have ,fun on a ,picnic--,how to ,build and ,how to ,furnish a ,daniel ,boone ,cabin--,flat ,boatman's ,house--,the ,american ,boy's ,house ,boat--,back-,yard ,switchback--,how to ,build a ,toboggan ,slide in the ,back-,yard4 ,part ,,ii4 ,rainy ,weather ,ideas ,a ,home-,made ,circus--,good ,games with ,toothpicks and ,matches--,fun with ,scissors and ,pasteboard and ,paper--,how to ,prepare and ,give a ,boys' ,chalk ,talk--,a ,christmas ,novelty for ,boys--,how to ,make ,two ,boys into ,one ,santa ,claus--,a ,circus in the ,attic--,a ,boys' ,stag ,party--,a ,wild ,west ,show in the ,house--,how to ,have a ,panorama ,show4 ------- ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons1 ,publishers #aec-aeg ,fifth ,avenue1 ,new ,york ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ,transcriber's ,note ,errors deemed most likely to be the printer's have been corrected1 and are noted here4 ,the references are to the page and line in the original4 #ch4e ,watermelon ,inserted4 #abi4cj on real carousa_/els4 ,replaced4 #aed4ad there will be increasing originality ,inserted4 #aed4bc what is called 8hit or miss40 ,added4 #bja4ca and constitutes part of the framework ,restored4 #baj4b ,you will be surprised ,inserted4 #beh4cj plenty of worldly goods4 ,inserted4 #bgc4cj and social intercourse 7balm740 ,added4 #ccf4bh ,the writer once knew4_/1 ,replaced4 #cgg4a and you will have met1 it may for the first sic4 time